FB-MultiPier Help Manual PDF

FB-MultiPier Version 5.
FB-MultiPier Features
Multiple Pier Modeling

Unique piers
Each pier can have an entire different set of properties, including: pier geometry, pile group size, soil strata,
loads, etc. Each pier can also have its own elevation. Up to 99 piers can be easily generated to rapidly layout an
entire bridge. The 2D Bridge window shows the bridge layout in plan and the 3D Bridge window shows the 3D
visualization of the bridge.
Pier rotation
Each pier can have a rotation about the vertical (z) axis. This is ideal for modeling skew bridges and radial piers
on curved alignments.
Bridge superstructure
The bridge superstructure is incorporated into the model using an equivalent beam that connects the centerline
of two piers. The bearing connections at the pier supports can be released, constrained, or user-defined using a
custom load-displacement curve.
Two rows of bearing locations
Two independent lines of bearings accommodate the transfer of load from the bridge superstructure to the piers.
Because the bearings are offset from the center of the pier cap, any pier cap torque induced from unequal spans
is automatically included.
Wind Load Generation
Wind loads can be automatically generated for the bridge superstructure. The resulting loads are applied to the
bearings at each pier, more specifically to the bearing locations of the transfer beam. These are based upon
tributary areas and are redistributed during analysis if the superstructure is continuous.
Dynamic Pier Analysis
Time step integration
Time history load functions and ground acceleration records can be applied to the model. Different time step
integration methods are available as well as a variety of analysis control parameters. Concentrated masses and
dampers can be added to the model to simulate added mass and energy dissipation effects.
Modal analysis
The modal analysis option performs a frequency analysis of the model. Both frequencies and mode shapes are
provided as output results.
Dynamic soil modeling
Soil gap modeling is available to model energy dissipation due to hysteretic damping. Cyclic degradation
parameters are also available to modify the lateral soil response during dynamic loading.
Animated results
The 3D model displacement results can be animated for a time step integration analysis. Animation results can
be played and paused and a slider bar is provided for selectively viewing individual time step results.
Time-Displacement plots
The displacement results for any model node can be plotted over time.
Seismic database
Ground acceleration records and response spectrums are provided for notable earthquakes.
1 Program Menus
1. File Menu
2. View Menu
3. Control Menu
4. Wizard Menu
5. Help Menu
6. About FB-MultiPier
1.1 File Menu

The File menu handles the problem creation, file access, printing, and exiting the program.
Figure: 1.1.a File Menu Options
1.2 View Menu

The View menu controls the appearance of the toolbar at the top of the screen and the status bar at the bottom of
the screen.
Figure: 1.2.a View Menu Options
1.3 Control Menu

The Control menu allows the user to access the output data from the program, log file options, program settings,
access to the license update wizard, and control the appearance of the fonts used in the dialogs, graphics, and
plots.
Figure: 1.3.a Control Menu Options

The Program Settings option will open the Program Settings Dialog with options for pile nodes and memory
settings.
1.4 Wizard Menu

The Wizard menu provides access to General Pier Wizard. Following the steps provided by the wizard the user
can quickly create a customized general pier model.
Figure: 1.4.a Wizard Menu Options
1.5 Help Menu

The Help menu provides access to the Help Manual. There are two different Help Manual formats: the Browser
format, and the PDF format. The License File Access Status option displays license file permissions and license
file access information. This information can be useful when troubleshooting license access related issues. The
Help About option is provided to list the version number of the program and current system settings.
Figure: 1.5.a Help Menu Options

Help About Tutorial
1.6 About FB-MultiPier

The About FB-MultiPier dialog displays the following information :
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Version number
Expiration date
License type
Number of seats
License file path where the license file is located
Physical RAM
Drive Space
Figure: 1.6.a About FB-MultiPier
2 Model Data
1. New Project/Problem Page
2. Analysis Page
3. AASHTOPage
4. DynamicsPage
5. Pushover Page
6. Pile Cap Page
7. Pile Page
8. Soil Page
9. Pier Page
10. Wall Structure Page
11. Extra Member Page
12. Load Page
13. Spring Page
14. Concentrated Mass/Damper Page
15. Retained Soil Page
16. Bridge Page
2.1 New Project/Problem Page

Select a new problem type in the "Select a New Problem Type" window, or . . .
Figure: 2.1.a New Problem Page

Change an existing one in the "Model Data" window.
Choose from the following problem types to view a picture of each standard type (default problems):
1. General Pier Option
2. Pile and Cap Option
3. Single Pile Option
4. High Mast Light/Sign Option
5. Retaining Wall Option
6. Sound Wall Option
7. Stiffness Option
8. Pile Bent Option
9. Column Analysis Option
10. Bridge (Multiple Piers) Option
11. One Pier, Two Span Option
Select the unit type (English or Metric) in the "Select a New Problem Type" window.
2.1.1 General Pier Option
Figure: 2.1.b General Pier Model

Select this option to begin a typical pier problem.
For a complete list of problem options go to the Problem Page page.
2.1.2 Pile and Cap Option
Figure: 2.1.c Pile and Cap Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile and cap problem.
For a complete list of problem options go to the Problem Page.
2.1.3 Single Pile Option
Figure: 2.1.d Single Pile Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile problem.
2.1.4 High Mast Light/Sign Option
Figure: 2.1.e High Mast, Light/Sign Model

Select this option to begin a typical high mast light/sign problem.
2.1.5 Retaining Wall Option
Figure: 2.1.f Retaining Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical retaining wall problem.
Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.
2.1.6 Sound Wall Option
Figure: 2.1.g Sound Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical sound wall problem.
Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.
2.1.7 Stiffness Option
Figure: 2.1.h Stiffness Model

Select this option to begin a typical stiffness problem.
2.1.8 Pile Bent Option
Figure: 2.1.i Pile Bent Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile bent problem.
Note: With this option, the Pier Page becomes the Bent Cap page.
2.1.9 Column Analysis Option
Figure: 2.1.j Column Model

Select this option to begin a typical column problem.
2.1.10 Bridge (Multiple Piers) Option
Figure: 2.1.k Bridge Model

Select this option to begin a typical bridge (multiple piers) problem.
2.1.11 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Option
Figure: 2.1.l One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model

Select this option to begin the OPTS problem.
2.2 Analysis Page
Figure: 2.2.a Analysis Page

Pile/Pier Behavior allows linear or nonlinear material behavior.
The Soil Behavior option "Include Soil in Analysis" is enabled by default and causes the program to model soil in
the analysis. Unchecking this option removes the soil and requires the user to enter pile tip spring stiffness to
restrain the model. Use very large springs since the stiffness is only added on the diagonal.
Print control options determine what information is printed in the output file.
Choose options in the following categories:
1.
Pile/Pier Behavior
2.
Section Properties
3.
Iteration Control
4.
Analysis Type
5.
Soil Behavior
6.
Interaction Diagram Phi Factor
7.
Design Options
8.
Stiffness Options
9.
Print Control
2.2.1 Pile/Pier Behavior

Choose either linear or nonlinear for the behavior of the pier and the pile.
Linear Behavior:
Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.
Deflections do not cause secondary moments; no P-delta moments (moments of the axial force times the
displacements of one end of element to another).
Nonlinear Behavior:
Uses input or default stress strain curves which are integrated over the cross-section of the piles/pier
components.
Uses P-delta moments (moments of the axial force times the displacements of one end of element to
another). Furthermore, since the user subdivides the pile into a number of sub-elements, the P-y moments
(moments of axial force times internal displacements within members due to bending) are also modeled.
Return to the Analysis Page.
2.2.2 Section Properties

The Section Properties option is active for linear analysis type only.
When "Transformed Section" is check, the properties of the transformed section will be used for sections with
Full Cross Section properties selected.
2.2.3 Iteration Control

Enter the maximum number of iterations that analysis will run before it determines that the solution will not
converge.
Note: If a small value is entered, the solution may not converge, because it has not been given the chance to
finish the calculations. On the other hand, if a very large value is entered, the analysis may take a long time.
A typical value for the number of iterations is 60.
Enter the tolerance between successive iterations that the analysis must reach before providing a solution.
Note: The user-input convergence tolerance is used by the engine to sweep through every node in the
model. For each iteration, an out-of-balance force for every nodal degree-of-freedom is calculated and compared
to the convergence tolerance. During this sweep, the maximum out-of-balance force is cataloged. If, after
completing the sweep for the entire model, the maximum magnitude out-of-balance force is found to be less than
the convergence tolerance, then the engine decides that a solution has been reached. Otherwise, the system
stiffness is updated, and the next iteration cycle begins. Because, for each iteration and nodal degree-offreedom, the out-of-balance force is directly compared to the convergence tolerance, it is important to select an
input convergence tolerance that is small relative to the smallest (meaningful) computed nodal reaction force.
2.2.4 Analysis Type

The Analysis Page offers two types of analysis:
1.
Static
2.
Dynamic
2.2.5 Soil Behavior
Check "Include Soil in Analysis" to include soil in the problem.

If "Include Soil in Analysis" is unchecked, then enter the stiffness at the tip of the pile.
Use large spring values to model a rigid connection.
2.2.6 Interaction Diagram Phi Factor
Check "User-defined phi" to enter a custom phi factor, or leave the option unchecked if you want to use the
default value.
2.2.7 Design Options

Check "AASHTO Combinations" if you want to select various AASHTO load combinations to use in the analysis.
The AASHTO Page will be enabled once this option is checked.
When converting an existing model to an AASHTO design model, the existing load cases will be deleted so that
new AASHTO load cases can be added. To add AASHTO load cases and assign a load type to each load case,
click the "Load Case Manager" on the AASHTO page or the Load Table on the Load Page.
2.2.8 Stiffness Options

Stiffness Option is only available for pile, pile-and-cap, and pile bent models. Enter the node number of the point
where the equivalent stiffness is to be reported.
For more details please check "16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation"
2.2.9 Print Control

Select the type of output to be printed to an output file from the following:
1.
Pile Displacements
2.
Pile Element Forces
3.
Pile Properties
4.
Pier Displacements
5.
Pier Element Forces
6.
Pier Properties
7.
Soil Response Forces
8.
Soil Data per Layer
9.
Soil Data per Pile Node
10.
Soil Graph per Pile Node
11.
Unbalanced Forces
12.
Bridge Span Element Displacement
13.
Bridge Span Element Forces
14.
Bridge Span Properties
15.
Cap Stresses and Moments
16.
Stress-Strain Curves Data
17.
Pier Spring Force
18.
Interaction Data
19.
Coordinates
20.
XML Data Printing Creates XML output file that can be used to extract FB-MultiPier data. See FBMultiPier XML Specification documentation.
2.3 AASHTO Page
Note: The AASHTO Combination option in the Design Options section of the Analysis Page must be selected
for this Page to appear.
Figure: 2.3.a AASHTO Page

Select the AASHTO combinations that will be used in the analysis using the following:
1.
AASHTO Load Factor Design Criteria
2.
Automated AASHTO Loads
3.
AASHTO Load Case Manager
4.
AASHTO Load Factors Table (Edit Load Factors)
5.
Wind Load Generator
6.
AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table
7.
Load Combinations of the Limit States
8.
AASHTOVertical Wind Pressure Loads
9.
AASHTOFatigue Limit States
10.
Updated Load Factors from V4.15 and Earlier Version
2.3.1 AASHTO Load Factors

Select between Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or Load Factor Design (LFD) method. Limit States
will be updated depending on this selection.
Return to the AASHTO Page.
2.3.2 Automated AASHTO Loads

Choose to include self weight and/or buoyancy cases.
For AASHTO LRFD, self weight is included in the "DC" case and buoyancy is included in the "WA" case.
For AASHTO LFD, self weight is included in the "D" case and buoyancy is included in the "B" case.
2.3.3 AASHTO Load Case Manager
The AASHTO Load Case Manager manages the type and number of load cases in your model. Changes made
with this manager apply to every pier.
Figure: 2.3.b AASHTO Load Case Manager Dialog

To add a new load case, select a load case from the "Available Types" list. Then click the "Add" (<< ) button.
This will add the selected load case to the "Defined Load Cases" list. To remove a defined load case, select a
load case from the "Defined Load Cases" list. Then click the "Remove" (>> ) button.
To change the number of load cases for a particular load type, select a load case from the "Defined Load
Cases" list. Load case types which can vary in number will be followed by parenthesis and a number. Example:
Click on Live Load (1). In the box below the "Defined Load Cases" list, change the value to the desired number
of load cases. This will change the number of load cases for that load type in the "Defined Load Cases" list.
Note: Certain load case types are grouped together. Example, "Wind on Structure" and "Wind on Live
Load". Changing the number of cases for one of these types will automatically change the number of cases for
the other type.
2.3.4 AASHTO Load Factor Table

Load Factors can be edited by clicking on the "Edit Load Factors" button. Edit the individual AASHTO load factors
in the table, or reset the values to the default values.
Figure: 2.3.c AASHTO Maximum Load Factor Table.
Figure: 2.3.d AASHTO Minimum Load Factor Table.

The minimum Load Factor Table is not editable.
Figure: 2.3.e AASHTO Load Fatctor Table using Load Factored Design (LFD)
AASHTO Load Fatctor Table using Load Factored Design (LFD). When using LFD, Gamma (load factor) is
multiplied by each coefficient in the corresponding group. These products can be seen in the AASHTO Load
Preview Combination dialog. For example, Dead Load (D) has a default value of 1.00. It is multiplied by the the
GROUP-I Gamma value 1.3. Thus, the AASHTO Load Preview Combination dialog displays the value 1.3 (1.00 *
1.3 = 1.3); This is the value used in the analysis.
2.3.5 Wind Load Generator

Enter the wind load parameters.
Click Generate Wind Load Cases to convert the wind load to loads at the bearing locations and automatically
create wind load cases. Depending on the problem type you will see one of the following dialog boxes.
This dialog appears for the General Pier and Pile Bent problem types.
Figure: 2.3.f Wind Load Generation Dialog for Single Pier

A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The equations used in the wind
load generation are found here.
2.3.6 AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table
Shows the load combination that will be run. Color changes indicate limit states.
Figure: 2.3.g AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table

Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
From AASHTO LRFD Bridge Specifications, 2010, by the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials, Washington, D.C. Used by permission.
2.3.7 Limit States to Check

Select the limit states to check in the analysis.
Note: The program does not display (or analyze) a load combination unless the load types expected in that
combination are defined. For example, the STRENGTH-III load combination will not be considered until a dead
load type (DC) and a wind load type (WS) are defined. Dead, live, and wind load types are considered
mandatory to generate load combinations. All other load types are optional. Check the load combination preview
in the AASHTO Page to confirm the generation of specific load combinations.
2.3.8 AASHTO Vertical Wind Pressure Load
Section 3.8.2 of the AASHTO Bridge Design Specification requires a vertical wind force to be considered in Limit
States Strength III and Service IV.
To facilitate this requirement, beginning with FB-MultiPier Version 4.16, the FB-MultiPier program enables users
to include two separate load cases, i.e., VP (vertical pressure) and VR (vertical pressure for a reversed load
case), only for Strength III and Service IV.
Note: VR appears if and only if Reversible Loads is selected in the Limit States to Check found on the
AASHTO page.
Figure: 2.3.h AASHTO Load Combination.
Figure: 2.3.i Wind Load Generator.

These VP and VR load cases are combined only with the WS1 (first wind-on-structure load case). If the Wind
Generator is utilized, the user should assign a zero wind angle to WS1, Note: The program combines VP and VR
"only" with WSL1.
2.3.9 AASHTO Fatigue Limit States

AASHTO Fatigue Limit States
When either (or both) Fatigue Limit State(s) is selected, the program allows only Strength III, Strength IV and
Service IV to be included in the automated generation of AASHTO load combinationsall other limit states that
contain live load cases (LL) will be grayed out in the FB-MultiPier AASHTO Limit State window. According to the
2011 AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, live load cases of Fatigue Limit States represent the load
effects due to fatigue loading and all the other limit states of which live load combinations are related to the
normal vehicular use of the bridge should be analyzed separately from the fatigue loading conditions. Therefore,
in FB-MultiPier analysis, only the AASHTO limit states of Strength III and IV, and Service IV are available to be
run simultaneously with the fatigue limit states if selected.
Difference between Fatigue Limit States I and II
The load factor of 1.5 of Fatigue I is twice the load factor of Fatigue II. According to the 2011 AASHTO Spec., this
selection of load factors is to represent a difference in their cumulative load effects between inifinite and finite
fatigue loading cycles, respectively.
NOTE: the AASHTO spec. states that only the load cases of LL, Impact (IM) and Braking (BR) are to be included
in Fatigue I and II. However, FB-MultiPier allows additional load cases (BR, PL and LS) to be included in the load
combination, if desired. The purpose is flexibility in creating customized loads cases. One can choose not to
include any load cases by either editing the load factor to zero in the Load Factor Table or specifying the
corresponding loads equal to zero in the Load window of the program.
Load Cases of LL, IM, CE, BR, PL, and LS
When assigning LL, the program will automatically create load cases for IM and BR. These loads are typically
assumed to coexist and are dependent upon one another. For example, if LL is the result of two lanes being
loaded, then BR will also be the result of two lanes being loaded and so forth. If the bridge deck is curved then
the user has option to assign Centrifugal Forces (CE) that also corresponds to each LL case in a sequential
order.
Pedestrian Loading (PL), if used, is typically assumed to be a constant loading applied to the bearings near the
side walk positions and for this reason only one load case is provided for PL. Very often in practice it is assumed
that traffic may be positioned over sidewalks.
Live Load Surcharge (LS) is typically a vehicular loading applied to the ground surface of backfill being
supported by a retaining wall. FB-MultiPier has a special model case Retaining Wall that allows for this type of
loading.
Reference of the load cases to the AASHTO Spec. Sections:
LL 3.6.1.2
PL 3.6.1.6
IM 3.6.2.1
CE 3.6.3
BR 3.6.4
LS 3.11.6.4
2.3.10 Updated Load Factors from FB-MultiPier Version 4.15 and Earlier
Versions
The default load factors of DD, EH, EV, ES, CR, SH, TG and TU have been updated since FB-MultiPier Version
4.15. Detailed description of changes are summarized in the table.
2.4 Dynamics Page
Figure: 2.4.a Dynamics Page

The Dynamics Page provides various options for controlling a dynamic analysis.
Analysis Type
Two dynamic analysis types are available.
1.
Time Step Integration - Uses implicit integration to solve for results at every time step.
2.
Modal Response Analysis Applies static loads and then performs a response spectrum analysis using
the equilibrium (deformed) position. Performs a CQC of the modal analysis results.
Modal analysis requires the user to select the number of modes to use in the analysis. For a Modal
Response Spectrum analysis, enter the number of modes to consider and the damping ratio used for the
response spectrum. Then, check the modal contribution factors in the printed output file to ensure that at
least 90% of the structure mass is participating in the response.
Check "Dynamic Analysis Types" for more details.

Relatively more advanced dynamic analysis options may be activated from within the Dynamics Advanced
dialog ( Figure: 2.4.b ).
For "Time Step Integration" analysis, concrete and steel hysteresis options are available. Additional details are
provided here: "Structural Material Hysteresis".
For Modal Response analysis, the user can elect to halt the analysis after the Eigen analysis has completed.
Additionally, an option is available for having FB-MultiPier automatically calculate Rayleigh damping factors
using first 5 vibration modes. Note that these factors are intended to damp the first five vibration modes at
(approximately) 5% of critical damping. When this latter option is utilized, the values themselves are listed in the
text output file.
Figure: 2.4.b Dynamics - Advanced
Time Stepping Parameters

Three types of time stepping options are available.
1.
Average acceleration (Newmark).
2.
Linear acceleration (Newmark).
3.
Wilson-Theta.
Enter a constant value for the time step and the number of time steps to consider in the analysis.
Dynamic Relaxation
The reported analysis results do not include the effect of static loads (i.e. self weight). Adding the static results
and response spectrum results may not be conservative and is left to engineering judgment.
Dynamic Relaxation feature is utilized to initialize the system in equilibrium with permanent (static) loading, while
minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the presence of permanent loads.
Global Damping
Two types of damping input are available.
1.
For Time Step Integration type, Rayleigh damping can be specified. The damping is proportional to the
mass and stiffness. Factors can be entered for the pier, piles, and soil. Note that if the Damping
checkbox is checked, but the mass and stiffness damping coefficients for the Soil are both defined as
0.0, then radiation damping will be applied to embedded nodes in the model. See "Dynamic Soil
Properties" for additional details about radiation damping
2.
For Modal Response Type, modal analysis damping can be specified. Enter the damping ratio.
Check "Damping" for more details.

Soil Mass
Soil mass can be automatically incorporated into the system mass matrices. In this context, the 'Percentage' is
used to determine the mass of the soil that is attributed to the translation degrees-of-freedom for each subsurface
node in the model. The 'Percentage' input is taken relative to the pile diameter (or equivalent diameter) at each
subsurface node.
For example, a 'Percentage' input value of 10% would correspond to masses of soil extending 10% beyond the
diameters (or equivalent diameters) of all pile cross sections. The corresponding soil masses contained within
he 10% regions would be accounted for in the system mass matrices.
Note that if non-zero values are supplied to the 'Rayleigh Damping Factors' pertaining to 'Soil', then the soil
masses will also be automatically accounted for in the system damping matrices.
Mass
Consistent (distributed) mass is used in FB-MultiPier.

Load Functions/Spectrums
Three types of load functions are available for a dynamic analysis.
1. Applies Load (Load vs. Time)
2. Ground Acceleration
a. (acceleration vs. time). The gravity factor is used in conjunction with the acceleration record. If the
acceleration is in terms of gs, then the gravity factor would be either 386.4 in/sec2 or 9.81 m/sec2 .
If the acceleration is already in terms of an acceleration unit, then the gravity factor should be
entered as 1.0.
b. (acceleration vs. frequency). For response spectrum analysis.
3. Vessel Collision
Click the "Edit Functions " button to define one or more load functions to apply to the model.
2.4.1 Edit Load Functions

The Edit Load Functions dialog is used to define one or more load functions for a dynamic analysis.
Figure: 2.4.c Edit Load Function Dialog

The "Load Function" combo box contains a list of all defined load functions. Select "Add Load Function" in the
combo box to create a new load function. When the ground acceleration option is specified, only one load
function can be defined and is automatically applied to the entire model. For this case, select "Change Load
Function" in the combo box to select a different function.
Click the "Read From File" button to retrieve an existing load function from a text file.
Predefined load functions have the following extensions:
".dlf"Load vs. Time
".acc"Acceleration (ground) vs. Time
".spt"Acceleration vs. Frequency (response spectrum)
The format of the text file should contain paired data (time, load), (time, acceleration), or (freq., acceleration). The
file can have between one and four pairs per line (maximum 80 characters per line).
Click the "Edit Function Values" button to display the "Load Function Edit Table", which is a spreadsheet-style
grid for customizing the data points. The "Load Function Edit Table" displays the paired values used in the load
function. Rows can be inserted or deleted as needed. The "Update Table" button sorts the values according to
increasing time. You can drag and drop a range of data points from a spreadsheet directly into the table.
Figure: 2.4.d Load Function Edit Table Dialog
2.5 Pushover Page
Click on the Run Pushover Analysis checkbox to activate the pushover analysis module.
There must be 2 load cases. The first load case is used to apply permanent loads that will not be incremented
(i.e. self weight). The second load case is used to specify the load that will be incremented.
Enter the number of pushover steps and the load increment factor. The load increment factor multiplies the loads
in the second load case to create an accumulating load that is applied until convergence cannot be achieved.
For example, a load increment factor of 1.0 would add 100% of the original load to each incremental load case. If
the original load increment was 10 kips, the second load increment would be 20 kip load, the third increment 30
kips, and so forth for the number of load steps. The failure load is printed to the output file when a load is reached
that can not converge to a solution.
Figure: 2.5.a Pushover Page
2.6 Pile Cap Page
Figure: 2.6.a Pile Cap Page.

The number of piles in the X and Y-directions is used to create a grid for positioning the piles. Piles not shown at
a grid position are labeled as missing.
Enter data for the pile cap in the following fields:
Mesh Generation
Enter the number of grid points in the X and Y directions.
Note: The program will prompt you to choose whether you want to place piles at all new grid points
or not.
For the constant and variable spacing options Click "Spacing". This will open the "Grid Spacing Table". If
constant spacing is selected, then only the "Constant Spacing" text box is editable. Enter the variable spacing in
both directions in the tables. Otherwise, if variable spacing is selected, then the "Constant Spacing" text box is
"grayed out" and the only individual spread sheet elements are editable.
Figure: 2.6.b Grid Spacing Table

Elevations
Pile Cap elevation this is the elevation at the centerline of the pile cap.
Top of Layer 1 (Soil Set 1) - This is a read-only display of the elevation at the top of the soil set that is currently
selected in the Soil Edit Window. It can be used on the Pile Cap Page as a reference when inputting the Pile Cap
elevation.
Pile Cap Properties
Enter the following properties for the pile cap:
1. Youngs Modulus
2. Poissons Ratio
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight
Pile Cap Dimensions
X-dir dimension this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the X direction. This measurement
does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is the sum of all grid spacings in the X direction.
Y-dir dimension this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the Y direction. This measurement
does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is the sum of all grid spacings in the Y direction.
Soil-Cap Interaction
Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap "Bearing Resistance" feature
2.6.1 Grid Spacing Table

If constant spacing is selected, then only the "Constant Spacing" text box is editable.
Enter the variable spacing in both directions in the tables.
Otherwise, if variable spacing is selected, then the "Constant Spacing" text box is "grayed out" and the only
individual spread sheet elements are editable.
Figure: 2.6.c Grid Spacing Table

Return to the Pile Cap Page.
2.6.2 Vertical Bearing Resistance
Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap Bearing Resistance feature. When activated, FB-MultiPier assigns
vertical soil springs to each of the nodes in the pile cap. The Bearing Resistance feature can only be utilized if
the mid-surface of the pile cap is at or below the elevation at the top of soil layer 1 (i.e. for submerged pile cap).
Note that any single soil set number can be applied to the cap elements for the purposes of using the Bearing
Resistance feature.
Based on bearing pressure vs displacement curves for each vertical soil spring, vertical reaction forces are
calculated for a given vertical displacement. Note that vertical springs are active at all cap nodes that do not
correspond to pile head nodes. In particular, this process is driven by the current vertical pressure acting at a
given pile cap node, and the corresponding tributary bearing area associated with that pile cap node:
Eqn: 2.6.A
where,
F is the vertical pressure at a pile cap node for a given vertical displacement
Z is the vertical displacement inducing the pressure at the pile cap node
K is the subgrade modulus of soil at the mid-surface of pile cap
Qu is the ultimate bearing resistance of the soil at the mid-surface of pile cap
Note that the vertical pile cap bearing springs only act in compression.
Subgrade modulus (K) provides the initial slope of the bearing pressure versus displacement curve, whereas the
ultimate bearing resistance (Qu ) provides the curve asymptote. Subgrade modulus (K) and ultimate bearing
resistance (Qu ) values are calculated as described below.For Sand:
a) Subgrade modulus (K)
For sand, subgrade modulus is directly input from within the Soil Page.
b) Bearing capacity (Qu ) The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Sand ( 0 and c = 0) is calculated by the general bearing
capacity equation, Eqn: 2.6.B , by Meyerhof (1963)
Eqn: 2.6.B
For zero cohesion (c = 0) Qu becomes:
Eqn: 2.6.C
where,
Nc, Nq and N are bearing capacity factors (Table 1)
Sc, Sq and S are shape factors (Table 1)
Dc, Dq and D are depth factors (Table 1)
Table 1
Factors ( > 0)
Values
Nc
Nq
N
Sc
Sq and S
Dc
Dq and D
is angle of internal friction (rad), and is equal to zero for cohesive soils.
is moist unit weight of sand
v is effective vertical stress at the mid-surface of the pile cap.
B is width of pile cap
L is length of pile cap
z is vertical distance of mid-surface of pile cap from the ground surface.
For Clay:
a) Subgrade modulus (K)
For clay, subgrade modulus is selected from the table (Reese, 1984) below, based on the directly input value of
undrained shear strength (Cu):
Cohesive Soil
Properties
Shear Strength
Unit
Soft
Medium
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
(Cu,
250-500
500-1000
1000-
2000-
4000-
psf)
Subgrade Modulus
(Static Loading)
Subgrade Modulus
(cyclic Loading)
2000
4000
8000
(k, pci)
30
100
500
1000
2000
(k, pci)
200
400
800
b) Bearing capacity (Qu ) The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Clay ( = 0 and c 0) is calculated by the general bearing capacity
equation, Eqn: 2.6.D , by Meyerhof (1963)
Eqn: 2.6.D
For zero internal friction angle ( = 0) bearing factor N is zero. Accordingly, Qu becomes:
Eqn: 2.6.E
where,
Nc, Nq and N are bearing capacity factors (Table 2)
Sc, Sq and S are shape factors (Table 2)
Dc, Dq and D are depth factors (Table 2)
Table 2
Factors ( = 0)
Values
Nc
Nc = 5.14
Nq
Nq = 1
N = 0
Sc
Sc = 1 + 0.2(B/L)
Sq and S
Sq = S = 1
Dc
Dc = 1 + 0.2(z/B)
Dq and D
Dq = D = 1
Return to the Pile Cap Page.
2.7 Pile Page

Enter data for the pile in the following fields:
1. Pile Section Description

2. Pile to Cap Connection
3. Pile Length Data
4. Pile Type and Batter Data
Figure: 2.7.a Pile Page
2.7.1 Pile Section Description
A different edit window appears depending upon the type of section description selected.
If "Gross Properties" is selected then the Gross Pile Properties window will appear if you click "Edit" from the "Edit
Cross Sections" in Section Description. Note that gross section properties can only be specified for linear pile
behavior.
Otherwise, if "Full Cross Section" is selected, then the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties window will appear.
Return to the Pile Page.
2.7.1.1 Gross Cross Section Pile Properties
Figure: 2.7.b Gross Pile Properties Dialog

Modify the properties of a Gross cross section in the following fields:
Pile Type Info
Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each pile. -> Pile Sets
Tutorial
Use Pile/Shaft Segment List to Add and remove pile/shaft segments of the selected pile type.
Database Section Selection
If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined set of cross-sections.
In the Gross Pile Properties page, there is only one option (Linear Pile) when you click on the "Retrieve Section"
button.
If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To Database" button. The user
can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Section" button
Section Type
Select a cross section type from the following:
1.Circular Pile
2.Square Pile
3.H-Pile
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selected.
Segment Dimensions
Enter the following data for the dimensions of the segment:
1.Length
2.Area
3.DiameterOnly available for a circular pile
4.WidthOnly available for a square pile
5.DepthOnly available for a square pile
6.[Unit] Weight
Note: Except Length, Other options are only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selected.
Section Properties
1.Inertia 2 AxisThe moment of inertia about the 2-axis
2.Inertia 3 AxisThe moment of inertia about the 3-axis
3.Torsional Inertia
4.Youngs Modulus
5.Shear Modulus
Return to Pile Section Description page.
2.7.1.2 Full Cross-Section Pile Properties
Figure: 2.7.c Full Cross Section Properties Dialog

Modify all of the properties of a pile cross section in the following fields:
Pile Type Info
Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each pile. -> Pile Sets
Tutorial
Use Pile/Shaft Segment List to Add and remove pile/shaft segments of the selected pile type.
When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:
Figure: 2.7.d Pile Database Options

Section Type
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of cross section selected.
1. Circular Pile
2. Rectangular Pile
3. H-Pile
4. Pipe Pile
5. Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Database Section" option is selected.
Section Constitutive Properties
Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain" buttons will yield
different windows.
Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Length
2. Width (w)
3. Depth (h)
4. Unit Weight
H-Pile:
1. Length
2. Unit Weight
Pipe Pile / Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled):
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight
Detailed Cross Section
By clicking the "Section Details" button, one can edit the bar groups and material properties of the cross section
in a spreadsheet format. Select a segment from the "Section List" and a pile set from the "Pile Type" list to edit.
Figure: 2.7.e Detailed Cross Section Table

Return to Pile Section Description page.
Circular Section Properties
Figure: 2.7.f Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups
Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.
Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestress for the type of steel in the bar groups. If Prestressed is chosen, then
enter the prestress after losses.
For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.
Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" Checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the Shell Thickness.
Figure: 2.7.g Shell Thickness

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" Checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to enter the void
diameter of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.7.h CircularVoid Diameter

H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" Checkbox. Click "Edit H-Section" to enter the HSection depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.
Figure: 2.7.i Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.
Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2.Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3.Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular ). For Circular group, input a Group Diameter. For
Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis )and staring coordinates. Bars are
uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite corner in the specified orientation.
5.Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6.Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..
Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)
1. Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2. Enter the cover. Cover Thickness. This is the distance between the cross section edge and the steel bars.
3. Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4. Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5. Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.
For both methods:
Choose between mild steel or prestress for the type of steel in the group.
If prestress is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
Confined Concrete
If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no confinement or "Shear
Reinforcement Only" for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the diameter of the outermost
reinforcement group. If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement or "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the
casing diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity calculations are
displayed below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for additional details concerning the
constitutive relationships used for each cross section component.
Figure: 2.7.j Confined Concrete Options
Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "None" option is selected.

2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement Only" can only be selected when no shell is modeled
for the cross section.
3. A non-zero shell thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to enable the "Shear
Reinforcement and Casing" confinement option.
Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
Rectangular Section Properties
Figure: 2.7.k Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups
Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" Checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to enter the diameter for
a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.7.l Rectangular Void Data

H-Section
Figure: 2.7.m Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
Custom:

For both methods:
H-Pile Properties
Figure: 2.7.n H-Pile Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the properties of the H-Pile in the following fields:
Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-pile in the text boxes.
Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-pile (Web horizontal or web vertical).
Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties page.
Pipe Pile Properties
Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section Dimension" Panel.
Concrete is not included in this cross section. (fc and Ec are set to zero.)
Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)
Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section Dimensions" Panel.
Concrete is included in this cross section. To set the section constitutive properties for concrete and steel, click
the 'Edit Properties' button.
For more information on inputting data for the pipe pile (concrete filled) section, see the "circular section" type.

different windows.
Default Stress/Strain Curve
Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual material properties, if the
"Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in the text boxes.
Figure: 2.7.o Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve
The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option
is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material in the table. Click the
"Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.
Figure: 2.7.p User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Pile Section Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress Strain Curve", or "UserDefined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by selecting that material from the
options at the top.
Figure: 2.7.q Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties
Figure: 2.7.r Stress-Strain Properties Plot.
Note: Linear interpolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those provided in the stressstrain curve.
Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
2.7.2 Pile to Cap Connection

Choose to use either a "Pinned" or "Fixed" pile to cap connection.
2.7.3 Pile Length Data

"The Tip Elevation on the 'Pile Page' is not editable. It is a function of the pile cap elevation, which is assigned on
the 'Pile Cap Page', and the pile length, which is assigned on the pile cross section dialog. For example, if the
pile cap elevation is 0, and the pile length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be -50'. If the pile cap elevation is
100', and the pile length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be +50'. To change the 'Tip Elevation', click the 'Edit
Cross Section' button on the 'Pile Page' and change the length(s) of the pile segment(s).
Enter the number of nodes in the pile free length above the soil.
Figure: 2.7.s Free Length of Pile Above Soil

2.7.4 Pile Type and Batter Data

The Pile Type and Batter Data frame has the following features:
1. Pile use the up and down arrows of this Pile spin control to select a pile. The selected piles cross sections
display in the list box immediately under the Pile spin control, and an image of the pile cross section displays on
the right side of the Pile page. In this example, the cross section is a 24 square pile.
Figure: 2.7.t Pile Type Batter Data section.

If the selected pile has multiple cross sections, the selected cross section (highlighted in blue) will display. The
selected pile also highlights (in dark red) in the Pile Edit window.
Figure: 2.7.u Pile Edit Window.

2. Pile Type use this combo box to assign a Pile Type to the currently selected pile. The currently selected pile
is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional Pile Types can be defined by entering the
cross section dialogs, by clicking the Edit button on the Pile Page. In this example, Pile Type 2 has been
selected for Pile 1. Unlike Pile Type 1, which is a 24 square cross section, Pile Type 2 is a 36 round cross
section.
Figure: 2.7.v Pile Type Batter Data Circular.

The applied Pile Type is immediately reflected in the Pile Edit window.
Figure: 2.7.w Pile Edit Window Circular Pile.

3. Soil Set use this combo box to assign a soil set to the currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is
the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional Soil Sets can be defined on the Soil Page, by
selecting the Add Set menu item inside the Soil Set combo box. In this example, soil set 2 has been selected
for Pile 1. One soil set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to the same pile
type, but the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.
Figure: 2.7.x Pile Type Batter Data Soil Set.

The applied soil set is immediately reflected in the Pile Edit window (see Figure 6). To view this Soil Set change
in the Pile Edit window, the window must be in Assign Soil Sets to Piles mode.
Figure: 2.7.y Pile Edit Window Soil Set Assigned.

4. Batter use the X Batter and Y Batter input boxes to enter batter information for the currently selected pile. The
currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. In this example, an X Batter of 0.1
has been input, and a Y Batter of 0.1 has been input.
Figure: 2.7.z Pile Type Batter Data Batter Applied

The applied batter immediately is reflected in the Pile Edit window.
Figure: 2.7.aa Pile Edit Window Batter Pile 3.

2.8 Soil Page

Edit the soil with the following options:
1. Soil Layer Data
2. Soil Layer Models
a. Additional Soil Properties ("Edit")
b. Printable Soil Graph ("Plot")
c. Advanced Soil Data ("Group")
a. Soil Table ("Table")
3. Soil Importing
4. Soil Strength Criteria
5. Elevations
Figure: 2.8.a Soil Page

Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.
For this soil selected, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or
Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:
The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog.
The"Plot" button will activate the "Printable Soil Graph" dialog which allows the user to view and print the various
soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the selected options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).
The "Group" button will activate the "Advanced Soil Data" dialog to specify for the soil model. The user can
specify the P-multipliers.
The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This feature allows the user to
view/modify multiple soil sets and layers and the same time and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Pile
Interaction" for details on the soil properties.
The "Import" button and select the input file containing the required soil data. This will retrieve all soil information
(all soil sets, all soil layers, all soil properties) from an existing input file, and replace the current soil data in the
open model with this data.
2.8.1 Soil Layer Data

Create a new soil set or select an existing one from the "Soil Set" drop-down list. The selected soil set in the "Soil
Set" combo box is displayed in the "Soil Edit" window below the "Soil Page", along with the currently selected
pile. This pile selection is made in the "Pile Edit" window OR in the "Pile Page". In "Soil Edit" window, the pile
nodes in soil can be clicked to view the soil curves. However, if the selected soil set is not assigned to the
selected pile, the pile nodes will not draw.
One soil set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to the same pile type, but
the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.
When adding a new soil set to the model, the soil set is not automatically applied to a pile grid point. To assign
the soil set to piles, visit the "Pile Page" OR the "Pile Edit" window. For more information on the integration
between the selected pile and the selected soil set, click "Soil-Pile Interaction".
Create a new soil layer or select an existing one from the "Soil Layer" drop-down list.
Select the type of soil from the following options in the "Soil Type" drop-down list:
1. Cohesionless
2. Cohesive
3. Rock
Then from the "Soil Layer Models" panel, select the Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip (only for soil layer
containing pile tip) layer models for each soil layer
Enter the unit weight for the current soil layer in the "Unit Weight" text box.
Note: The unit weight is the total unit weight of the soil. The program will automatically subtract the unit weight
of water to get the effective unit weight
Return to the Soil Page.
2.8.2 Soil Layer Models

Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.
Select the layer models for each soil layer:
1. Lateral
2. Axial
3. Torsional
4. Tip (only for soil layer containing pile tip)
Depending on the Soil Type selected, FB-MultiPier have the following inbuild lateral, axial, torsional and tip Soil
Models. User can select one of the soil models from the drop-down lists.
1. Lateral
A. Cohesionless
i. Sand (O'Neill)
ii. Sand (Reese)
iii. Sand (API)
iv. Custom P-Y
B. Cohesive
i. Clay (O'Neill)
ii. Soft Clay Below the Water Table
iii. Stiff Clay Below the Water Table
iv. Stiff Clay Above the Water Table
v. Clay (API)
vi. Custom P-Y
C. Rock
i. Limestone (McVay)
ii. Limestone (McVay) 2-3 Option
iii. Custom P-Y
2. Axial
A. Cohesionless
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Sand
iii. Driven Pile Sand (API)
iv. Custom T-Z
B. Cohesive
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Clay
iii. Driven Pile Clay(API)
iv. Custom T-Z
C. Rock
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft IGM
iii. Drilled Shaft Limestone (McVay)
iv. Custom T-Z
3. Torsional
A. Hyperbolic
B. Custom T-
4. Tip
A. Driven Pile
B. Drilled Shaft Sand
C. Driven Pile Sand (API)
D. Drilled Shaft Clay
E. Driven Pile Clay (API)
F. Drilled Shaft IGM
G. Custom Q-Z
For a selected soil, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option(Lateral, Axial, Torsional or
Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:
The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog. Clicking the "Dynamic Properties " button will
open the Soil Dynamics Dialog which will allow the user to input additional soil properties that pertain only to
dynamic type analysis.
The"Plot" button will activate the "Printable Soil Graph" dialog which allows the user to view and print the various
soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the selected options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).
The "Group" button will activate the "Advanced Soil Data" dialog to specify for the soil model. The user can
specify the P-multipliers.
The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This feature allows the user to
view/modify multiple soil sets and layers and the same time and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Pile
Interaction" for details on the soil properties.
When using a custom soil curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option(Lateral, Axial,
Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button.
The "Specify Top and Bottom Layer Props" checkbox allows you to enter different soil properties at the top and
bottom of each layer. The values will be interpolated across the layer.
2.8.2.1 Additional Soil Properties

One can edit the Soil properties by selecting one of the option (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking
the "Edit" button. This will open the "Additional Soil Properties" dialog below.
Figure: 2.8.b Additional Soil Properties Dialog

Clicking the "Dynamic Properties" button on "Additional Soil Properties" dialog will open the "Dynamics Soil
Properties" dialog which will allow the user to input additional soil properties that pertain only to dynamic type
analysis.Please refer "Dynamics Soil Properties" section for more details. This option will only be available in
dynamic type analysis. These properties are for lateral behavior only.
Figure: 2.8.c Dynamic Soil Properties Dialog

When using a custom soil curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option (Lateral, Axial,
Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button.
Figure: 2.8.d Custom Soil Properties Dialog

The Import Data button retrieves custom curves data from a text (.txt) file, and replaces the current curve data in
the table.
The Save to File button saves the custom curve data from the table to a text (.txt) file, in the format below.
Number of Curve Points in File
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
Return to the Soil Layer Models page.
2.8.2.2 Printable Soil Graph

The Plot button on the Soil page actives the Printable Soil Graph Dialog which allows users to plot the different
types of load vs. deflection curves for multiple nodes of a pile. All plot types (P-Y, T-Z, T- , Q-Z) may be viewed
(one at a time) by changing the selected Plot Type radio button.
1. P-Y (Lateral) - Plots the lateral reaction per unit length vs. lateral deflection
2. T-Z (Axial) - Plots the axial stress vs. axial displacement
3. T- (Torsional) - Plots torsional stress vs. rotational displacement
4. Q-Z (Tip) - Plots the tip force vs. tip displacement
Figure: 2.8.e Printable Soil Graph dialog

The properties of the selected Soil Layer are displayed on the right hand side for easy reference, and the exact
plot values for the plot are displayed in a table below this. Each displayed plot and its corresponding data table
may be printed or saved using the option buttons below each.
The Soil Set may be changed and will affect both the Soil Layers and Piles settings available. The only available
Soil Layers will be those that exist in the selected Soil Set. Only Piles currently in the selected Soil Set will be
available and will control the nodes (elevations) available for display.
The elevations available are based on the selected Soil Layer and the location of nodes with in the selected pile.
Elevations are listed from top down and will include the top of layer, all the nodes within the layer and then the
bottom of layer. Each selection displays both the node number and elevation of the selection. Once these
selections are completed press the Update Plot button to show the new plot and table data.
Soil Plot Tutorial
2.8.2.3 Advanced Soil Data

Select the type of P-multipliers to use from the following:
1. User defined P-multipliers
2. All P-multipliers are one
3. Use the default P-multipliers by clicking "Default"
The user can enter the Axial Pile Group Efficiency factor.
Figure: 2.8.f Advanced Soil Layer Properties Dialog
2.8.2.4 Soil Table

All soil set and soil layer properties can be entered using the Soil Table. There are three main steps to complete
this process.
Figure: 2.8.g Soil Table (Global Data Tab)

1) Enter Soil Set data. From the Global tab, information is entered for each soil set used. Each soil set requires 4
properties need to be entered; number of soil layers, water table elevation, SPT N values and number of cycles
used.
2) Enter Soil Layer data. Under the Soil Set data on the Global tab, properties must be set for every layer in each
set. Each layer requires; soil type, top and bottom elevations, unit weight, internal friction angle, and the Soil
Model used for Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip. The option to set properties for both top and bottom of layer can
be set here.
Note: The unit weight is the total unit weight of the soil. The program will automatically subtract the unit weight
of water to get the effective unit weight.
3) Enter Soil Layer Properties. Move to each of the tabs (Lateral, Axial, Torsional, Tip) in turn and enter the
requested properties. Each tab contains a table with a row for each soil layer and columns for all the possible
properties that could be used by the available models. The selected model is displayed here and can be
changed, which will update the global tab and will change the active table cells that are available to enter data.
Soil Table Tutorial
2.8.3 Soil Importing

The "Import" button and select the input file containing the required soil data. This will retrieve all soil information
(all soil sets, all soil layers, all soil properties) from an existing input file, and replace the current soil data in the
open model with this data.
2.8.4 Soil Strength Criteria

Enter the internal friction angle of the soil. Check for inclusion of cyclic loading.
Click "Edit SPT" button to enter the SPT Blow count(N) values though soil elevation to have the program
automatically calculate the internal friction angle.
"Edit SPT" will open the "SPT"dialog. User can also choose for correction for overburden. Also enter the number
of data points with SPT Blow count (N values) with elevation. Click ok and the program will automatically
calculation the internal friction angle.
Figure: 2.8.h SPT Data Dialog
2.8.5 Elevations
Enter the elevation of the water table, and the top and bottom elevation of each layer.
Note: Changes made to soil layer elevations AFTER extra members have been applied to the model may
cause extra members to shift position. The explanation 'Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model
Changes' describes this further.
2.9 Pier Page

The 'Edit Cross Section' button allows selection of structure cross sections.
To specify bearing locations, check the bearing location box, then click the Bearing Locs button to specify the
bearing locations. Bearing locations must be specified before applying AASHTO loads.
To specify tapered sections, check the taper box and specify the number of uniform sections.
This page is also the Wall Structure page for the Retaining Wall and Sound Wall options, and the Bent Cap page
for the Pile Bent option.
Edit the pier properties with the following options:
1. Pier Geometry
2. Pier Section Description
3. Taper Data
Figure: 2.9.a Pier Page
2.9.1 Pier Geometry

Enter the height of the pier, the cantilever distance, the column spacing, the column offset, and the number of
pier columns.
Enter the number of column nodes, cantilever nodes, and beam nodes.
Choose to specify Bearing Locations for the pier.
Choose to have flooded pier columns.
Figure: 2.9.b Pier Node Spacing Diagram
Figure: 2.9.c Pier Cap Slope
Return to the Pier Page.
2.9.1.1 Bearing Locations

Select either uniform or variable bearing spacing. You will only be able to enter data into the appropriate field for
your selection.
If the current problem has a single pier then the Bearing Layout options will be visible. This allows you to select
one or two rows of bearing locations. If the problem has multiple piers then this option will be located on the
Bridge Page. The interface will alter itself to only request the needed data for the options selected.
Enter the number of Bearing Locations, the Column Offset of the starting location and the spacing between
locations. If more than one bearing row is present then the Bearing Offset must also be entered.
Figure: 2.9.d Bearing Location Dialog

Return to the Pier Geometry page
2.9.1.2 Bearing Rotation Angle
User can rotate the Pier and/or Bearing Pads on the Bridge Page. The rotation of the bearing is independent of
that of the Pier rotation and is only present for the Bridge Models.
Figure: 2.9.e Bearing Angle
2.9.2 Pier Section Description

A different edit window appears depending upon the section description selected.
If "Gross Properties" is selected and the "Edit Cross Section" button is clicked, then the Gross Section Pier
Properties window will appear.If Gross Properties are selected only linear analysis is possible.
Otherwise, if "Full Cross Section" is selected, then the Full Cross Section Pier Properties window will appear.
When Full Pier component properties are input non-linear analysis is an option and linear analysis also. (For
linear analysis the program calculates linear elastic properties from the Full Property description.)
By clicking the "Table View" in Edit Cross section panel, opens the "Pier Cross Section Table". In the "Pier Cross
Section Table" the user can enter or view the most of the cross-section data for column and Pier cap in one table.
2.9.2.1 Gross Section Pier Properties
Figure: 2.9.a Gross Section Pier Properties
Modify the properties of a linear pier cross section in the following fields:
Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.
Figure: 2.9.b Component Taper End Point Locations

In the Gross Pier Properties page, there is only one option (Linear 36" new round concrete) when you click on
the "Retrieve Section" button.
Section Data
Enter the area and the unit weight of the section
Taper Cantilever Properties
Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.
Figure: 2.9.c Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties

Section Properties
1. Inertia 2 AxisThe moment of inertia about the 2-axis
2. Inertia 3 AxisThe moment of inertia about the 3-axis
3. Torsional Inertia
4. Youngs Modulus
5. Shear Modulus
Return to the Pier Section Description page.
2.9.2.2 Full Cross Section Pier Properties
Figure: 2.9.d Full Cross Section Pier Properties Dialog

Modify all of the properties of a Pier cross section in the following fields:
Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.
Figure: 2.9.e Component Taper End Point Locations

When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:
Figure: 2.9.f Pier Cross Section Options

can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Section" button.
Section Type
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of cross section selected.
1. Circular Section
2. Rectangular Section
3. H-Section
4. Bullet Section
different windows.
Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Width (w)
2. Depth (h)
3. Unit Weight
H-Section:
1. Unit Weight
Bullet Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Width (w)
3. Unit Weight
Parabolic Taper Cantilever Properties
Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.
Figure: 2.9.g Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties

Detailed Cross Section
By clicking the "Section Details" button, one can edit the bar groups and material properties of the cross section
in a spreadsheet format. Select a segment from the "Section List" to edit.
Figure: 2.9.h Detailed Cross Section Table

Return to the Pier Section Description page.
Circular Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.i Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups
For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.
Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" Checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the Shell Thickness.
Figure: 2.9.j Shell Thickness

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" Checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to enter the void
diameter of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.9.k CircularVoid Diameter

H-Section
Figure: 2.9.l Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
Custom:
For both methods:
Confined Concrete
If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no confinement or "Shear
Reinforcement Only" for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the diameter of the outermost
reinforcement group. If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement or "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the
casing diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity calculations are
displayed below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for additional details concerning the
constitutive relationships used for each cross section component.
Figure: 2.9.m Confined Concrete Options
Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "None" option is selected.

2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement Only" can only be selected when no shell is modeled
for the cross section.
3. A non-zero shell thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to enable the "Shear
Reinforcement and Casing" confinement option.
Rectangular Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.n Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups
Hollow Section
a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.9.o Rectangular Void Data

H-Section
Figure: 2.9.p Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
Custom:

For both methods:
H-Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.q H-Section Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the properties of the H-Section in the following fields:
Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-Section in the text boxes.
Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-Section (Web horizontal or web vertical).
Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
Bullet Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.r Bullet Cross Section Properties Dialog
Edit the properties of a bullet section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups
Cross Section Orientation

Select whether the cross section is oriented in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.
Void Data
a bullet void, or the length and width for a rectangular void.
Figure: 2.9.s Bullet Void Dialog

Allocation Methods
Enter the number of bars in the group in the "Bars in Group" text box and the total area of bar group in the 'Bar
Area' text box.
If the "Parallel" bar group orientation is selected, enter the coordinates of the bar group in the "Start 2 Coord" and
"Start 3 Coord" text boxes. These are the starting coordinates of the bar group. The "Parallel" groups are parallel
to the straight edges of the bullet cross section.
If the "Circular End" bar group orientation is selected, enter the group diameter in the "Group Diameter" text box.
The "Circular End" bar groups are positioned in the semicircular ends of the bullet cross section.
Choose between mild steel or prestress for the type of steel in the group. If prestress is chosen, then enter the
prestress after losses.
Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.

different windows.
Default Stress/Strain Curve
Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual material properties, if the
"Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in the text boxes.
Figure: 2.9.t Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve
The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option
is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material in the table. Click the
"Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.
Figure: 2.9.u User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Pile Section Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress Strain Curve", or "UserDefined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by selecting that material from the
options at the top.
Figure: 2.9.v Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties
Figure: 2.9.w Stress-Strain Properties Plot.
Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
2.9.2.3 Pier Cross Section Table

The Pier Cross Section Table allows the user to enter and view most pier cross section data ina single table.
This makes double checking the data very easy. Each table column represents one cross section. The
properties available in the table depend upon the cross section shape, behavior, type of steel, etc. For example,
a round cross section would only have the 'Diameter' dimension enabled, and not the 'Width' and 'Depth'
dimensions.
Tips for using the table:
1.For cross section orientation, click the 'Graphic' button in the 'Shape' field. This displays the cross section
shape (not drawn to scale), with the 2-3 axis as reference.
2. If 'Material Properties' fields are not enabled, this is most likely due to a lack of steel reinforcement in the cross
section. Steel must be present in order to enable these fields. To do so, click the 'Edit Steel' button in the
'Reinforcement' field, and enter steel data as necessary. Then return to the table and the necessary material
property fields will be enabled.
3.To taper a cross section, check the appropriate 'Taper' checkbox. This will create another column in the table,
so that cross section data can be entered for each end of the pier component. Example: column bottom, column
top.
4. To create custom Stress/Strain Curves, select "Custom Stress/Strain" in the 'Material Properties' field. Then
click the 'Custom Curves' button in the 'Custom Curves' field.
5.For quick access to directions on using the table, click the "Help >>"button.
6.When printing the table, to make the table more easily fit on a single page, hide the 'Help' section on the right
side of the table, by clicking the 'Help' button, so that the arrows point to the right (Help >>).
Figure: 2.9.x Pier Cross Section Table Linear
Figure: 2.9.y Pier Cross Section Table NonLinear
Return to the Pier Section Description section.
2.9.3 Taper Data

Choose to apply a taper to the pier column, pier cap beam, and the pier cap cantilever.
Also, select whether the cantilever taper is linear or parabolic.
Figure: 2.9.z Pier Taper End Point Locations

For more detailed explanation, see the Taper Modeling page.
2.10 Wall Structure Page

Wall Structure Page is only active for Retaining Wall Problem type.
Figure: 2.10.a Wall Structure Page

Enter the wall height (it must be taller than the retained layer thickness). Note that the base of the wall and the
bottom of the retained soil layer are located at the centerline elevation of the pile cap.
Enter the wall offset. This is the +x global distance from the edge of the pile cap (footing) to the wall location.
A different edit window appears depending upon the section description selected. This is similar to the Pier
Section definition.
If "Gross Properties" is selected and the "Edit Cross Section" button is clicked, then the Gross Section Wall
Properties window will appear.If Gross Properties are selected only linear analysis is possible.
Otherwise, if "Full Cross Section" is selected, then the Full Cross Section Wall Properties window will appear.
When Full Pier component properties are input non-linear analysis is an option and linear analysis also. (For
linear analysis the program calculates linear elastic properties from the Full Property description.)
By clicking the "Table View" in Edit Cross section panel, opens the "Pier Cross Section Table". In the "Pier Cross
Section Table" the user can enter or view the most of the cross-section data for Wall in one table.
2.11 Extra Members Page
Figure: 2.11.a Extra Members Page

Additional members (extra members) can be added to connect nodes in the model. To create cross sections for
use in extra member elements, click the "Edit Cross Sections" button. This launches the cross sectional windows
on which one or more cross sections can be defined. Once defined, these cross sections can be applied to extra
member elements.
To create the extra member elements, click the "Add Element" button. This will add a blank row in the table, in
which to enter extra member data. Each extra member element must be assigned an I-Node and J-Node value.
The I-Node and J-Node values can be typed directly into the table cells, or selected (clicked) in the 3D.
Additional extra member end conditions can be assigned as pinned or fixed, at either of both ends.
View window to the right of the X-Members Page. To apply a cross section to the extra member element, click the
drop down cell in the "Cross Sections" area. This will display a list of available extra member cross sections.
These are the sections that were created on the cross section windows when the "Edit Cross Sections" button
was clicked. The cross section type for extra members ("Gross Properties" or "Full Cross Section") uses the same
type selected for the pier cross sections on the Pier Page (also referred to as the Bent Cap Page or Wall
Structure Page depending on the model type), and can only be changed by changing the selection on the Pier
page. For example, if pier cross sections have been defined as "Gross Properties", then extra member cross
sections must also use "Gross Properties".
Changes made in the model AFTER extra members have been applied may cause extra members to shift
position. The explanation "Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model Changes" describes this further .
Note: Extra members are not available in the following models: Pile and Cap Only, Stiffness, Single Pile,
Column Analysis.
2.12 Load Page
To add a load, select a node with mouse in 3-D View window.

Then click the right 'Add' button to add the load to the node.
Enter load values for the 6 degrees of freedom.
Additional load cases can be added by clicking the left 'Add' button.
The 'Table' button shows a table of the loads for the selected load case.
The self-weight and buoyant load factors are used to set the contribution of self-weight and buoyancy for each
load case. These are used for non-AASHTO loads.
For AASHTO load cases, self weight is included by adding a dead load type case and buoyancy is included by
adding a buoyancy type case. See AASHTO Page to automatically include self weight and buoyancy.
Edit the loads in the following areas:
1. Load Case
2. Buoyancy
3. Applied Nodal Loads
4. Loads
5. Load Table
6. AASHTOLoad Table
7. Distributed Load
8. Vessel Collision
In static analysis mode, the Load Page looks as follows:
Figure: 2.12.a Load Page Static Analysis Load

Click the "PreLoad" button to launch the "PreLoad" dialog. On the "PreLoad" dialog, in the table, select (check)
the checkbox in the "Include PreLoad" column for each desired load case. PreLoad will be applied to each of the
selected load cases. Preload is typically used to model construction loads.
Figure: 2.12.b PreLoad
Check "Prescribed Displacement" to apply a displacement (rather than a load) to a node. Loads and
Displacements can not be applied at the same node in the same load case.
In AASHTO load mode, the Load Page looks as follows:
Figure: 2.12.c Load Page in AASHTO Analysis Mode

The L and R designations next to the bearing loads indicate a left and/or right bearing row, respectively.
In dynamics analysis mode the Load Page looks as follows:
Figure: 2.12.d Load Page in Dynamic Analysis Mode

Nodal loads are marked as either static (S), or dynamic (D). Clicking on the S or D letter toggles the load type
from static to dynamic, and vice versa. For dynamic load types, the directional factors specify the direction of load
application. The factors must be either 1 or 0, where 1 indicates load application in that direction, and 0 indicates
no load application in that direction. The load function is selected from the load function combo box. Each node
can have a different load function. Click on the "Acc. (all nodes)" placeholder in the node list to specify a direction
when the ground acceleration option is selected.
Click the "Table" button to edit both static and dynamic loads.
Click the Thermal Load button to launch the Thermal Load Cases dialog. This dialog is only available for
bridge models in non-AASHTO mode (in AASHTO mode, thermal loading is applied explicitly in the TU and TG
load cases). The table on the Thermal Load Cases dialog displays one row per load case. Use the checkboxes
in the Include Thermal Loadings table column to apply thermal loading to the desired load cases.
Figure: 2.12.e Thermal Load Cases
2.12.1 Load Case

Select a load case to view or modify. Add and remove new load cases.
Return to the Load Page.
2.12.2 Buoyancy
The buoyant force on the bridge substructure that is submerged, i.e., below the water table, is automatically
computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is selected in non-AASHTO mode or if buoyancy is activated
(checked on) in AASHTO mode. The computation includes piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of the
pile cap is accounted for, where the volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be used to determine the
buoyant force acting on the pile cap. A convenient way to check buoyancy and self-weight calculations is to
include only these loads, run the program, and then view the "Sum of Total Soil Spring Loads", Z direction in the
output file.
2.12.3 Applied Nodal Loads

Select the node to which a load is applied. Add and delete a nodal load.
Alternatively, click the Table button to edit the loads in a spreadsheet format.
If AASHTO load combinations are used, click the AASHTO Table button to edit the loads in a spreadsheet format.
Designate AASHTO load cases by selecting the type of load (Nodal loads can be added in addition to bearing
loads).
2.12.4 Loads
Select whether or not pre-loading conditions (i.e. thermal stresses, construction loads, shoring, etc.) are present.
For the pre-loading situation, the equilibrium loads are found from the pre-loading. Then, after equilibrium is
established, the analysis uses the equilibrium conditions to calculate the solution for the load cases.
Note that preloading can be applied (or not) for any load case of interest.
Enter point loads in the Xp, Yp, and Zp directions, and moments about the Xp, Yp, and Zp axes.
Also, enter factors for self-weight and buoyancy (for non-AASHTO loads). Note that self-weight corrections are
made for overlaps between:
1) Pile portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness;
2) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness; and,
3) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pier cap thickness.
Check Applied Displacement to specify a displacement rather than a load for a node.
2.12.5 Load Table

Edit the loads in the spreadsheet by selecting a text field to edit.
Alter the spreadsheet with the following options:
1. Table Format
Select whether the table shows a "Single Load Case" or "All Load Cases". Click the "Update and Sort" button to
refresh the table.
2. Table Edit Options
Insert and delete rows to and from the table.
3. Load Case Options
Add and delete load cases to and from the table. Choose to duplicate an existing load case.
The "Load Table" is used to define nodal loads in a spreadsheet-style format. Static and dynamic loads are
separated into two separate tables that can be toggled using the "Table Format" options.
Following are the Load Tables for Static and Dynamic analysis types.
Dynamic Analysis Type

The user can add Static as well as Dynamic load cases while in Dynamic analysis mode. Enter the nodes,
direction factors (1 or 0), and the load function.
Figure: 2.12.f Load Table in Dynamic Analysis Mode
Static Loads
Enter the load case, node, and load values.
Figure: 2.12.g Load Table in Static Analysis Mode

2.12.6 AASHTO Load Table

Edit the loads in the spreadsheet by selecting a text field to edit.
Alter the spreadsheet with the following options:
1. AASHTO Table Format
The AASHTO load cases are shown in the load tree. Click on the + sign to expand the case. Bearing loads are
shown first, followed by the nodal loads
2. AASHTO Table Edit Options
With a load case expanded, right click the mouse on a nodal load to insert or delete loads. The Add Load and
Remove Load buttons can also be used.
Bearing location nodes cannot be removed.
3. AASHTO Load Case Options
Load cases are added by selecting a load case from the load type list and then clicking the Add Case button.
Only certain load types can have multiple cases. Select a load case from the load tree and click the Remove
Case button to remove the load case.
Figure: 2.12.h AASHTO Load Table

2.12.7 Distributed Load Dialog
For a selected Load Case, the Distributed Load dialog helps to convert constant, uniform, and linear load
distribution types along an element length into nodal loads. Figure: 2.12.i shows the Distributed Load dialog.
Figure: 2.12.i Distributed Load dialog

Select the member of interest from the following members (structural component) of the pier using the 'Member'
drop-down menu:
1. Pile
2. Pile Cap
3. Column
4. Pier Cap
The 3D View window (right side in the main program window) displays the nodes for the selected structural
member.
The user can also highlight an individual pile or pier column of interest using the Highlight Member drop-down
menu. For example, when the user selects Pile 1 from the Highlight Member drop-down menu, Pile 1 in the
3D View window will then be highlighted. This feature facilitates location of a given pile or pier column of
interest.
Select one of the following load distribution options from the Load Types drop-down menu.
1. Constant
2. Uniform
3. Linear
The Constant load distribution option generates identical loads. The Uniform load distribution option
generates loading based on tributary length. The Linear load distribution option generates loading based on
the interpolation between the starting and ending nodes load magnitudes and tributary length.
In the table, the starting and ending node numbers can be input for the element lengths over which the
distributed load is to be applied. The node numbers can be directly input in the table, or the node numbers can
be graphically selected by clicking nodes in the 3D View window. After selecting the nodes over which the
distributed load will act, input the Xp, Yp, and Zp components of the distributed load or moment in the table.
Note: Nodes can only be selected from among the nodes displayed in the 3D View window, and the
selected nodes should be located along a straight line. For example, if pile nodes are selected, both selected
nodes must be on the same pile; if column nodes are selected, both selected nodes must be on the same
column; if pile cap nodes are selected, both nodes must be in the same pile cap grid row or grid column.
The Clear Load Generation Table button will clear all contents from the table.
Clicking the Generate Load On The Selected Member button will generate nodal loading on selected nodes
using the distribution option, load magnitude entered, and the tributary length.
The Generate Load On Other Members button is active only for Pile and Column members. Clicking the
Generate Load On Other Members button for the selected pile member will generate equivalent loads on all
Other Member piles having the same pile type, batter conditions and soil set. Similarly, clicking the Generate
Load On Other Members button for the selected column member will generate equivalent loads on all Other
member columns having similar height. For example, a pier model consist of two pile types (Pile Type 1, and
Pile Type 2) with similar batter condition and soil set. If nodes on the pile consisting of Pile Type 1 is selected,
then the Other Members are all other pile consisting of Pile Type 1.
Note: The Generate Load On Other Members button will NOT generate loads on the selected piles nodes,
but rather on the Other Members of the selected pile/column (if present) in the model.
Each time the Generate Load On The Selected Member or Generate Load On Other Members button is
clicked, the generated load is displayed in the Generated Load table. The Generated Load table is viewable
after clicking the Show Table button (check Figure: 2.12.j ) located at the bottom right of the dialog. The
Generated Load History drop-down menu can be used to check the previously generated load history. Users
can clear the generated load history by clicking the Clear Generated Load History button. Clearing the load
history does NOT delete the loading from the model.
Figure: 2.12.j Expanded distributed load dialog

The generated loads will be applied to the model only after the user clicks the OK button. Clicking the Cancel
button will not apply any of the loads generated as part of using the Distributed Load dialog.
Please check out "step-by-step guide" for using the Distributed Load dialog.
2.12.8 Vessel Collision Dialog

For a given impact location, the associated vessel collision parameters can be defined using the Vessel
Collision dialog.
Figure: 2.12.k Vessel Collision dialog

Impact parameters pertaining to the vessel itself include Vessel Weight and Vessel Velocity. The Vessel Velocity,
in turn, is used by FB-MultiPier in automatically determining the vessel orientation (i.e., the orientation of the
impact load that is generated as part of the analysis). Accordingly, activation of the respective degree(s) of
freedom (DOF) dynamic loading flags in the Loads page, are automatically handled by FB-MultiPier. Please
refer to Section 6.12 for more details.
Regarding the geometry (width, shape) of the contacted interface, the associated parameters can be defined as
part of the Impact Conditions input, namely, Collision Type and Collision Width. Four options are available under
the Collision Type drop-down list: Collision on Flat Surface, Collision on Round Surface, User-Defined ElasticPlastic Curve, and User-Defined General Curve. The selected Collision Type dictates the shape of the vessel
bow force-deformation relationship, which can be either elastic, perfectly-plastic or of arbitrary shape (if the UserDefined General Curve option is selected). After selecting the Collision Type the Collision Width may also be
input (note that this parameter is not required if either the User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve or the User-Defined
General Curve options are selected). The Collision Width is the width of the structural component that is directly
impinged upon by the vessel, and this parameter dictates the maximum vessel bow force that can be generated.
Correspondingly, the Vessel Bow Force-Deformation Relationship is automatically computed for the Collision on
Flat Surface and Collision on Round Surface options, in accordance with Getter and Consolazio (2011).
Note that the Wide View check box allows for viewing the force-deformation curve over a wider abscissa range.
Figure: 2.12.l Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-deformation (Getter and
Consolazio 2011)
User can input 'User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve', Or 'User-Defined General Curve'. For 'User-Defined ElasticPlastic Curve', input the Yield Load and Crush Depth. For 'User-Defined General Curve' enter the Crush Depth,
the Loading and Unloading Curves.
Figure: 2.12.m Load Function Edit Table
2.13 Spring Page
Figure: 2.13.a Spring Page

To add a spring to the pier, Click node with the mouse in 3-D View window or select a node using the text box.
Then click the 'Add' button to add the node to the "Spring Node List". Enter spring values for the 6 degrees of
freedom and use the check boxes from "Apply to Load Case" list., to apply the springs to selected load cases.
Edit the springs in the following areas:
1. Spring Stiffness
Enter the stiffness for each x, y, and z translation spring, and for each x, y, and z rotational spring.
2. Spring Nodes List
As discussed above, click on a node in the 3-D view window or select a node using the text box and click the
"Add" button to add a node to the "Spring Node List".
Also, use the "Del" button to delete a node from the list.
2.14 Mass/Damper Page

The Mass/Damper Page provides the capability of applying concentrated masses or dampers to any pile cap or
pier node. To apply a concentrated mass or damper, click on the node in the 3D View window and then click the
"Add" button to place the node in the node list. Concentrated mass values can be entered without concentrated
damper values, and vice versa. Concentrated damper values can only be entered if "Damping" is enabled in the
Dynamics Page.
Figure: 2.14.a Mass/Damper Page

Concentrated Mass/Dampers in 3D View Window
All concentrated masses and dampers are shown. Dampers are shown as a green dashpot. Masses are shown
as a purple cube.
Figure: 2.14.b Concentrated Mass and Damper in 3D View (Thin Element Mode)
2.15 Retained Soil Page
Figure: 2.15.a Retained Soil

Enter the data for the retaining wall in the following fields:
Soil Layer
Select a soil layer to edit from the drop down menu, or add and remove a soil layer.
Wall and Layer Geometry
The wall, retaining the soil, is modeled as a cantilever (column) element. Enter Retaining wall and soil layer
parameters for each layer.
Each layer will cause a horizontal pressure to be applied to the wall in the X global direction.
Each layer is divided into a number of sub-layers. A minimum of 10 sub-layers is recommended for each layer.
The weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a distributed vertical load acting on the
footing.
Soil Layer Data
Active or at rest soil forces are calculated for cohesionless soil only.
Choose between "Pressure at Rest" and the "Active Case" options, and then click the Layer Data button to
specify the data.
Wall Load Data
Select the case number and click "Surcharge".
Retaining Wall Explanation
Figure: 2.15.b Retaining Wall Explanation

Note:
1. The Weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a distributed vertical load acting on the
footing.
2. Bouyancy effects on the pile cap take into consideration the Soil Water Table. However, if a positive value is
supplied for the Ground Water Height, then the Ground Water Height will govern the pile cap bouyancy force
calculations.
2.15.1 Retaining Wall Soil Layer Data

Enter the following properties off the retained soil layer:
1. Cohesion
2. Soil Angle of Friction
3. Soil-Wall Angle Friction
4. Unit Weight of Soil
5. Saturated Unit Weight of Soil
Return to the Retaining Page.
2.15.2 Surcharge
Depending upon the type of surcharge selected, different parameters will be required.
Figure: 2.15.c No Surcharge
Figure: 2.15.d Uniform Surcharge
Figure: 2.15.e Line Load
Figure: 2.15.f Strip Load

Return to the Retaining Page.
2.16 Bridge Page

For a bridge model, the Bridge Page is used to generate and modify substructures (pier foundations) and
superstructures (bridge spans).
Figure: 2.16.a Bridge Page (Bridge model)

Substructure
Select a pier from the Substructure list or select "Add Pier" to add a new pier to the model. Click the "Del" button
to remove a selected pier.
Figure: 2.16.b Add Substructure Dialog

Choose a structure type for the newly added or changed pier. Then, in the "Select Model" combo, select from a
list of existing piers. This selected piers properties will be used for the newly created or changed pier.
The Model Type can be either a General Pier or Pile Bent model. Both models are capable of having bearing
locations, which are essential for connecting the piers using bridge spans.
The Global X Coord and Global Y Coord are used to layout each pier in the bridge model. By default, the origin
of the first pier in the multiple pier model is at the corner of the pile cap.
The Pier Rotation Angle specifies a pier rotation about the vertical z-axis. The pier rotation is specified as
clockwise positive in the FB-MultiPier coordinate system and is typically used to model skew or radial piers on a
curved alignment. The Bearing Angle (rotation of the bearings) is independent of that of the Pier Rotation and is
measured about the vertical z-axis.
Select the number of Bearing Rows and specify if the span should be continuous. Specific boundary conditions
can be selected and customized by clicking the Edit Supports button.
Superstructure
Select a Span to edit from the span combo box. The "C/C Length" indicates the span length from the center
bearing line of one pier to the center bearing line of the next pier. Click the "Edit Span" button to edit the span
section properties.
One Pier Two Span (OPTS)

For OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where you can add the OPTSData.
Figure: 2.16.c Bridge Page (OPTS model)
2.16.1 Edit Supports
Custom bearing connections can be specified by selecting a boundary condition from the combo box. Boundary
conditions can be Released (free to move), Constrained (prevented from movement), or Custom (user-defined
load-displacement curve).
There are two versions of this dialog that are displayed based on the number of bearing rows requested.
Single Row: Only a single option is available
Figure: 2.16.d Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Single Row

Two Rows: Left and Right Rows are specified
Figure: 2.16.e Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Two Rows
Click the "Edit Custom Bearings" button to define custom bearings using a load-displacement curve. This curve
can be applied to any of the six degrees of freedom for a bearing connection. A maximum of 20 values can be
used to define a custom bearing load-displacement relationship. Values should be entered from smallest to
largest displacement. Click the "Add" button to add a new load-displacement curve. Click the "Del" button to
remove an existing load displacement curve. Click the "Update Plot" button to refresh the load-displacement plot.
Figure: 2.16.f Custom Bearing Data Dialog

Return to the Bridge Page.
2.16.2 Edit Span
Enter the Transformed Section Properties for the bridge superstructure. There are two methods to do this.
Method 1 is to type them directly into the edit boxes in the Transformed frame on this dialog. Method 2 is to click
the Section Properties and Temperatures button, and have the program compute these properties based on
explicitly input girder and slab section properties on the Section Properties dialog. The program uses these
properties to model an equivalent beam that connects the centerline of two pier caps. The Begin Height and End
Height parameters are used to offset the beam from the center of gravity of the pier cap to the center of gravity of
the span.
Figure: 2.16.g Bridge Span Properties Dialog

Section Area is the entire span area in the transverse direction, including girders, roadway, and parapets.
Transverse Area is the span profile area for wind load on the structure application (usually computed as: [girder
depth + roadway depth + parapet depth] x span length).
Begin Height and End Height are measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to c.g. of the bridge
span. Live Load Height is measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to the c.g. of the Live Load (i.e. at
6 ft above the roadway per AASHTO).
Span End Conditions are set independently for each side of the span. Different end conditions may exist
based on the construction; FB-MultiPier can simulate these conditions by assigning various properties to
the Transfer Beam.
l
Diaphragm properties for a rigid element.
Non-Diaphragm - relaxed properties for a more flexible beam.
Custom User assigned custom properties (Must be selected to enable Custom Properties
Button)
Figure: 2.16.h Variable Bridge Span Properties Dialog

The Variable Span Properties Table displays section properties for each element along the bridge section.
Spans are divided into 10 elements of equal length. The 3D Bridge Window will show each elements size in
proportion to the inertia 3 axis entered.
The Copy button on the Bridge Span Properties dialog launches the Span Copy dialog. The Span Copy
dialog is used to copy all span properties between spans. This includes all properties in the Span Section
Properties frame and Span Profile Properties frame on the Bridge Span Properties dialog, all girder and slab
data on the Section Properties dialog, and all temperature data on the Temperatures dialog. To use the span
copying feature, select a base span in the Base Span combo box and a target span in the Target Span combo
box. Then click the Copy Span button. The base span is the span from which properties will be copied, and the
target span is the span to which the base spans properties will be copied. Select the Mirror checkbox prior to
clicking the Copy Span button to mirror the base spans properties in the target span. Mirroring is of particular
use when the Variable section properties option is selected on the Bridge Span Properties dialog, as variable
properties allow for per-element span input. Mirroring the span properties will copy the span properties from the
first element of the base span into the last element of the target span; the second element in the base span will
be copied into the second to last element in the target span, and so forth, making the target span a mirror of the
base span. Figure: 2.16.i illustrates the mirror feature. Note that span two is a mirror image of span one.
Figure: 2.16.i Bridge Span View
Figure: 2.16.j Span Copy

2.16.3 Span End Condition
Span end conditions can either be automatically calculated by the program, or alternatively, the end conditions
can be specified on the Bridge Span Properties dialog. In particular, each of the transfer beam, vertical link, and
(if applicable) continuity link properties can be input.
Clicking on "Transfer Beam" will open the Transfer Beam properties dialog and one can select stiff (default), soft,
or custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.k Transfer Beam Properties

Clicking on "Vertical Link" button will open the Vertical Link properties dialog and one can select stiff (default) or
custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.l Vertical Link Properties

Clicking on "Continuity Element" will open the Span Continuity Element properties dialog and one can select
default or custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.m Span Continuity Element Properties

2.16.4 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Data Dialog

Figure: 2.16.n shows the OPTS data dialog for the default OPTS Problem type in FB-MultiPier. Please refer
Section 6.13 for step-by-step instructions related to building OPTS models in FB-MultiPier.
Figure: 2.16.n OPTS Data dialog

Local Spring Coordinates
Please refer to the diagram on the OPTS Data dialog for the location of the local coordinate axes. Enter the
coordinates corresponding to the locations of the span end springs.
Span End Boundary Spring and Span End Lumped Mass
Figure: 2.16.n shows the default spring stiffnesses and span mass values provided in the default OPTS problem
type. Please refer Section 6.13.1 for step-by-step details of modeling using OPTS default problem type.
The following scenarios can be used to update the span end spring stiffnesses and span mass values:
1.
The span end spring stiffnesses and span mass values can be automatically generated when OPTS
model is generated from a multiple-pier Bridge Model. Refer Section 6.14 for details.
2.
User can manually calculate span end spring stiffnesses and mass values depending on the bridge
model. For more information on how to calculate the span end spring stiffnesses and mass values click
here.
3.
The user can modify the span end spring stiffness and mass values by using Import Spring/Mass Data
button in the OPTS Data dialog. The spring stiffnesses and mass values can be imported from an .opt
file after clicking on the Import Spring/Mass Data button. The imported values will then display in the
Span End Boundary Spring table and the Span End Lumped Mass text box.
The .opt file can be created using either of the following 2 scenarios:
a.
The .opt file is created when the analysis to convert a bridge model to an OPTS model occurs
(Refer Section 6.13.2 ). The .opt file is automatically placed in a special folder called OPTS_
Formation when the conversion from a bridge to an OPTS model occurs. This OPTS_
Formation folder is located in the same directory as the bridge file that was converted to an
OPTS model. NOTE: In this scenario, all creation and processing of the .opt file is automatically
handled by FB-MultiPier.
b.
It is also possible to manually create the .opt file without running the analysis. To do so, follow
the .opt file format (as described in the spring and mass headers in the Help Manual) and
manually type the values.
3 Model View Window

1. Soil Edit Window
2. Pile Edit Window
3. 2D Bridge View
4. 3D View Window
3.1 Soil Edit Window

"Right Click" in the Soil Edit window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options:
1. 2D Mouse Control Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable stretching
a. With the key and button pressed down move forward to stretch up
b. With the key and button pressed down move backward to stretch down
2. Pick Layer Allows the user to pick a layer
3. Remove Layer Delete the selected layer from the model
4. Add Layer Add a new soil layer to the model
5. Split Layer Split the current layer in to two layers
6. Thin Elements Show pile cap and pile as thin elements
7. Reset View
8. Copy LayerReplace properties of selected layer with those of layer selected from submenu
Note: Clicking the mouse scroll wheel button will toggle between the Picking mode and the 2D Mouse
Control.
Figure: 3.1.a Soil Edit Window

A partially embedded pile is displayed above. Nodes in the free length are displayed in blue and nodes
embedded in the soil are displayed in green. Only the embedded (i.e., green) nodes are clickable, and selecting
one will bring up the up the Printable Soil Graph dialog, showing the soil curve for the selected node. Please see
Printable Soil Graph for more details.
3.2 Pile Edit Window

"Right Click" in the Pile Edit window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options:
1. 2D Mouse Control.
a. Hold the left mouse button down and drag to pan the view.
b. Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable zooming.
i. With the key and button pressed down move forward to zoom in.
ii. With the key and button pressed down move backward to zoom out.
2. Add/Remove Pile Click on a grid point/pile to add or remove a pile. *
3. Add Piles (Drag Box) feature not yet available.
4. Remove Piles (Drag Box) feature not yet available.
5. Pile Data/Batter Click on a pile to edit the Pile Data.*
6. Copy Pile Properties Click on a pile to copy properties from the highlighted pile. *
7. Assign Pile Types to Piles Assign a Pile Type to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
8. Assign Soil Sets to Piles Assign a Soil Set to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
9. Uniform Soil Sets (Piles) Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time (feature not yet available).
10. Scale Pile Drawing Click to Scale Piles larger or smaller for better view.
11. Add/Remove Cap Click on a portion of the pile cap to remove it.
12. Add Cap (Drag Box) feature not yet available.
13. Remove Cap (Drag Box) feature not yet available.

14. Edit Cap Thickness Click on a portion of the pile cap to edit the Cap Thickness.
15. Edit Grid Spacing Click on a spacing "element" to edit the Spacing.
16. Uniform Soil Sets (Cap) Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time.
17. P-Multipliers Allows the user to view the P-multipliers in the pile edit window (to view go to the Soil Page
and click the Group button).
18. Numbering Allows the user to view the pile numbers.
19. Reset View Returns the view back to the default.
20. Help.
*This action will change the currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is the pile that is displayed on the
'Pile Page' and in the 'Soil Edit' window. In the 'Soil Edit' window, the currently selected pile is displayed along
with its assigned soil set. For more information on the integration between the selected pile and the selected soil
set, click here.
Figure: 3.2.a Pile Edit Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial
3.2.1 Pile Data

Adjust the arrangement of the piles using the following options:
Select the pile number to edit in the "Pile Number" scroll box.
Choose the cross section type from the list.
Enter the batter of individual piles as the horizontal distance over the vertical distance.
Figure: 3.2.b Pile Batter

Select a pile and soil set to apply to the current pile.
Return to the Pile Edit Window page.
3.2.2 Assign Pile Types to Piles

This feature is used to assign Pile Types to grid locations. (A Pile Type consists of one or more cross sections
used within a single pile). Access this feature via the Assign Pile Type to Piles menu option in the Pile Edit
Window. By default, Pile Type 1 will be selected.
Figure: 3.2.c Assign Pile Types to Piles.

To choose a different pile, change the selected Pile Type Figure: 3.2.d . Notice that the list of cross sections
associated with this pile type displays, and that the cross section drawing is updated. In this example, Pile Type 2
consists of 1 cross section, a 36 Drilled Shaft.
Figure: 3.2.d Assign Pile Types to Piles Circular.

To apply this selected Pile Type in the model, click a grid location in the Pile Edit Window, such as pile 1.
Figure: 3.2.e Pile Edit Pile Grid.

Notice that Pile Type 2 is now applied to this grid location, replacing Pile Type 1.
Figure: 3.2.f Pile Edit Pile Grid Circular.
Additional grid points can be clicked to apply this Pile Type. To view the various cross sections in a Pile Type that
has multiple
Figure: 3.2.g Pile Edit Pile Grid Multiple Piles.

Additional Notes:
1. Pile Types are created on the Gross Pile Properties Dialog and the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties Dialog.
3.2.3 Edit Cap Thickness

To edit cap thickness right click in the Pile Edit window and select Edit Cap Thickness. The pile cap elements will
turn green.
Figure: 3.2.h Select Edit Cap Thickness

You can then left click and select each cap element:
Enter the "first" thickness of the cap (not the actual thickness), which allows the user to simulate different types of
connectionsvery thin for a more pin-like connection, or thick for a more rigid connection.
Enter the "second" thickness of the cap, which is the actual thickness to simulate the weight of the cap.
Figure: 3.2.i Enter Element Thickness

3.2.4 Custom Grid Spacing

Enter the spacing of the row/column selected.
Alternatively, edit the grid spacing in a spreadsheet format by pressing the Grid Spacing Table button.
Figure: 3.2.j Custom Pile Grid Spacing Dialog

Add a new row or column at the mid point of the column or row selected by pressing the "Split Row/Column"
button, or delete a row or column by pressing the "Delete Row/Column" button.
3.2.5 Grid Spacing Table
For Grid Spacing Table, refer to: See "Grid Spacing Table"
3.3 2D Bridge View
Figure: 3.3.a Bridge Plan View Window

The current pier can be selected by clicking on the desired pier in the window.
Selecting a set of bearing locations depicted in the window will bring up the Custom Bearing Connection dialog
for the appropriate pier structure.
Selecting the span between piers brings up the Bridge Span Property dialog.
3.4 3D View Window

"Right Click" in the 3D View window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options:
1. 3D Mouse Control
a. Hold the left mouse button down and drag to rotate the view
b. Hold the left mouse button and the shift key down and drag to pan the view
c. Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable zooming
i. With the key and button pressed down move forward to zoom in
ii. With the key and button pressed down move backward to zoom out Zoom Feature Tutorial
2. Picking Node Mouse Control
3. Picking Element Mouse Control Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain dialogs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
4. Add/Remove Pier Cap Element
a. Click on pier cap element to remove or to add it back to model after it has been removed.
5. Piles show or hide the piles in this window
6. Caps show or hide the pile cap
7. Nodes Hide or show the various types of model nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Pier Nodes
c. Span Nodes
d. All Shell Nodes
e. Bearing Locations
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
h. Column Nodes
i. Cantilever Nodes
j. Pier Cap Nodes
8. Pier show or hide the pier structure
9. Girders this feature is not yet available
10. Loads show or hide the loads
11. Springs show or hide the springs
12. Dampers show or hide the dampers (for models using dynamic analysis)
13. Masses show or hide the masses (for models using dynamic analysis)
14. Soil show or hide the soil
15. Retained Soil show or hide the retained soil (for retaining wall models)
16. Numbering show or hide the node numbering
17. Axes (Local) show or hide the local axis
18. Axes (Global) show or hide the global axis
19. Pier Data show or hide the pier global coordinates
20. Thin Elements display the model in thin element mode
21. XZ Plane View show the model as rotated in the XZ plane
22. YZ Plane View show the model as rotated in the YZ plane

23. Reset View restore the model view to the default rotation, zoom, and tilt
24. Help display help tips relating to the use of this window
Figure: 3.4.a 3D View Window
3.4.1 3D Bridge View
Figure: 3.4.b 3D Bridge View Window

All the options available for the 3D View Window are available for the 3D Bridge View.
3.4.2 Element Dialog

The 'Element Data Dialog' is a quick way to reference the properties of any pier element, pile elementor extra
member element in the model. To launch the dialog, right-click in the 3D View window. This will launch the
window's popup menu. Make sure the window is in 'Thin Elements' mode (this menu item should have a
checkmark next to it). Then select the menu item 'Picking Element Mouse Control'. Then click an element in the
model. The dialog will display, showing theelement's data, including element number, location in the model,
dimensional data, and material properties. To change the selected element, simply click another element.
Figure: 3.4.c Element Data Dialog
4 Program Results
1. Pile Results
2. Pier/Bent Results
3. Pile Interaction Diagrams
4. Pier Interaction Diagrams
5. 3D Results
6. XML Report Generator
4.1 Pile Results

Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:
1. Pile Selection
2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
4.1.1 Pile Selection

"Right Click" in the Pile Results Pile Selection window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options.
1. 2D Mouse Control
2. Picking Control
3. Reset View
Select the piles to view in the Graphs.
Figure: 4.1.a Pile Selection Window

Return to the Pile Results page.
4.1.2 Plot Display Control

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:
Structure:
Shear 2
Shear 3
Moment 2
Moment 3
Axial
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Axial
Soil Lateral X
Soil Lateral Y
Soil Torsional
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Displacement 2
Displacement 3
Rotational About 2
Rotational About 3
Click the Force combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the Max and Min edit boxes, among
the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This window shows the elevation and pile number of the
maximum and minimum values of the selected piles.
Click the Current Load Case radio button to display force curves for the load case that is currently selected in
the Load Case control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap
/ bent cap. The maximum and minimum values for the force currently selected in the Force combo box will
display in the Max and Min edit boxes. This maximum and minimum value are determined from the currently
selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.
Click the Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces radio button to automatically select the pile,
column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the
Force combo box), across all load cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or
pier cap / bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces radio button to automatically select the pile,
column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the
pier cap / bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases radio button to automatically select all piles,
columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM or MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only
curves that display in the plot windows when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.
Click the Max D/C For Limit State radio button, and select a limit state in the accompanying combo box, to view
the maximum load combination for the selected limit state.
Click the Redraw Curves button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button should be clicked after
changing which forces are selected among the various force checkboxes.
For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum member force, location,
and corresponding time step.
Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.
Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.
4.1.3 Graphs
Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pile Selection view.
Figure: 4.1.b Pile Results Graphs

Right click a selected graph and select the option Printable Graph' to open the printable graph dialog.
4.1.4 Printable Forces Dialog
This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pile Results Page.
Figure: 4.1.c Pile Printable Forces Dialog

This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the Pile/Pier Results Forces
dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form at each node along the member.
Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve colors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.
- Print: Print the graph. Clicking this option will open the graph as a bitmap in your computer's picture viewer (for
example, "Window Picture and Fax Viewer"). >From here, the graph can be printed. This will allow the graph to
be printed without the print dialog displaying over the graph. (To print the entire dialog, click the 'Print' button at
the bottom of this dialog).
Table Options:
- Print: prints the graph and its contents. (To print the entire dialog, click the 'Print' button at the bottom of this
dialog).
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.
*Ifmore than one pile/column if graphed, the member with the maximum value will be displayed in the graph
title.For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are the identical colors used on the Pile/Pier Forces Dialog.
Printable Forces Tutorial
4.2 Pier Results

Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:
1. Pier Selection
2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
4.2.1 Pier Selection

Select the piers to view in the Graphs.
Figure: 4.2.a Pier Component Selection Window

Return to the Pier/Bent Results page.
4.2.2 Plot Display Control

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:
Structure:
Shear 2
Shear 3
Moment 2
Moment 3
Axial
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Axial
Soil Lateral X
Soil Lateral Y
Soil Torsional
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Displacement 2
Displacement 3
Rotational About 2
Rotational About 3
Click the Force combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the Max and Min edit boxes, among
the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This window shows the elevation and pile number of the
maximum and minimum values of the selected piles.
Click the Current Load Case radio button to display force curves for the load case that is currently selected in
the Load Case control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap
/ bent cap. The maximum and minimum values for the force currently selected in the Force combo box will
display in the Max and Min edit boxes. This maximum and minimum value are determined from the currently
selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.
Click the Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces radio button to automatically select the pile,
column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the
pier cap / bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces radio button to automatically select the pile,
column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the
pier cap / bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases radio button to automatically select all piles,
columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM or MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only
curves that display in the plot windows when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.
Click the Max D/C For Limit State radio button, and select a limit state in the accompanying combo box, to view
the maximum load combination for the selected limit state.
Click the Redraw Curves button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button should be clicked after
changing which forces are selected among the various force checkboxes.
For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum member force, location,
and corresponding time step.
Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.
Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.
4.2.3 Graphs
Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pier Selection view.
Figure: 4.2.b Pier Results Graphs

Right click a selected graph and select the option Printable Graph' to open the printable graph dialog.
4.2.4 Printable Forces Dialog

This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pier/Bent Results Page.
Figure: 4.2.c Pier Cap Printable Forces Dialog

This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the Pile/Pier Results Forces
dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form at each node along the member.
Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve colors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.
- Print: Print the graph. Clicking this option will open the graph as a bitmap in your computer's picture viewer (for
example, "Window Picture and Fax Viewer"). From here, the graph can be printed. This will allow the graph to
be printed without the print dialog displaying over the graph. (To print the entire dialog, click the 'Print' button at
the bottom of this dialog).
Table Options:
- Print: prints the graph and its contents.(To print the entire dialog, click the 'Print' button at the bottom of this
dialog).
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.
*Ifmore than one pile/column if graphed, the member with the maximum value will be displayed in the graph
title.For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are the identical colors used on the Pile/Pier Forces Dialog.
Printable Forces Tutorial
4.3 Pile Interaction

Clicking the "Pile Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can select the type of
interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)
Type of Pile Interaction Diagram:
1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
2. Uniaxial Moment..2 Axis
Please check out "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.
Types of selection mode:
1. Component Selection Mode (Thick) - Select the pile (from "Pile Selection" window) and member segment
(from "Pile Segment Selection" window) to display on the interaction diagram.
2. Element Selection Mode (Thin) - Select the element (from "Pile Element Selection" window) to display on the
interaction diagram.
4.3.1 Pile Selection

Select the pile to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.3.a Pile Selection Window

Return to the Pile Interaction page.
4.3.2 Pile Segment Selection

Select the pile member segment to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.3.b Pile Segment Selection Window

Piles with multiple cross sections differentiate between segments by displaying each segment with a different
color/pattern. The legend to the right will provide basic cross section information for each segment.
4.3.3 Pile Element Selection

Select the pile element from the model to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.3.c Pile Element Selection Window

4.3.4 Pile Interaction Diagram

"Right Click" in the Pile Interaction window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options:
1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the interaction diagram title
View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.
Figure: 4.3.d Pile Interaction Diagram

4.3.4.1 View Data Table
The Data Table shows a list of all points along an Pile Interaction Diagram curve. To display the table, right click
in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.
Figure: 4.3.e Data Table Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pile Interaction Diagrams page.
4.3.4.2 View Data Points

To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup menu. Then
select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will display along the Interaction Diagram..
Figure: 4.3.f Data Points Interaction Diagram

4.3.4.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point Numbers' will display along the Interaction
Diagram.
Figure: 4.3.g Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

4.4 Pier Interaction
Clicking the "Pier Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can select the type of
interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)
Type of Pier Interaction Diagram:
1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
Please check out "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.
Types of selection mode:

1. Component Selection Mode (Thick) - Select the pile (from "Pier Selection" window) and member segment
(from "Pier Segment Selection" window) to display on the interaction diagram.
2. Element Selection Mode (Thin) - Select the element (from "Pier Element Selection" window) to display on the
interaction diagram.
4.4.1 Pier Selection

Select the pier element to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.4.a Pier Component Selection Window

Return to the Pier Interaction page.
4.4.2 Pier Segment Selection

Select the pier member segment to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.4.b Pier Component Segment Selection Window

4.4.3 Pier Element Selection

Select the pier element from the model to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.4.c Pier Component Element Selection Window

4.4.4 Pier Interaction Diagram

"Right Click" in the Pier Interaction window to bring up the edit menu with the following options:
1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the interaction diagram title
View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.
Figure: 4.4.d Interaction Diagram

4.4.4.1 View Data Table

The Data Table shows a list of all points along an Pier Interaction Diagram curve. To display the table, right click
in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.
Figure: 4.4.e Data Table Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pier Interaction Diagrams page.
4.4.4.2 View Data Points

To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup menu. Then
select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will display along the Interaction Diagram..
Figure: 4.4.f Data Points Interaction Diagram

4.4.4.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point Numbers' will display along the Interaction
Diagram.
Figure: 4.4.g Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

4.5 3D Results
View the three-dimensional results of the analysis using the following windows:
1. 3D Display Control
2. 3D Results Window
4.5.1 3D Display Control

Control and view the display data numerically in the following fields:
1. Display Control
2. Max Min Forces Dialog
3. Node Information
4. Results Plotting
Figure: 4.5.a 3D Display Control Window
Return to the 3D Results page.
4.5.1.1 Display Control

Select the output to view in the Display Window from the following:
1. Displaced ShapeShows a displaced wire-frame model
2. Displacement ContourDistinguishes high displacement areas
a.X Translation
b.Y Translation
c.Z Translation
d.X Rotation
e.Y Rotation
f.Z Rotation
3. Stress ContourDistinguishes areas of high stress concentrations
a.M1
b.M2
c.M12
d.S13
e.S23
f.S1
g.S2
h.S12
i. Custom Range - launches the "Custom Range for Stress Contours" dialog, to specify the range for the
selected type of Stress Contour
4. Mode ShapeEigenvectors used in modal analysis
5. Pier Max and Min Forces Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a.Displacement X
b.Displacement Y
c.Displacement Z
d.Rotation About X
e.Rotation About Y
f.Shear 2
g.Shear 3
h.Moment 2
i.Moment 3
j.Axial
k.D/C Ratio
l.Allow Multiple Forces see Max Min Forces Dialog
6. Pier Max and Min Forces Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a.Displacement X
b.Displacement Y
c.Displacement Z
d.Rotation About X
e.Rotation About Y
f.Shear 2
g.Shear 3
h.Moment 2
i.Moment 3
j.Axial
k.D/C Ratio
l.Soil Axial
m.Soil Torsional
n.Soil Lateral X
o.Soil Lateral Y
p.Allow Multiple Forces see Max Min Forces Dialog
Return to the 3D Display Control page.
4.5.1.2 Max Min Forces Dialog

This option is accessed via the following:
- Click 3D Results on the menu - > In "3D Display Control" window -> "Display Control" panel
-Select the "Pier Max and Min Forces" or "Pile Max and Min Forces" on the Display Control panel and select the
desired force.
-If "Allow Multiple Forces" is selected, the Max and Min Forces dialog will display.
* if more than one force is selected, each element that contains a maximum or minimum force will be highlighted
in the 3D Results Window.
** if a single element contains both the max and the min force (common when all forces of a certain type are
0.00), the text "MaxMin" will display next to that element.
***if a single element contains more than one maximum force(or more than one minimum force), the element's
color will match the selected force that is closest to the bottom of the "Max and Min Forces" dialog. For example,
an element contained the maximum Shear2 force, and the maximum Axial force, the element would be colored to
match the Axial force.
Figure: 4.5.b Max and Min Forces Dialog for Piles (Left) and Piers (Right)
Max Min Tutorial

4.5.1.3 Node Information

View the data for a node in the following areas:
1. Node NumberSelect the node to view
2. DOFDisplays the number of degrees of freedom for the selected node
3. TranslationDisplays the translation in the X, Y, Z directions of the selected node as a result of the loading
4. RotationDisplays the rotation about the X, Y, Z directions of the selected node as a result of the loading
5. Nodal CoordinatesDisplays X, Y, Z coordinates of the selected node prior to loading
4.5.1.4 Results Plotting (Dynamic Results)

The "Results Plotting" section handles the graphical display of dynamic results. The "Results Time Plot" allows
the user to see the variation of displacement with time for a selected node.
There are two types of results plots:
1.
Displacement vs. Time. This includes graphs for X Translation, Y Translation, and Z Translation.
2.
Rotation vs. Time. This includes X Rotation, Y Rotation, and Z Rotation.
Select the node you want to plot the results for. Then use the "Results Plotting" combo box to select the desired
graph. Then click the "Plot" button.
Figure: 4.5.c Results Time Plot Dialog

Dynamic Animation is a toolbar option that allows the user to animate the displaced model when a dynamic
analysis has been run using Time Step Integration. Click the Play button on the left to begin animation. Click the
Pause button on the right to pause the animation. The "Select Time Step" slider control between the Play button
and Pause button will move, as the time steps are cycled thru. The displaced model will be drawn in the 3D
Results window, corresponding to the current time step shown on the "Select Time Step" slider and the "Time
Step" edit box. The displacement values for the currently selected node on the 3D Display Control dialog will
match the time step that is currently being drawn in the 3D Results window. The time that corresponds to the
currently drawn time step will display in the "Time" edit box. The speed with which the animation draws is
dictated by the "Animation Speed" control. The maximum (fastest) speed is 25, the minimum speed is 1, and the
default speed is 24. To view the model for a specific time step, ensure the animation is paused (by clicking the
Pause button). Then, use the "Select Time Step" slider to select a time step. The model will draw in the 3D
Results window for the selected time step, and the displacements for the selected node will be shown in the 3D
Display Control dialog.
Figure: 4.5.d Dynamic Results Animation Control Dialog

4.5.2 3D Results Window
View the results of the analysis. Elements that have a demand/capacity (D/C) ratio exceeding 1.0 are shown with
a red (highlight) marker.
"Right Click" in the 3D Result window to bring up the view edit menu with the following options:
1. 3D Mouse Control
a. Hold the left mouse button down and drag to rotate the view
b. Hold the left mouse button and the shift key down and drag to pan the view
c. Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable zooming
i. With the key and button pressed down move forward to zoom in
ii. With the key and button pressed down move backward to zoom out Zoom Feature Tutorial
2. Picking Mouse Control Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain dialogs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
3. Picking Forces Control Allows the user to view result forces for selected element.
4. Nodal Plot
5. Nodal Results Data
6. Pile Cap Forces
7. Bridge Span Force Plots
8. Nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Transfer Beam Nodes
c. Bearing Nodes
d. Pier Cap / Column Nodes
e. Cantilever
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
9. Node Numbering
10.
Material Property Numbering
11. Element Numbering

a. Connector Elements
b. Structure Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Pile Cap Elements
12. Element Highlighting
a. Connector Elements
b. Bearing Connector Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Column Elements
e. Pile Cap Elements
f. Pier Cap / Bent Cap
13. Axes (Local)
14. Axes (Global)
15. Pier Data
16. Plastic Hinge Zones
17. Undisplaced Model
18. Bridge View Display the full bridge structure
19. Reset View Return the view back to the default setting
Return to the 3D Results page.
4.5.2.1 Picking Forces Control

This option is accessed via the following:
-Right click in the3D Results Window, and select "Picking Forces Control".
-Then click on any pile or pier element in the 3D Results Window. (Pile cap elements and bridge span elements
are not included in this feature).
-The selected element will become highlighted, and the dialog will launch, displaying all relevant forces in the
selected element.
Figure: 4.5.a Element Forces Dialog showing Column forces

*Element # (in Column) is the 1-based index of the element within the column, beginning at the column base.
**Element # (in Pile) is the 1-based index of the element within the pile,at the pile head.
***Element # (in Model) is the 1-based index of the element in the model. This element number can be
referenced in the .out file.
Element Forces Tutorial
Return to the 3D Results Window page.
4.5.2.2 Nodal Plot

This feature plots displacements and rotations for any node, across all load cases (across all load combinations
in AASHTO mode, and across all time steps in Dynamics mode). Access this via the Nodal Displacement Plot
menu item in the 3D Results Window. After selecting this menu item, left-click any node in the model to launch
the plot window.
Figure: 4.5.b Nodal Displacement Plot.

By default, Displacement X is the selected data type for which a curve is generated. To change the data type,
choose from one of the five data type radio buttons inside the Data Type frame. These include Displacement X,
Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rotation About X, and Rotation About Y. The plotted data can also be viewed
in tabular form by clicking the Show Table button, in the bottom right corner of this dialog.
Figure: 4.5.c Nodal Displacement Plot Table.

Other features on this dialog include the following:
1. Range Type - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. There are two types of ranges: a) Max / Min: this
range type sets the range of X axis values to be equal to the range between and including the minimum
displacement (or rotation) and the maximum displacement (or rotation). Thus, the curve will occupy the entire
plot area, unless the 'Apply Buffer on X axis' option is also applied; b) Symmetric this range type sets the range
of X axis values relative to zero. The absolute value of the maximum displacement (or rotation) is used to create
the range on the positive and negative sides of zero. This range type simplifies viewing the data with respect to
zero.
Figure: 4.5.d Nodal Displacement Plot Symmetric.

2. Show Curve Line - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When this feature is selected (checked), the
curve line is drawn. When it is not selected (unchecked), the curve line is not drawn.
Figure: 4.5.e Nodal Displacement Plot Points.
3. Show Point Values - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When selected (checked), the displacement
(or rotation) values display next to their corresponding point.
Figure: 4.5.f Nodal Displacement Plot Point Values.

4. Apply Buffer on X Axis - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. A buffer is the space between the left edge
of the plot area, and the left edge of the curve (and the right edge of the plot area and the right edge of the curve).
It does not affect the data in any way. It is simply a way to help customize the scope of the plot area, which can
help avoid the edges of the curve overlapping the edges of the plot area. This can be particularly helpful when
the Show Point Values option is selected, to avoid the point values from being cut off near the right edge of the
plot area. The maximum buffer is 200% of the curve range, on either side of the curve. An example of no buffer is
shown in Figure 6. Notice how the curve begins flush against the left edge of the plot area, and extends to the
very right edge of the plot area. To gain a better understanding of this feature, select Apply Buffer on X Axis, and
adjust the Buffer % by holding down the Up arrow. Notice how the curve expands to occupy more of the plot
area.
Figure: 4.5.g Nodal Displacement Plot Buffering.

5. Save The currently plotted values can be saved to a text file. The default name for this file is
DisplacmentData.txt. By default, this file is saved at the same location as the input file. The contents of this text
file can easily be copied into another application for further use, such as EXCEL. The format of the text file is
shown below. Each line in the file contains the load case and its corresponding displacement (or rotation). The
number of lines in the file equals the number of load cases / load combinations / time steps:
1 0.7519
2 1.0187
3 1.2949
4 1.5736
5 1.8674
6 2.1851
6. Print This option prints a screenshot of the dialog.
4.5.2.3 Nodal Results Data

This feature saves results data to a text file, for any pile node or structure node, across all load cases (across all
load combinations in AASHTO mode, and across all times steps in Dynamics mode). For structure nodes, the
File Types (data types) are as follows (see Figure 1): Displacement X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rotation
About X, Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, and D/C Ratio.
Figure: 4.5.h Nodal Results Data.(Left)

For pile nodes, the File Types (data types) are as follows (see Figure 2): Displacement X, Displacement Y,
Displacement Z, Rotation About X, Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, D/C Ratio,
Soil Lateral X, Soil Lateral Y, Soil Axial, and Soil Torsional.
Figure: 4.5.i Nodal Results Data Piles.

By default, no File Types are selected when the dialog is opened. File Types can either be selected individually,
by clicking (checking) the desired File Type checkbox, or by clicking the Select All button, which selects
(checks) all File Types (see Figure 3). This button can also be used to deselect all selected File Types (when the
button text reads Deselect All).
Figure: 4.5.j Nodal Results DataPiles.

To save the data to a file(s), click the Save to File button. It is important to note that only one data type is saved
per file. This makes the data more easily portable to other applications. For example, displacement X data is
saved in one file, displacement Y data is saved in another file, etc. The default file name has the following format:
NodeXI_DataType.txt, where X is the selected node number, and I is the selected Node Type (either I or J). An
example of this file name format for all available File Types using node 119 as an I node, is as follows:
Node119I_DisplX.txt,
Node119I_DisplX txt,
Node119I_DisplY txt,
Node119I_DisplZ txt,
Node119I_RotX txt,
Node119I_RotY txt,
Node119I_Shear2 txt,
Node119I_Shear3 txt,
Node119I_Moment2 txt,
Node119I_Moment3 txt,
Node119I_Axial txt,
Node119I_DCRatio txt,
Node119I_SoilLatX txt,
Node119I_SoilLatY txt,
Node119I_SoilAxial txt,
Node119I_SoilTors txt.
By default, these files are saved at the same location as the input file. The contents of each file can easily be
copied into another application for further use, such as EXCEL. The format of the text file is shown below. Each
line in the file contains the load case and its corresponding value (displacement, rotation, force, etc). The number
of lines in the file equals the number of load cases / load combinations / time steps (this particular example has 5
load cases):
1 0.0225
2 0.0667
3 0.1385
4 0.2604
5 0.5097
Other features on this dialog include the following:
1. Node Type - Many nodes in the model occupy both an I node position on one element, and a J node position
on an adjacent element. The I node and J node buttons are used to specify which of these node types is desired
for the currently selected node. (Some exceptions to a node being both an I node and a J node would be pile tip
nodes and cantilever tip nodes).
2. Element Type - Pier Cap nodes that are positioned at the top of a column exist as both a pier cap element
node and a column element node. Thus a choice must be made as to which element type the selected nodes
forces are desired. The same is true for pile head nodes in Pile Bent models, which exist as both a pile element
node and a bent cap element node.
Additional Notes:
1. This feature is not currently available for Pile Cap nodes. Pile Head nodes are NOT considered pile cap
nodes; they are pile nodes, and thus can be used with this dialog.
2. The Soil Axial forces saved by this dialog do NOT include the Pile Tip Spring Force, as shown in the output
(.out) file in the Near Field Soil Resistance section.
4.5.2.4 Pile Cap Forces
Figure: 4.5.k "Pile Cap Forces" dialog.

This feature helps to quantify the governing forces and moment values on the pile cap, which in turn, can be
used for determining pile cap reinforcement layouts. The Pile Cap Forces dialog generates the maximum and
minimum moment (about Xp or Yp) and maximum magnitude shear (parallel to Zp) along the selected nodes on
the pile cap across all load cases. Importantly, positive bending moments correspond to tension on the bottom
face of the pile cap elements. The dialog also provides, per unit length, maximum and minimum moment plots
along the selected nodes.
Use of the Pile Cap Forces feature generally proceeds as follows:
1) Open and run an analysis with a model that contains a pile grid size of 2x2 or greater (e.g., the default General
Pier model).
2) Click the 3D Results button on the top toolbar, and right-click within the 3D Results window. Then select the
Pile Cap Forces option from the popup menu ( Figure: 4.5.k ).
3) Left-click on a node of interest in the 3D Results window to select it. Press and hold the Ctrl key to select
any number of additional nodes along a pile cap gridline. Alternatively, to automatically select all nodes along a
gridline, check the End Point Nodal Selection checkbox on the Pile Cap Forces dialog. Then, left-click on the
first node of interest and (while holding the Ctrl key) left-click on the last node on the gridline. To ensure
meaningful results, please refrain from skipping any nodes along the gridline while making multiple-node
selections.
4) Select the desired moment (about Xp or Yp) (e.g., as shown for the pier model in Figure: 4.5.l ). The
maximum and minimum moments in the desired direction can be found across all load cases, or for a selected
individual load case. The current load case can be changed using the Load Case edit box on the program
toolbar.
5) Click the Generate button to display the maximum and minimum moment plots. Absolute maximum shear
parallel to Zp is also calculated along the axis on which the moments (Xp or Yp) are acting ( Figure: 4.5.l ).
Figure: 4.5.l Maximum and minimum moment (about Xp) plots along the gridline at the base of columns of the
default general pier.
4.5.2.5 Bridge Span Force Plots

The Bridge Span Force Plots menu item launches the Bridge Span Force Plot dialog ( Figure: 4.5.m ). This
feature is only available for bridge (multiple pier) models, when the Bridge View menu item is also selected on
the 3D Results popup menu. This dialog works in conjunction with the 3D Results window, as selections made
on this dialog are drawn correspondingly in the 3D Results window. The bridge span is used to represent the 0axis, with positive force values drawn above the span, and negative force values drawn below the span ( Figure:
4.5.n ). The maximum and minimum values are given on the plot for the currently selected force type. A light blue
shading is used to indicate positive force values, and a red shading used to indicate negative force values.
Figure: 4.5.m Bridge Span Force Plot
Figure: 4.5.n Span Force Plot

The Span combo is used to specify the desired span for which to view force plots. This combo box also includes
an All Spans option at the bottom of the list. Choose the All Spans option to simultaneously view the currently
selected force plot for all spans in the model.
The Force combo is used to specify the type of force plot. Force options are as follows: Axial, Shear 2, Shear 3,
Moment 3, and Moment 2.
The Scale Plot edit box and spin control are used to scale the size of the plot area. This does not affect the
results data. It simply makes the size of plot area bigger or smaller, and thus can be useful in managing the
amount of window space used for the plot area when a particular model uses a very large or very small area.
Thus, scaling would make the plot easier to read in these extreme cases.
The Show Piers checkbox is used to show or hide the piers in the 3D Results window. Hiding the piers can
help visually isolate the force plots, making them easier to see.
Figure: 4.5.o demonstrates the force plot in the 3D Results window, when the Show Piers checkbox is not
selected.
Figure: 4.5.o Span Force Plot (bridge piers not shown).

4.5.2.6 Material Property Numbering

The Material Property Numbering option shows the material property numbers of all pier, pile, and connector
elements. To display numbering, right click in the 3D Results Window. This will launch a popup menu. Then
select the "Material Property Numbering" option. Because the pile and pier elements use separate numbering
systems, it is possible that pile and pier elements can share the same property numbers. This is despite the fact
that the pile and pier elements have different cross sections. To view the specific properties of these elements,
consult the PILE SEGMENT INFORMATION DATA and GENERAL PIER INFORMATION DATA sections in the
output (.out) file.
Figure: 4.5.p Material Property Numbering

4.6 XML Report Generator

The XML Report Generator is an Internet Explorer based interactive data retrieval system. Based on the XML
output created by FB-MultiPier, the report generator presents the user with a menu of available data. To use the
XML Report Generator you need to check the XML Data Printing option under the Print Control on the
Analysis page to generate the .XML file.
Figure: 4.6.a XML Data Printing

After you run the analysis, the XML output can be viewed. To do so, click on the XML Report Generator toolbar
button.
Figure: 4.6.b XML Report Generator Toolbar Button
You will be prompted to Allow blocked content. Click the Allow blocked content button to allow the blocked
content.
Figure: 4.6.c Allow Blocked Content
You will then need to browse to the location were the input file (.in) is saved. The .XML file, which will have the
same name as the input file (.in), should be in the same location as the input file (.in).
Figure: 4.6.d Select XMLFile
Click Yes to allow the ActiveX control interaction. If prompted, click the Allow blocked content button to allow
the blocked content.
Figure: 4.6.e Allow ActiveX Interaction
There are two web pages from which to customize the data to be viewed. The first page is the Model Data
Report, where the data you have selected is displayed.
Figure: 4.6.f Model Data Report
The second page is called the Model Data Menu, where you select the data you want to display by checking
the checkboxes (for example, the Print Text Report checkox). Then click the Click to Update Display button
which updates the data on the Model Data Report page.
Figure: 4.6.g Model Data Menu
5 Design Tables
1. Overview
2. GUIOptions
3. Condensed Tables
4. Extended Tables
5. Piercap Envelopes
6. User Walkthrough
5.1 Overview
The design tables represent a summary of the pertinent force results required for the design of the bridge pier(s)
modeled. Various tables and a full report are available for convenient review and are suitable for reporting
results to clients. Controlling forces and load cases are identified, as well as structural element identification and
location in the structure. For the pier cap, design force envelopes are plotted for convenient review and checking.
5.2 GUI Options

FILE OPTIONS The Design Load Table can be viewed in three different file formats, namely, pdf, text and excel
spreadsheet document. The File Options can be viewed in the Design Load Table dialog box as shown below.
User can select a particular file format by clicking on the respective radio-button.
Figure: 5.2.a File options in Design tables

The Engineers/Users can use any given file format as per their needs/choice. Text or Excel format files may
serve as a set of input array of data to further manipulate for design or plotting purpose. For Pier Cap (Bent Cap)
Shear Design and Pier Cap (Bent Cap) Moment Design tables, Excel file format has an extra worksheet
showing the Coordinates of the points on the Pier Cap where the shear and moment values are calculated. This
is to facilitate the user to prepare their own shear and moment envelopes.
Specific page footers can also be added to the Design Load Table. The options that can be added (to the page
footer) are Date and Time of the file creation, Version Number of FBMP used to create the results, and Filename
of the input (.in) file. The default file name for the Design Load Table files will be the input (.in) filename
followed by the title of the respective table.
Note: *.pdf(Acrobat Reader required), *.txt(Notepad required) and *.xml(Microsoft-Excel required).
5.3 Condensed Tables

1. Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads
2. Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections
3. Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections
4. Piercap Shear Design
5. Piercap Moment Design
5.3.1 Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

Displays the maximum compression and maximum tension at every pile or shaft head location. These results
would typically be compared to pile/shaft capacities as presented by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Figure: 5.3.a Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads
5.3.2 Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections

Displays the Max D/C ratio for every unique pile (or shaft) cross section and lists all 6 concurrent forces at these
locations. Note that the demand/capacity ratio is based on the strength axial-biaxial moment interaction and
when the program is run with the non-linear structural option P-delta effects are included in the demand forces
for piles, columns and pier cap.
Figure: 5.3.b Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections
5.3.3 Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections

Similar as for piles above. Displays the Max D/C ratio for the columns. If the columns are tapered this can include
many different section locations. (Note that the longitudinal reinforcement in tapered columns is constant in area
and bar number.)
Figure: 5.3.c Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections
5.3.4 Piercap Shear Design

This table of force envelopes identifies the maximum vertical shear F22 and all concurrent forces in the pier cap
at all critical sections: to left and right of every bearing location, at face of supports and at centerline of supports.
Note that bearings must be specified.
Figure: 5.3.d Piercap Shear Design
5.3.5 Piercap Moment Design

Moment envelope of the M33 moments created by the F22 shear. The moments are shown at centerline of all
bearings and faces of supports and centerline of supports.
Figure: 5.3.e Piercap Moment Design
5.4 Piercap Envelopes

1. Moment Envelope
2. Shear Envelope
5.4.1 Moment Envelope
Figure: 5.4.a Moment Envelope
5.4.2 Shear Envelope
.
Figure: 5.4.b Shear Envelope
5.5 Extended Tables

1. Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections
2. Maximum Forces for All Column Sections
3. Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
5.5.1 Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

This table shows, in turn, the maximum and minimum forces for axial load, shear 2, shear 3, moment 2, moment
3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Pile sections. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios
are listed.
Figure: 5.5.a Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections
5.5.2 Maximum Forces for All Column Sections

3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all column sections. All coexisting forces and demand capacity
ratios are listed. (note that currently there is only one column section unless the columns are tapered)
Figure: 5.5.b Maximum Forces for All Column Sections
5.5.3 Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections

3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Extra Members. All coexisting forces and demand capacity
ratios are listed. (note that Extra Members have only two nodes, one at each end )
Figure: 5.5.c Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
5.6 User Walkthrough

The Design Tables are a series of tables that summarize analysis data for various parts of the model for a
particular force or demand capacity ratio, across all load cases or load combinations. To access the Design
Tables feature, run the analysis for a General Pier or Pile Bent model. Then click the Design Tables D button on
the toolbar , as shown in Figure: 5.6.a
Figure: 5.6.a Design Tables toolbar button,.

The Design Tables Generator dialog will then be displayed, as shown in Figure: 5.6.b
Figure: 5.6.b Design Table Generator

Design tables can be displayed in three file formats: printable document format (.pdf), text (.txt), and EXCEL
spreadsheet (.xls). These formats are available in the File Options frame, as shown in Figure: 5.6.c
Figure: 5.6.c File Options frame.

To generate a design table, click one of the Condensed Tables buttons or one of the Extended Tables
buttons. The following is a list of the available tables:
1) Maximum Axial Forces at All Pile Heads this table displays the maximum compression and maximum
tension forces at the pile head nodes, across all load cases. It is used to compare to pile drive capacity.
2) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) this table displays the maximum
demand capacity ratio for each pile property across all load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load
case.
3) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the
maximum demand capacity ratio for each column property across all load cases, and the corresponding forces in
this load case.
4) Pier Cap Shear F22 Design there are two sub tables of this type. The first table displays the maximum (+)
shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports. The
second table displays the minimum (-) shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right
face and centerline of supports.
5) Pier Cap M33 Moment Design there are two sub tables of this type. The first table displays the maximum (+)
moment forces at the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports. The second table
displays the minimum (-) moment forces at the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports.
6) Maximum Forces for All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the maximum and minimum axial
force for each pile property across all load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case. This table also
repeats this process for the maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, maximum and
minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum Torque.
7) Maximum Forces for All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the maximum and minimum
axial force for each column property across all load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case. This
table also repeats this process for the maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3,
maximum and minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum Torque.
8) Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the maximum and
minimum axial force for each extra member property across all load cases, and the corresponding forces in this
load case. This table also repeats this process for the maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum
Shear 3, maximum and minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum
Torque.
To view the Piercap envelopes, click the Piercap Envelope button. The Envelopes dialog will be displayed, as
shown in Figure: 5.6.d
Figure: 5.6.d Envelopes Dialog.

To choose a type of envelope plot, choose a plot type from the Select Envelopes combo box, as shown in 5.6 .
For non-AASHTO models, there are two plot types: F22 Shear Envelope and M33 Moment Envelope. For
AASHTO models, there are several plot types, including F22 Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service, Extreme, as
well as M33 Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service, Extreme, and Fatigue.
Figure: 5.6.e Select Envelopes combo box.

The envelope plots report the maximum and minimum shear and moment data across all load cases, for the
following locations in the model: shear forces are reported at the left and right of the bearings and at the left face,
right face and centerline of supports; moment forces are reported at the bearings and at the left face, right face
and centerline of supports. The coordinate system used in the plot is the distance in the X direction from the left
tip of the pier cap (or bent cap, for pile bent models). This is illustrated in Figure: 5.6.f Note that the first
coordinate shown is 2.500. This is directly under the leftmost columns left face (Col 1 LF). This indicates that this
column face is 2.5 from the left tip of the pier cap. Note that the last coordinate shown is 17.500. This is directly
under the rightmost columns right face (Col 2 RF). This indicates that this column face is 17.5 from the left tip of
the pier cap.
Figure: 5.6.f Envelope plot orientation.

The Show Columns checkbox can be selected to draw the columns directly on the plot window, to improve
perspective, as shown in Figure: 5.6.g
Figure: 5.6.g Envelope Plots with 'Show Columns' option selected.
6 General Modeling
1. Column Connection to the Pile Cap
2. Taper Modeling
3. Node Numbering
4. Span Length Calculation
5. Preliminary Soil Values
6. Buried Pile Cap
7. Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting
8. Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model Changes
9. Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows
10. Step-By-Step Guide (Distributed Load Dialog)
11. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
12. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
6.1 Column Connection to the Pile Cap
In FB-MultiPier loads are transferred between pier columns and foundation members (e.g., piles) via the pile cap.
However, the pier column bases in FB-Multipier are modeled so as to prevent the generation of unrealistic stress
concentrations, as load is transferred from the pier column base into the pile cap nodes. Namely, internal forces
that develop in pier column bases are spread across four adjacent pile cap nodes, as shown in the figure below.
Accordingly, the propensity for numerical, fictitious stress concentrations is reduced.
The load-spreading process is carried out internally by the program: based on the coordinates of the column
base node, the four nodes adjacent to the base node are automatically identified, and "connector" elements are
defined between the four pile cap nodes and the column base node. In this way, the load is distributed to the pile
cap in the form of a column "footprint". The connector elements that are created are "rigid" elements, where the
connector element properties are automatically assigned relatively large constitutive and geometric properties.
In particular, the connector element stiffnesses are proportional to the properties of the columns, where the
connector element stiffnesses are amplified (relatively) by a factor of 10,000. Importantly, the weight of the
connectors are maintained at nominal levels so as not to unduly influence the system configuration. For pileand-cap models that contain stiffness nodes (i.e., where no pier columns are present), the connector element
stiffnesses are assigned in proportion to the pile cap, where again, a stiffness amplification factor of 10,000 is
used. The end conditions at the connectors are defined so that there is no moment transfer at the ends of the
connectors. Therefore, the connectors facilitate manifestation of column-end bending behavior without
generating localized moments at the connector-ends. Salient properties associated with the nodes that the
"connector" elements frame into are listed in the output file in the paragraph "PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTOR
ELEMENTS".
Figure: 6.1.a Column Connection to Pile Cap
6.2 Taper Modeling

FB-MultiPier allows for the modeling of tapered columns, pier caps and pier cantilever elements ( Figure: 6.2.a ).
The taper can be either linear or parabolic. The user is required to enter the properties at the ends of each
element (column, pier cap, pier cap cantilever) and also the number of sections in each element. The program
then discretizes each element into the number of specified sections and generates a series of elements each of
which having varying cross section properties to define the paper ( Figure: 6.2.b ). The axis of the parent
element (i.e. column etc) remains the same ( Figure: 6.2.c ). During the analysis, the analysis engine treats each
of the sections as individual elements with the specified material properties and the results are provided for each
of them.
Figure: 6.2.a Solid View of Model
Figure: 6.2.b Engine Model Discretization (Solid View) based on taper input data
Figure: 6.2.c Engine Model (Thin View) of Structure
6.3 Node Numbering

Local and Global Cartesian coordinate system (Node number shown are for example only)
Figure: 6.3.a Node Numbering
6.4 Span Length Calculation
Figure: 6.4.a Bearing Offset Measured from the Centerline of the Pier Pile Cap to the Centerline of the Bearings
In Figure: 6.4.a , y1, y2, y3 are local pier origins. Y Coordinate can be specified by the user on the "Bridge
Page".
Span length between two piers each with single row of bearings:
L = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2)
Span length between two piers (eg. Pier 2 and Pier 3) each with double row of bearings:
L = (y3 - y2) - (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) + (Pier3's pile cap width / 2 Pier3's bearing pad offset (left row))
Example y1 = 0ft; y2 = 60ft; y3 = 120ft; Pile caps = 16ft x 16ft; Bearing offset = 0.75ft.
Single row of bearings pier 1, double row bearing pier 2 and 3. So Span 1 Length is given as:
L1 = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 - Pier2's bearing pad offset (left row))
= (60ft - 0ft) - (16ft /2) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 59.3 ft
Span 2 Length is given as:
L2 = (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) + (Pier3's pile cap width / 2 - Pier3's
bearing pad offset (left row))
= (120ft - 60ft) - (16ft /2 + 0.75ft) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 58.5 ft
6.5 Preliminary Soil Values

To view Preliminary Design Soil Parameters PDF - Click Here
6.6 Buried Pile Cap

For the case where the pile cap is buried as shown in figure below, FB-Multipier will automatically calculate dead
load due to the soil weight applied to the pile cap and buoyancy as indicated by the respective soil and water
elevations defined by the engineer.
Note that the self weight factor and buoyancy factor will be applied to the soil above the cap in the same way
as it is applied to the structural and pile components. For example (shown below for a non AASHTO load case), if
both the self weight and buoyancy factors are equal to one, then the program will calculate the weight of the
structural and pile components, the weight of the soil above the top surface of the pile cap, and the effect of
buoyancy.
Figure: 6.6.a Buried Pile Cap

For AASHTO load combinations, the program uses user-defined unit weight of soil on Soil on Cap to generate
uniformly-distributed loads and includes them as addition to the self weight of the pile cap. That is, although the
AASHTO load factors for the load case of DC (i.e., components and attachments) are different from those for the
load case of EV (i.e., vertical earth pressure), the program would still apply the load factors of DC to the
uniformly-distributed loads of the soil weight applied to the pile cap. Therefore, the engineer would adjust the
user-defined unit weight of soil on Soil on Cap in order to consider the difference of the load factors between
the load cases of DC and EV.
6.7 Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting
When the user-inputted bearing spacings cannot be accommodated by FB-Multipier, the following error
message displays: "Error Generating Nodes for the Bearings." The specific cause of this error is most often the
result of the close proximity of bearings in one row versus the other row, such that an unacceptably small
element would need to be created between the two bearings (see Figure 2). So the question arises What is the
smallest allowable element length? This is a model-specific value. It is determined as follows: the maximum
number of pier cap (bent cap) nodes for any model is 256. Thus, the maximum number of pier cap (bent cap)
elements is 255. The minimum allowable bearing spacing is the pier cap length divided by 255. Positioning
bearings closer than this length results in an element length that is unacceptably short.
The figures below help to better explain these concepts. The figure below illustrates Bearing Spacing, a term
specifically defined as the user-inputted spacing between bearings within the same row (ie, bearings within the
left row, or bearings within the right row).The figure below also illustrates a case where the column offset is zero
in both rows, as the first bearing in both the left and right row are aligned with the centerline of column 1.
Figure: 6.7.a Bearing Positioning.
Given the following input data,the figure below illustrates a case where the Error Generating Nodes for the
Bearings error message is caused by too small a distance between bearings, thus creating an element length
that is unacceptably small.
Pier Cap Length = 50.000 feet
Number of Left Row Bearings = 3
Number of Right Row Bearings = 4
Left Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 20.000 feet
Right Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 13.333 feet
Distance From First Bearing in Left Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 feet
Distance From First Bearing in Right Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 feet
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Left row = 0.000 feet, 20.000 feet, and 40.000 feet
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Right row = 0.000 feet, 13.333 feet, 26.666 feet, and 39.999 feet
Figure: 6.7.b Bearing Positioning Zoom.

Note that the last bearing in the left and right rows do NOT have the same Xp coordinate. Instead, these bearings
are 0.001 feet apart. Given the maximum number of pier cap elements (255), the minimum pier cap element
length in this model is 50.000 feet / 255 = 0.196 feet. The bearing spacing of 0.001 feet would therefore create an
element that is smaller than the minimum allowable length of 0.196 feet. The analysis therefore could not be run,
given this bearing spacing condition. The solution is to move the location of the bearing in the right row, from an
Xp coordinate of 39.999 feet to and Xp coordinate of 40.000 feet This can be accomplished by using Variable
Spacing for the right row of bearings, and entering spacings as 13.333, 13.333, and 13.334.
6.8 Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model Changes
When modeling changes are made after an extra member has been applied, it is possible that the position of the
extra member could be automatically adjusted by FB-MultiPier. If and how the extra member is repositioned
depends upon the type of modeling change that has been made. There are two types of modeling changes that
are relevant to extra member positioning: a) changes to the total number of nodes in the model, and b) changes
that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the total number of nodes in the model.
Changes to the total number of nodes in the model: There are numerous modeling changes of this type. Some
changes are obvious, such as changing the number of column nodes, beam nodes, pile nodes, or free length
nodes. Other changes that affect the number of nodes are less explicit, such as changing the number of piles,
eliminating a free length, or converting from one bearing row to two bearing rows. When changes of this type are
made, FB-MultiPier attempts to retain the original position of the extra member, by changing the extra member
nodal assignments (ie, the node numbers used for the extra members i-node and j-node). Specifically, the extra
members previously assigned i-node and j-node are replaced with the nodes that are now closest to the extra
member elements original position. How much the extra member is shifted away from its original position
depends on how far away the closest nodes are to the extra members original position. Figure: 6.8.a and
Figure: 6.8.b illustrate an example of this (all pile cap and pile nodes have been hidden in these figures to
simplify the viewing of the model). A user has applied an extra member to the structure between columns 1 and
2. The user has assigned the extra member an i-node of 85 and a j-node of 95 (see Figure: 6.8.a ).
Figure: 6.8.a Extra Member is assigned to i-node 85 and j-node 95.

The user then manually adjusts the number of column nodes in the model (on the Pier Page), changing the
column node count from 3 nodes per column to 5 nodes per column. This action changes the total number of
nodes in the model, increasing the node count by 4 (2 new nodes for each of the 2 columns). Because of this
influx of 4 new nodes, the original extra member nodes 85 and 95 have been moved significantly (see Figure:
6.8.b ). Thus, FB-MultiPier, in an attempt to maintain the extra member position in the model, reassigns two new
nodes to the extra member, i-node 86 and j-node 98. This is because node 86 is the closest node to the original
position of node 85, and node 98 is the closest node to the original position of node 95.
Figure: 6.8.b Column Node count has been increased, and i-node and j-node are reassigned.
Changes that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the total number of nodes in the model:
There are numerous model changes of this type as well. For example, changing the pile free length or cantilever
length, changing the column height, changing the pile length, etc. These types of changes do not create or
delete nodes. FB-MultiPier simply redistributes the existing nodes, thereby keeping the total number of nodes
constant. When this type of modeling change is completed, the extra member maintains its nodal assignments.
This means that the extra members position in the model could change, because the extra members i-node and
j-node could change position. Figure: 6.8.c and Figure: 6.8.d illustrates an example of this. In this model, the
pile free length is 10. The pile free length is the distance from the pile cap centerline to the top of the soil. An
extra member has been applied at the bottom of the free length, at an elevation of -10 (see Figure: 6.8.c ).
There are 6 free length nodes and 5 nodes in the soil.
Figure: 6.8.c Pile Free Length is 10.
The model is then modified by a user. The user modifies the model by removing the top soil layer. This soil layer
had a top of layer elevation of -10 and a bottom elevation of -30. Thus, removing the soil layer extends the pile
free length down to an elevation of -30 (see Figure: 6.8.d ). The free length nodes are then redistributed over
the now-larger free length. Note that the number of free length nodes has NOT changed, nor has the number of
nodes in the soil. There are still 6 free length nodes 5 nodes in the soil. However, the element lengths have
increased in the free length because these nodes must now evenly divide a 30 free length instead of the original
10 free length. Conversely, the element lengths have decreased on the portion of the pile that is in the soil,
because the 5 soil nodes are now divided over a shorter portion of the pile. The extra members i-node and jnode shift downward to an elevation of -30 (the new elevation at the bottom of the free length). Because the
extra member maintains its i-node and j-node assignments, the extra member also moves down to an elevation
of -30.
Figure: 6.8.d Pile Free Length is 30.

When these types of modeling changes occur, it is advisable to double-check the extra member positions to
ensure they are desirable. Another alternative is to apply extra members to the model only after all other
modeling changes are complete. Doing so ensures that neither the total number of nodes will change, nor will
the existing nodes need to be redistributed.
6.9 Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows

There are several program windows in which a pile or soil set can be selected. These windows are the Soil Edit
window, Pile Edit window, Pile Page, and Soil Page. Regardless of which window the selections are made, the
Soil Edit window will display the currently selected pile within its assigned soil set. See Figure: 6.9.a Pile 1 is
the selected pile and Soil Set 1 is the selected soil set. The soil set number is displayed in the windows title
bar, and in the soil layer itself. The selected pile number is displayed in the top left corner of the window, along
with the pile type used in that pile.
Figure: 6.9.a Soil Edit Window

When the selected soil set is changed, the Soil Edit window will immediately update to display this newly
selected soil set. The following is a list of ways to set/change the selected soil set:
a) On the Soil Page, make a selection in the Soil Set combo box.
Figure: 6.9.b Soil Page (Soil Set combo box)
When this action is taken, if the currently selected pile uses the selected soil set, then the pile will also display in
the Soil Edit window, along with its nodes. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil
Graph Dialog. However, if the currently selected pile does NOT use the selected soil set, then nodes will not be
drawn on the pile. This indicates the pile does not use the displayed soil set.
Figure: 6.9.c Soil Edit Window

Note in this figure that Pile 1 is the selected pile, but Soil Set 2 is the selected soil set. Because soil set 2 is
NOT assigned to pile 1, the pile nodes are not drawn, and therefore soil curves would not be generated for this
pile-soil combination. It is common when building up the a model, such as creating multiple soil sets one right
after another, that the Soil Edit window will not draw the pile nodes, because these newly created soil sets have
yet to be applied to any piles. Once the soil sets have been assigned to piles and a pile selection is made, the
pile nodes will be drawn.
b) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the Soil Set combo box.
Figure: 6.9.d Pile Page (Soil Set combo box)

When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will also display in the Soil Edit window, along with its
nodes. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
c) In the Pile Edit window, use the Assign Soil Sets to Piles menu option.
Figure: 6.9.e Pile Edit Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)
Using this mode, soil sets are assigned to pile. After each soil set is assigned, it will display in the Soil Edit
window, along with the pile that is located within the assigned soil set in the pile grid. Note in Figure: 6.9.f that
soil set 2 has just been applied to pile 5. The Soil Edit window now displays Pile 5 and its assigned soil set,
which is Soil Set 2.
Figure: 6.9.f Pile Edit Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)
Figure: 6.9.g Soil Edit Window
This piles nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph
Dialog.
When the selected pile is changed, the Soil Edit window will display it, along with the piles assigned soil set.
The following is list of ways to set/change the currently selected pile:
a) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the Pile edit box. See Figure: 6.9.d
When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will display in the Soil Edit window, along with its nodes, as
well as this piles assigned soil set. The assigned soil set for this pile also is displayed on the Pile Page, in the
Soil Set combo box.
b) In the Pile Edit window, use the Add/Remove Pile menu option.
Figure: 6.9.h Pile Edit Window (Add/Remove Piles)

When this action is taken, if a pile has just been added, then this pile will become the selected pile. This selected
pile will then be displayed in the Soil Edit window, along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This piles
nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. (If a
pile has just been removed using the Add/Remove Pile option, then pile 1 will automatically become the
selected pile and display in the Soil Edit window, along with its assigned soil set).
c) In the Pile Edit window, use the Pile Data/Batter menu option.
Figure: 6.9.i Pile Edit Window (Pile Data/Batter)

When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will be displayed in the Soil Edit window, along
with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This piles nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will
display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. Note in Figure: 6.9.j that pile 3 has just been selected.
It has thus become highlighted in the Pile Edit window. The Soil Edit window now displays Pile 3 and its
assigned soil set, which is Soil Set 2.
Figure: 6.9.j Pile Edit Window (Pile Data/Batter)

When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will then be displayed in the Soil Edit window,
along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This piles nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will
display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
e) In the Pile Edit window, use the Assign Soil Sets to Piles menu option. (See Figure: 6.9.e ). When this action
is taken, the soil set that has just been assigned will display in the Soil Edit window, along with the pile that is
located within the assigned soil set in the pile grid. This piles nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes
will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
6.10 Step-by-step guide (Distributed Load dialog)
A convenient feature is available that facilitates generation and application of distributed loads to FB-MultiPier
models. Namely, the Distributed Load feature allows for the generation of constant value loads, uniform loads, or
linearly varying loads, which can then be applied to piles, pile caps, columns, and pier caps.
As a step-by-step demonstration of this feature, consider Figure: 6.10.a , which is a model view of a single pile
located in a stream bed. For this scenario, the horizontal load associated with the stream is taken into
consideration, and the distributed load generator is used in creating and applying the loads to the model. For the
remainder of this article, the series of steps taken within the FB-MultiPier graphical user interface are listed to
showcase how such loads are generated and applied. Please refer to the Distributed Load page for additional
details about the graphical user interface components in the Distributed Load dialog.
Step-by-step preliminaries: Consider a pier with nine driven piles, which are partially embedded in the ground,
and where free standing water is present above the ground surface. Now, temporarily focus upon a single pile
within the pier ( Figure: 6.10.a ), and assume that the height of the water head above the ground surface is 30 ft
and that the pile diameter is 3 ft. The water is subject to a current, and therefore, horizontal loading acts upon the
pile as a function of height below the waterline (linearly varying from 0 kip/ft to 5.62 kips/ft at the ground surface).
The Distributed Load dialog greatly facilitates creation and application of the linearly varying load on the pile
nodes positioned above the ground surface. Follow the steps below to apply the load using Distributed Load
dialog.
Figure: 6.10.a A single pile excerpted from the pier scenario, partially embedded in soil and subjected to
horizontal loading from water currents
Step 1: Open a model in FB-MultiPier and model the pier, ground surface, and waterline.
Step 2: Click the Distributed Load button on Load page. This will open the dialog shown in Figure: 6.10.b .
Figure: 6.10.b Distributed Load dialog

Step 3: Within the Distributed Load dialog, make sure that Pile is selected from the Member pull-down list
and Linear is selected from the Load Types pull-down list.
Step 4: Within the 3D View window, select the starting node and ending node upon which the uniform
distributed loads are to be applied. Nodes 113 (starting) and 123 (ending) are selected in this scenario.
Step 5: Within the Distributed Loads dialog, supply Xp load magnitudes at the starting and ending nodes. The
Xp starting load (per ft) is input as 0.0 kip/ft and the ending load (per ft) is input as 5.62 kip/ft in this scenario.
Step 6: Click the Generate Load On The Selected Member button ( Figure: 6.10.c ). The load vectors will then
be seen in the 3D View window for the selected member. Note that FB-MultiPier has generated these
concentrated forces based on the uniform load magnitudes and the model-specific nodal spacing.
Step 7: The Generate Load On Other Members can then be selected , which for this case, automatically assigns
the same load group to the respective nodes along each of the other piles in the pier model ( Figure: 6.10.d ).
Step 8: Click OK to apply the loads that have been generated.
Figure: 6.10.c Generation of load along the selected pile length
Figure: 6.10.d Generation of load along all other piles of the same type
6.11 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)

Modeling of vessel collision loads requires consideration of nonlinear structure-foundation response within a
dynamic analysis regime, which can be quite cumbersome. The Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module
in FB-MultiPier enables engineers to analyze structural demands in a time-dependent step-by-step manner, and
transforms a practical bridge design application into a streamlined analysis tool. Below is a walkthrough for
model development, and for making use of CVIA in FB-MultiPier:
1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the New icon

to open the Select New Problem Type dialog. Select the
default General Pier by clicking on "General Pier" radio button, and then clicking OK.
Figure: 6.11.a Open new problem type

2. The CVIA feature is a dynamic analysis method. To enable use of CVIA, select the Dynamic analysis option
in the Analysis Type panel on the Analysis Page.
Figure: 6.11.b Select Dynamic analysis type

3. The warning message will pop-up saying All the load case data except load case one will be lost. Click Yes.
Figure: 6.11.c Message warning about the loss of all load data except the load case one.
4. Dynamic analysis parameters are considered as shown in Figure: 6.11.d . On the Dynamics Page, select
the Vessel Collision dynamic loading option.
Figure: 6.11.d Selecting vessel collision option in dynamic analysis

5. Selecting Vessel Collision will clear the existing load function data (for dynamic loads). Click Yes.
Figure: 6.11.e Message warning about the loss of existing load function data
6. Navigate to the Load Page ( Figure: 6.11.f ), to apply the dynamic vessel collision load
Figure: 6.11.f Open the Vessel Collision dialog

7. Click on the Vessel Collision button to open the Vessel Collision dialog ( Figure: 6.11.g ).
Figure: 6.11.g Vessel Collision dialog

8. Within the Vessel Collision dialog enter the vessel weight and velocity components. Additionally, select the
collision type and the estimated collision width of the vessel that will be engaged in the Impact Conditions
panel. The Vessel Velocity is in the global X and Y directions. To model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a forcedeformation curve can be automatically created (or user-defined, if so desired). In this example, the impact
parameters and conditions are selected as shown in Figure: 6.11.h . Note that the Wide View check box
allows for viewing the force-deformation curve over a wider abscissa range.
Figure: 6.11.h Inputting Vessel-Collision conditions

Note that the vessel bow force-deformation curve is calculated in the Vessel Collision dialog, in accordance
with Figure: 6.11.i (Getter and Consolazio 2011). Additionally, note that the applied vessel collision impact
load-history is generated automatically during CVIA analysis by the FB-MultiPier analytical engine. Alternatively
stated, bridge pier response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision impact load-history.
If it is of interest, the load-history can be viewed upon completion of the analysis (please refer to Step 10).
Figure: 6.11.i Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-deformation (Getter and
Consolazio 2011)
9. Click OK at the bottom of the Vessel Collision dialog to return to the Load Page. Within the 3D View located
to the right of the Load Page:
1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (Node 17);
2. Click the Add button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the load type from static (S) to
dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision will be generated and applied is automatically determined,
given the vessel velocity data previously defined above in Figure: 6.11.h . For more details, please refer to
Section 6.12
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, all other applied nodal loads are treated as static (S) loads. Along
these lines, note that the Dynamic Relaxation feature is typically activated and is utilized to initialize the system
in equilibrium with permanent (static) loading, while minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the
presence of permanent loads.
Figure: 6.11.j Applying the vessel collision load at the point vessel impact
10. The CVIA model is ready to run. After carrying out the analysis, the user can check structural
demand/capacity ratios on pier components of interest.
11. The vessel impact load-history is generated by the analytical engine and stored in the .VES file ( Figure:
6.11.k ) and is saved in the same folder as the input file. An excerpt of the .VES file is shown in Figure: 6.11.l .
Figure: 6.11.k .VES file with impact load-history (for first 6 time steps only)
Figure: 6.11.l Vessel collision impact load-history

For a detailed case study for making use of the CVIA-OPTS features, please refer to Section 6.15 .
6.12 Defining the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) Collision Scenario
The following discussion assumes that the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis has already been activated. If this is
not the case, then please first refer to the step-by-step guide for activating CVIA within FB-MultiPier models.
Navigate to the Load page to define the vessel collision scenario.
1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (e.g., Node 17 as shown in Figure: 6.12.a
);
2. Click the Add button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the load type from static (S) to
dynamic (D).
Figure: 6.12.a Defining the impact location (node)

4. Click on the Vessel Collision button to open the Vessel Collision dialog ( Figure: 6.12.b ).
Figure: 6.12.b Vessel Collision dialog

Within the Vessel Collision dialog, enter the vessel impact parameters and conditions. For example, a Vessel
Weight of 11,432 kips and (global) Vessel X Velocity of 10.5 ft/sec is defined as shown in Figure: 6.12.c and
Click OK.
Figure: 6.12.c Inputting Vessel Collision conditions

One of the main advantages of using the CVIA feature is that it alleviates the burden of having to determine the
impact load-history prior to carrying out the analysis. Instead, the impact load-history is computed automatically
during the analysis, based on the vessel collision scenario and the bridge-pier-soil characteristics. Alternatively
stated, bridge pier response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision force history. In this
way, emphasis can remain on characterizing bridge response to vessel collision loading, rather than on forming
an appropriate impact load-history. However, in case it is of interest, the impact load-history is printed to an ACSII
file with extension .VES, where this file is located in the same directory as all other analysis output.
As a further convenience to engineers wishing to make use of the CVIA feature, only the initial vessel X and Y
(global direction) velocity components ( Figure: 6.12.c ) need to be specified to define the vessel orientation.
Other orientation-related inputs, such as activation of the respective degree(s) of freedom (DOF) dynamic
loading flags, are automatically handled by FB-MultiPier. For example, as shown in Figure: 6.12.c , a non-zero
Vessel X Velocity is defined, and accordingly, FB-MultiPier automatically activates the X dir DOF dynamic
loading flag ( Figure: 6.12.d ).
Figure: 6.12.d Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by FB-MultiPier)
5. As further demonstration, consider a scenario where both (global) X and Y velocity components are needed to
define the vessel collision scenario. Accordingly, click on the Vessel Collision button again, and within the
Vessel Collision dialog, enter a non-zero Vessel Y Velocity as shown in Figure: 6.12.e and Click OK.
Figure: 6.12.e Adding Vessel Y Velocity

Consequently, the vessel initial velocity is now the resultant of two components, with magnitudes in both the
(global) X and Y directions. Given that non-zero values are present for both the X and Y direction velocity
components, FB-MultiPier automatically activates the X dir and Y dir DOF dynamic loading flags ( Figure:
6.12.f )
Figure: 6.12.f Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by FB-MultiPier)
6.13 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
The One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model can be modeled using two scenarios as follows:
A. Default One Pier Two Span Problem Type
B. Automatic Generation, Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models
6.13.1 Default One Pier Two Span Problem Type
The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model using the New Problem Type, One Pier Two Span:
1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the New icon
to open the Select New Problem Type dialog. The default
OPTS model can be selected by clicking on "One Pier Two Span" radio button, and then clicking OK.
Figure: 6.13.a Select New Problem Type dialog

Figure: 6.13.b shows the 3D view of the default OPTS model.
Figure: 6.13.b 3D-view of the default OPTS model

2. Navigate to the Bridge Page. Click the Edit button to open "OPTS Data dialog for viewing or updating the
OPTS span-end springs and masses.
Figure: 6.13.c Bridge Page with Edit button to open "OPTS Data dialog
3. Figure: 6.13.d shows the "OPTS Data dialog. The user can see the default spring stiffnesses placed at the
ends of Span 1 and Span 2.
The default spring stiffnesses located at each end of the default OPTS model are generated so as to mimic Span
1, Span 2, and Pier 2 of the default FB-MultiPier bridge model. For more information on how the spring
stiffnesses and mass values were calculated, refer section 6.14 .
Figure: 6.13.d OPTS Data dialog

4. In addition to updating the spring stiffness and mass values as discussed above, the user can update the
structural members in the pier and soil properties as needed.
5. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the structural
demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest can be cataloged as with any other
set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
6.13.2 Automatic Generation, Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models
In addition to opening the default One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model in FB-MultiPier, one can also generate an
OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier bridge model. Note that multiple-pier bridge models must contain
three or more piers in order to be converted to OPTS models.
The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier bridge model:
1. Open any existing multiple-pier bridge model. Open FB-MultiPier program and Click on icon
browsing window. Select and open the multiple-pier bridge model of interest.
to open
For this particular case we will open a default bridge model in FB-MultiPier. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the
New icon
to open the Select New Problem Type dialog. The default bridge model can be selected by
clicking on "Bridge (Multiple Piers)" radio button ( Figure: 6.13.e ). Click OK.
Figure: 6.13.e Select New Problem Type dialog

Figure: 6.13.f shows the 3D view of the default bridge model.
Figure: 6.13.f 3D-view of the default bridge model

2. For demonstration purposes, Pier 2 will be selected to be used in the generation of an OPTS model. Navigate
to the Problem Page and click on the One Pier Two Span radio button.
Figure: 6.13.g Selection of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) Problem Type
3. The OPTS conversion dialog presents a listing of all piers that are eligible to be used in generating an OPTS
model. Note that the end-most piers are not permitted for conversion to OPTS models. For this demonstration,
Pier 2 is selected from the list.
Figure: 6.13.h OPTS Conversion dialog

4. After selecting Pier 2, a special analysis is carried out to automatically calculate the span end spring
stiffnesses and mass values. The resulting OPTS model is automatically saved as a stand-alone input file (with
format: [Original FileName]_OPTS_Pier#.in). For the present demonstration, the automatically generated file
name is: defaulte_OPTS_Pier2.in. Automatic generation of a stand-alone model input file prevents unintended
deletion/modification of the pre-existing bridge model. The spring stiffness and mass values are calculated
considering the adjacent pier properties and boundary conditions. For more information on how to calculate the
spring stiffnesses and mass values, refer section 6.14 . Please refer to step 6 and 8 for instructions on how to
view/edit these values.
Figure: 6.13.i Analysis window pop-up while program automatically calculate span end spring stiffnesses and
mass values
5. The OPTS model generated, after the analysis, is as shown below in Figure: 6.13.j .
Figure: 6.13.j OPTS model extracted from default bridge (multiple-pier) model
6. For the OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where you can view/edit the OPTS Data.
Click the Edit button to open "OPTS Data dialog.
Figure: 6.13.k Bridge Page

7. Figure: 6.13.l shows the "OPTS Data dialog. The user can see the span end springs stiffnesses placed at the
ends of Span 1 and Span 2. These were generated by the program during the analysis described in Step 4.
Figure: 6.13.l OPTS Data dialog

8. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the structural
6.14 Automatic Span-End Spring Stiffness and Mass Data Calculation (For One
Pier Two Span Model)
Calculation of span end spring stiffness and mass data for OPTS problem type in FB-MultiPier:
When a One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model is extracted from a full bridge model, the spring stiffness and mass
data at the ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected pier, are calculated automatically.
The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end spring stiffnesses in OPTS
model:
Consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of interest to be converted to an OPTS model
(In this case, Pier 3). As shown below, the program splits the bridge into three distinct portions ( Figure: 6.14.a ).
Figure: 6.14.a Splitting the Bridge to form the OPTS model

An equivalent stiffness matrix is calculated, for left and right end bridge portions, as follows:
1.
Isolate the extreme bridge portion (e.g., Left portion of bridge as shown in Figure: 6.14.b )
2.
The node at which the bridge is split is the selected node of interest ( Figure: 6.14.b ). The program
calculates the flexibility matrix of the structure at the particular equilibrium state, following general
principles. To do that the program internally applies unit forces at the selected node of interest. The unit
forces are applied successively in all six possible directions (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz).
3.
The displacements from each solution at the selected node comprise the columns of the flexibility matrix
(e.g., the displacements from the solution under the application of the Fx unit load comprise the first
column of the flexibility matrix).
4.
After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse, which constitutes the
equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.
This calculated equivalent stiffness matrices, for both left and right portion of the bridge, is applied to the
respective span ends of the OPTS model as shown in Figure: 6.14.b .
Figure: 6.14.b Applying equivalent spring stiffnesses at the two span ends of OPTS model.
The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end mass data in OPTS model:
As another example, consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of interest to be
converted to an OPTS model (In this case, Pier 3). Lumped masses are calculated for half of the span to the left
and right of the pier of interest as illustrated in Figure: 6.14.c .
Figure: 6.14.c Applying the lumped mass at the two span ends of OPTS model.
6.15 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis - One Pier Two Span (CVIA-OPTS) Case
Study
Application of the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module and One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
Technique for Dynamic Finite Element Analysis of Vessel-Bridge Collisions
In the following, an example is developed in a step-by-step manner using the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis
(CVIA) module and the One Pier Two Span (OPTS) modeling technique for an in-service bridge configuration.
Collision between an aberrant barge and a bridge pier is investigated, for which FB-MultiPier is showcased as a
state-of-the-art design-oriented bridge modeling tool for analyzing dynamic bridge response to vessel collision
loads. Namely, the SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge located in northwest Florida is selected for this example. The
SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge is 1.6 miles long and spans the Apalachicola River in northwest Florida. Vessel
navigation is permitted within a 150 ft channel. A six-span portion of the bridge is modeled in FB-MultiPier (
Figure: 6.15.a ), with Pier 59 as the pier of interest (i.e., the impacted pier).
Figure: 6.15.a SR-20 at Blountstown FB-MultiPier bridge model

The structural configuration (geometry, material properties) of the bridge are based on structural drawings, and
soil-modeling parameters are evaluated from boring site data. The input data are available upon request by
current users. Given the site-specific model input, the FB-MultiPier finite element (FE) model of Pier 59 is shown
in Figure: 6.15.b . The following walkthrough explains how to use the CVIA module to facilitate streamlined
vessel collision analysis of bridge-pier-soil systems.
Figure: 6.15.b Finite element (FE) model of Pier 59

Subsequent to supplying all pier and soil properties, CVIA is performed using the following steps:
1. Select the Dynamic analysis option in the Analysis Type panel on the Analysis page ( Figure: 6.15.c ).
Figure: 6.15.c Select Dynamic analysis type

2. On the Dynamics page, select the Vessel Collision dynamic loading type. For this example, Rayleigh
damping parameters are specified ( Figure: 6.15.d ) such that approximately 5% of critical damping is achieved
over the first five system vibration modes. Also shown in Figure: 6.15.d is the time step size (0.0025 sec). Note
that, when no other data are available, a time time-step size of 0.0025 sec is recommended for use of the CVIA
feature in FB-MultiPier. Additionally, when making use of the CVIA feature, the program automatically halts the
analysis after the vessel and impacted pier have separated for a period equal to 1 sec.
Figure: 6.15.d Select the Vessel Collision option on the Dynamics page
3. Select Pier #3 and navigate to the Load page ( Figure: 6.15.e ) to apply the dynamic vessel collision load.
Figure: 6.15.e Open the Vessel Collision dialog

4. Open the Vessel Collision dialog by clicking on the Vessel Collision button.
Figure: 6.15.f Vessel Collision dialog

5. Enter the vessel-collision conditions and type of vessel in the Vessel Collision dialog. The collision
conditions include specification of the vessel weight and vessel velocity in the global X and/or Y direction(s). To
model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a force-deformation curve can be automatically created (or user-defined, if
so desired). For the current demonstration, the vessel collision scenario is based on a static vessel collision load
of 2,550 kips on Pier 59 (as listed in the structural drawings). Using this static vessel collision load and the
empirical load determination equations given in the American Association of State Highway Transportation
Officials (AASHTO) Guide Specifications and Commentary for Vessel Collision Design of Highway Bridges
(AASHTO 2009), the collision conditions shown in Figure: 6.15.g are back-calculated.
Figure: 6.15.g Define vessel collision conditions

Note that the barge bow force versus deformation curve is calculated in the Vessel Collision dialog, in
accordance with Figure: 6.15.h (Getter and Consolazio 2011). Additionally, note that the applied vessel
collision impact load-history is generated automatically during CVIA analysis. Alternatively stated, bridge
response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the impact load-history. In this way, computed pier
response is coupled to elastic loading, crushing, unloading, and reloading of the vessel bow. Please refer to
Step 8 for instructions on accessing the computed impact load-history.
Figure: 6.15.h Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-deformation (Getter and
Consolazio 2011)
6. From the Load page, select the impact location (node), using 3D View and the Load page:
1. Select the node that best represents the impact location on Pier 59 (Node 12 in this case).
2. Click the Add button to add the impact node to the Node Applied list.
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the loading type at the
impact location from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision load will be generated and applied is automatically
determined, given the global X and Y components of initial vessel velocity, which were previously input within
the Vessel Collision dialog. For more details, please refer to Section 6.12
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, only a single impact location can be defined throughout the
model. All other applied nodal loads are considered to be static (S) loads.
Figure: 6.15.i Applying the vessel collision load at the point vessel impact
7. The model input necessary to make use of the CVIA feature is now complete, and the dynamic vessel collision
analysis is now ready to be carried out. Upon completion of the analysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios
on pier components of interest can be checked in a manner consistent with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis
results.
8. The vessel impact load-history is generated automatically by FB-MultiPier during the analysis and stored in
the .VES file ( Figure: 6.15.j ). This file (the .VES file) is saved in the same folder as the input file. The full impact
load-history, excerpted from the .VES file generated as part of the current example, is shown in Figure: 6.15.k .
Figure: 6.15.j First thirty lines of .VES file
Figure: 6.15.k Vessel collision impact force history

The impacted pier considered above (Pier 59 from the SR-20 bridge) is now used to create an OPTS model. The
OPTS modeling technique increases computational efficiency by transforming the bridge model (multiple-pier,
multiple-span model) to an equivalent model with one pier and two spans. Concentrated spring stiffnesses and
masses, connected at the ends of the two retained spans, are used to represent the stiffness and inertial
resistance of the multiple-pier, multiple-span bridge model. The OPTS modeling technique is intended to
substantially reduce computational costs associated with conducting implicit nonlinear dynamic analysis (e.g.,
CVIA) of bridge models while maintaining accuracy to within an acceptable margin of error.
The following is a step-by-step guide for creating an OPTS model, which makes use of the previously discussed
SR-20 bridge model.
1. Open the SR-20 full bridge model in FB-MultiPier and navigate to the Problem page ( Figure: 6.15.l ).
Figure: 6.15.l Open the Problem Page

2. On the Problem page, click on the One Pier Two Span problem type ( Figure: 6.15.m ).
Figure: 6.15.m Select the of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) Problem Type
3. When the OPTS Conversion dialog opens, select Pier 3 (which corresponds to Pier 59 of the SR-20 bridge),
and click the OK button ( Figure: 6.15.n ).
Figure: 6.15.n OPTS Conversion dialog

4. As part of the OPTS model formation, a special analysis is automatically carried out to calculate the span end
concentrated stiffness and mass values. The resulting OPTS model is shown in Figure: 6.15.o .
Figure: 6.15.o OPTS model (with Pier 59), created from the SR-20 full bridge model
5. For the OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where engineers can modify the stiffness and
mass data at the model extents, if so desired. Such modifications are made by navigating to the Bridge Page,
and then clicking the Edit button to open the "OPTS Data dialog. Recall that the spring stiffness and mass data
at the ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected pier, were calculated automatically, and so, care should
be taken if it is elected to modify these values. For more information on how to calculate the spring stiffnesses
and mass values please refer section 6.14 .
Figure: 6.15.p OPTS Data dialog

6. The CVIA-OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the structural
Demonstration of Computational Robustness of the OPTS Modeling Approach
On an ordinary desktop PC*, the computational time required for carrying out CVIA using the full bridge model is
10.5 min. In contrast, when using the same ordinary desktop PC* to analyze the CVIA-OPTS model, only 0.5 min.
are required. In Figure: 6.15.q to Figure: 6.15.s , displacements and forces at the top of the impacted column
are compared between the full-bridge and OPTS models. Note that excellent agreement is observed between
the records of displacement and internal forces, particularly at times in which maximum design-relevant internal
forces occur. Such agreement demonstrates the advantages of using the OPTS model over the full bridge model
when the user is interested in checking the response local to a given pier or pile bent, while still capturing full
bridge resistance. After carrying out the analysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the
pier components of interest can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
Figure: 6.15.q X-Displacement at the top of the impacted column
Figure: 6.15.r Internal shear at the top of the impacted column
Figure: 6.15.s Internal moment at the top of the impacted column

* The analysis was performed using Windows 7 desktop PC with specification of 16 GB of RAM and use of an
Intel Core i7 3.4 GHz processor.
7 Bridge Span Modeling

1. Deck Modeling
2. Bridge Span Overview
3. Bridge Span Node Numbering
4. Span Length Calculation
5. Section Properties and Temperatures
6. Compute Transformed Section Properties
7. Section Properties Dialog
8. Vertical Link Properties
9. Transfer Beam Properties
10. Bearing Pad Properties
11. Pier Cap to Pad Link Properties
12. Bridge Span Dead Load
13. Bridge Wind Load Generator
14. Temperatures Dialog
7.1 Deck Modeling

There are six components used when modeling the deck in FB-MultiPier:
1.
The Span (deck) element is used to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck. This is modeled as a
series of linear frame elements (default = 10) with properties specified by the user.
2.
The Vertical Link transfers loads from the span (deck) to a transfer beam. The vertical link is used to
account for the eccentricity of the centerline of the bridge deck relative to the centerline of the pier cap.
Also, the vertical link properties can be user defined, or automatically computed based on the span
(deck) end properties.
3.
The Transfer Beam transfers load between the bearings and the vertical link. The Transfer Beam
properties are either based on custom user input or are generated by the program based on the Span
end conditions.
4.
The Bearings are modeled as six springs to represent the response of the bearing in all degrees of
freedom. The spring properties are either based on custom user input or are generated by the program
based on the Span end conditions.
5.
The Offset Rigid Links are used to model the offsets between the bearings to the pier cap centerline.
For piers that are modeled with two rows of bearings, the offset distance is user defined.
6.
The Pier Cap is modeled as a nonlinear frame element projected along the centerline of the physical
pier cap.
Figure: 7.1.a Deck Modeling Components
Note: The deck is always linear.
7.2 Bridge Span Overview

The deck of the bridge and its connection to the supporting pier is modeled with a combination of elements
shown in the Figure: 7.2.a below. The superstructure (Span) element is modeled with a series of linear discrete
elements. With either constant or varying (tapered) cross sections. These element properties are input by the
user, and are intended to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck.
Since the span element is located at a distance from the bearings and essentially the pier cap centerline, FBMultiPier generates and uses a vertical rigid link element. This element is required to be rigid and therefore FBMultiPier internally assigns its properties. These properties are calculated based on those of the span element to
ensure the rigidity of the vertical rigid link.
Figure: 7.2.a Bridge Span Components

The transfer beam is the last element to complete the bridge span modeling. The transfer beam is used to
connect the bearings together and it therefore dictates the load path from the span element to the supporting
pier. The properties that are assigned to the transfer beam are such that they can simulate different span end
conditions.
The bearing elements are used to simulate the response of the bearings on the pier cap and they have six
degrees of freedom at each end. Each degree of freedom can either be constrained, released or it can have
custom properties. The constrained condition implies that the bearing will behave much like a rigid link in that
direction. The release condition simulates the case when the bearing provides no resistance in that particular
direction. Finally, the response of the bearing in a particular direction can be determined by user defined load
displacement curve.
Span End Conditions
Based on the construction the spans may have different end conditions; FB-MultiPier can simulate these
conditions by assigning various properties to the Transfer Beam. The Diaphragm condition assigns such
properties that the Transfer Beam will behave as a rigid element. The Non-Diaphragm condition relaxes the
values of the properties to allow a more flexible beam. Finally, the user is able to assign custom properties for the
Transfer Beam to simulate other conditions.
The span end conditions must be assigned at both sides of the span independently using the Edit Span
window.
7.3 Bridge Span Node Numbering
Figure: 7.3.a Bridge Span Node Numbering
7.4 Span Length Calculation

For Span Length Calculation, refer to: Span Length Calculation
7.5 Section Properties and Temperatures

The "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog is available for bridge models only. This dialog is used to
access the "Section Properties" dialog and "Temperatures" dialog for the currently selected span (this span
number is displayed in the dialogs title bar). This dialog is also used to compute transformed section properties.
Figure: 7.5.a Section Properties and Temperatures dialog

The "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box must be checked (selected) to compute transformed
section properties. These properties are computed based on the girder and slab dimensional and material
property input on the "Section Properties" dialog. The computation of the transformed section properties occurs
when the OK button is clicked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. The computed transformed
section properties are displayed on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, and thus using this feature will replace
the existing transformed section properties for the currently selected span.
The "Section Properties" button launches the "Section Properties" dialog. This button is only enabled when the
"Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box is checked (selected).
The "Elastic Thermo-Mechanical Analysis" check box is used to apply the temperature data to the analysis.
When this check box is checked, the "Temperatures" button becomes enabled. The "Compute Transformed
Section Properties" check box must be selected (checked) to access the "Elastic Thermo-Mechanical Analysis"
check box.
The Temperatures button launches the "Temperatures" dialog. This button is only enabled when the "Elastic
Thermo-Mechanical Analysis" check box is checked (selected).
7.6 Compute Transformed Section Properties

The Compute Transformed Section Properties feature automatically calculates span element transformed
section properties based on data input on the Section Properties dialog.
Using the input values of slab and girder elastic moduli, this calculation feature determines the modular ratio
(based on the elastic modulus of the slab), and then quantifies transformed span element cross section
properties. The as-quantified transformed section properties include area, moments of inertia, and unit weight.
As illustration of the feature, consider Figure: 7.6.a . The span cross section shown consists of a 656 in. wide by
9 in. thick concrete slab and four steel plate girders Figure: 7.6.a ). The four identical girders are collectively
centered beneath the slab, and are spaced horizontally at 13.5 ft.
Figure: 7.6.a Cross-section Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)
The series of dialogs that are accessed in making use of the transformed section properties feature are
described as follows. For any bridge model, navigate to the Bridge page and click Edit Span. Then, click
Section Properties and Temperatures ( Figure: 7.6.b ). Next, click the Compute Transformed Section
Properties checkbox to enable access to the Section Properties dialog ( Figure: 7.6.c ). Please see "Section
Properties" dialog for instructions on inputting the cross section data into FB-MultiPier (FBMP). Shown in Figure:
7.6.d is the Section Properties dialog, which houses detailed span element cross section data, where all of the
dimensions denoted in Figure: 7.6.a can be input. Subsequent to populating the detailed span section
properties, and clicking OK on the Section Properties and Temperatures dialog, a notification will appear to
confirm that the transformed section properties for the span will indeed be overwritten.
Figure: 7.6.b Bridge Span Properties Dialog
Figure: 7.6.c Section Properties and Temperatures Dialog
Figure: 7.6.d Section Properties Dialog
As demonstration of this feature, assume that the steel girder components (flanges, webs) from "Cross-section
Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)" are transformed to concrete components based on the
modular ratio n, where n = Egirder / Eslab = 29,000/3,625 = 8. Accordingly, the transformed section (in this
scenario) utilizes an elastic modulus value of 3,625 ksi. For the remainder of this discussion, automated
calculations of transformed section properties are compared to corresponding manual calculations.
The manually calculated transformed section properties are:
Transformed Cross Section Area:
Area of Single Steel Girder, As = (3.25 in*26 in+0.69 in*108 in + 3.25in *26in) = 243.52 in^2
Area of Concrete Slab, Ac = 9 in *656 in= 5904 in^2
Transformed Area, A = Ac + 4* As*n = 5904 in^2+ 4*243.52 in^2 *8 = 13696.64 in^2
The manual calculation of transformed area A matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP (
Figure: 7.6.b ).
Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 2 Axis (I2):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder,
Is2 = (3.25 * 26^3 /12) + (0.69 * 108^3 /12) + (3.25 * 26^3 /12) = 9,523.29 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab,
Ic2 = 9 * 656^3 /12 = 211,725.31 in^4
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I2 = (Is2) *n *4 + (Ic2) + 2 *(As)*n * (13.5 * 12/2)^2 + 2 *(As)*n*
(13.5*12+13.5*12/2)^2
I2 = 467,667,612.5 in^4
The manual calculation of I2 matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP ( Figure: 7.6.b ).
Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 3 Axis (I3):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder about 3 Axis,
Is3 = (26 * 114.5^3 /12) - ((26-0.69) * 108^3 /12) = 595,491.96 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab about 3 Axis,
Ic3 = 656 * 9^3 /12 = 39,852 in^4
Centroid (from Girder Base): ybot = 83.867 in
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I3 = (Is3) *n *4 + (Ic3) + 4 *(As)*n * (ybot -114.5/2)^2 + (Ac)*(119-ybot)^2
I3 = 31,903,875.69 in^4
The manual calculation of I3 matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP ( Figure: 7.6.b ).
Transformed Cross Section Torsional Inertia (J):

Note that the calculation of J is carried out using equations given in Roark's Formulas for Stress & Strain, 7th
Edition, Warren C. Young & Richard G. Budynas.
We know that, J = 1/3*b*t^3
For Transformed Cross-section

J = 1/3 * (656) * 9^3 + 1/3 * (26*n) * (3.25)^3 + 1/3 * (108) * (0.69*n)^3 + 1/3 * (26*n) * (3.25)^3
J = 202,669 in^4
The manual calculation of J matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP ( Figure: 7.6.b ).
Transformed Cross Section Unit weight:

Note that the unit weight of the transformed cross section is modified such that the unit-length weight of the
transformed section (i.e., the product of the transformed area and unit weight) remains equal to the physical unitlength weight of the corresponding span portion.
Transformed * (Transformed Cross Section Area) = s * (Steel Girder Area) + c * (Concrete Slab Area)
Transformed = [s * (Steel Girder Area) + c * (Concrete Slab Area)] / (Transformed Cross Section Area)
= [s * (As*4) + c * (Ac)] / (A)
= [450pcf * (243.52 in^2 *4) + 150pcf * (5904 in^2)] / (13696.64 in^2)
= 96.66 pcf
The manual calculation of matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP ( Figure: 7.6.b ).
7.7 Section Properties Dialog

The "Section Properties" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog launches the "Section
Properties" dialog( Figure: 7.7.a ). This dialog is available for bridge models only. This dialog is used to input
dimensional and material property data for girders and the slab, for each span in the model.
Figure: 7.7.a Section Properties

The span for which data will be input is set on the "Bridge SpanProperties" dialog, and displays in the title bar of
the "Section Properties" dialog.
The "Type" drop-down list is used to specify the type of girder used on the selected span. There are three girder
types available: Steel, Concrete and Box. When changing the selected girder type, default properties can be
automatically assigned to the new girder type selection.
The "Schematics" image displays the schematics of the dimensional inputs for each girder type.
The "Uniform Shape" check box dictates whether all girders in the selected span are uniform. The "Constant" and
"Variable" section property radio buttons on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog are used to specify whether
girder dimensional data varies along the length of the girder. There are four possible girder configurations: a)
Uniform Shape with Constant Height, b) Non Uniform Shape with Constant Height, c) Uniform Shape with
Variable Height, and d) Non Uniform Shape with Variable Height.
The "Bearings Per Girder" option is available only when the selected girder type is Box. Select either "One" or
"Two' bearings per box girder. This value will be applied to all box girders on the selected span. To utilize the
Two bearings option, the number of bearing locations in the model must be equal to twice the number of
girders.
The "Girder Spacing Typical Section" button launches the dialog shown in Figure: 7.7.b . The "Girder Spacing
Typical Section" dialog displays the spacing between the girders. Spacings are measured from the center-line of
each girder. The girder spacings should be set via this dialog.
Note: The girder spacing provided in the "Girder spacing Typical Section" is independent of the bearing
spacings, which are set via the "Bearing Locations" dialog launched from the "Pier" page.
Figure: 7.7.b Girder Spacings

The "Slab" material properties frame is used to input the following slab material properties: Youngs Modulus,
Shear Modulus, and Unit Weight.
The "Girder" material properties frame is used to input the following girder material properties: Youngs Modulus
and Unit Weight.
The "Slab" dimensions frame is used to input the following slab dimensional properties: Width and Height.
The "Girders" table in the Dimensions frame is used to input girder dimensional data. Which girder type is
selected (see section on "Type" above) dictates how much girder data will need to be input in the "Girders" table.
The dimensional input is also dictated by the girder type.
The "Girder Dimensions (Expanded View)" is launched via the Expand Table button. This dialog is used to
expand the viewable size of the "Girders" table, making viewing large sets of data with many table rows easy.
This expanded table also helps illustrate the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:
When girders have uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder dimensional data is input, and this set of
data is applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is one (1) row of input data ( Figure: 7.7.c ).
Figure: 7.7.c Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders have non-uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder dimensional data is input per
girder. Note there are two (2) rows of input data, as this model contains 2 girders on the span ( Figure: 7.7.d ).
Figure: 7.7.d Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration
When girders have uniform shape and variable height, one set of girder dimensional data is input per element.
Note there are ten (10) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span elements ( Figure: 7.7.e ).
Figure: 7.7.e Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height

When girders have non-uniform shape and have variable height, one set of girder dimensional data is input per
girder per element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span elements and 2
girders on the span ( Figure: 7.7.f ).
Figure: 7.7.f Girder Dimensions (Expanded View)Non Uniform Variable Height
The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girders" table.
The "Plot" button draws the 2-dimensional image of the slab and girders in the "Plot" window ( Figure: 7.7.g ). It
is recommended to click the "Plot" button after making changes to the dimensional input, to ensure the image is
based on the most current input.
Figure: 7.7.g Plot Window

On the "Plot" dialog, the "Print" button prints the 2-dimensional image of the slab and girders.
On the "Plot" dialog, the "Element" drop-down list is used with variable height girders to specify for which element
the girders be drawn.
7.8 Vertical Link Properties
Properties of the Vertical Link match the axes between the Span (S) and the Vertical Link (VL). The VL properties
can be user defined. Alternatively, if the VL properties are to be automatically calculated by the program, then the
goal is to select properties that are proportional to the ends of the span.
Figure: 7.8.a Axis for Vertical Link and Span
Eqn: 7.8.A
Eqn: 7.8.B
Eqn: 7.8.C
Eqn: 7.8.D
Eqn: 7.8.E
Eqn: 7.8.F
Where,
LVL Length of the vertical link element.
AVL Cross sectional area of the vertical link element.
JVL Torsional constant of the vertical link element.
I3VL Moment of inertia (I3) of the vertical link element.
I2VL Moment of inertia (I2) of the vertical link element.
EVL Youngs modulus of the vertical link element.
GVL Shear modulus of the vertical link element.
LS Length of the attached total bridge span.
AS Cross sectional area of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
JS Torsional constant of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
I3S Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
I2S Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
ES Youngs modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
GS Shear modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
7.9 Transfer Beam

Details are given below regarding the "Transfer Beam" which is used to connect the bridge superstructure (which
is modeled using linear elastic beam elements) to the substructure via bearings.
The "Transfer Beam" is an elastic beam element that transfers superstructure loads to the bearings. Currently all
loads from the superstructure are applied directly to the bearings on the transfer beam, and continuity effects due
to a continuous superstructure are calculated as the analysis is conducted. The next version of this program will
allow for loads to be applied directly to the superstructure.
It is imperative that neoprene bearings are modeled because their stiffness provides for the best and most
realistic, distribution of forces between super and substructure. This is important for loads applied in both
horizontal and vertical directions to the transfer beam. For example: in order to obtain an even distribution of
Dead Load forces the vertical long term neoprene bearing stiffness should be included (use the custom bearing
feature) otherwise the Dead Loads will "migrate" to the bearings that are closest to the stiffest parts of the pier
cap (as a bearing located over a column). The custom bearing stiffnesses are very easy to input and typically
require just 3 lines of data to describe the linear stiffness of these bearings.
A paper in the August 2000 Journal of Bridge Engineering, "Effect of Bearing Pads on Precast Prestressed
Concrete Bridges" provides stiffness values for typical bridge neoprene pads. The publication "Construction and
Design of Prestressed Concrete Segmental Bridges", by Jean Muller and Walter Podolny , page 245, provide an
excellent reference for calculating neoprene bearing stiffness and also discusses the need to use the long term
shear modulus for sustained loads.
Note in figure TR-1 that the node on the Transfer Beam and the corresponding node on the pier cap are, so to
speak, "master and slave nodes" that share the same coordinates in space but are linked by 6 springs that
control the movement between super and substructure.
The stiffness of the Transfer Beam can be input by the Engineer or for preliminary design the Engineer may elect
to use the stiff or soft Transfer Beam option provided by the program.
A future option we plan to develop at BSI is a preload option that would allow one to apply DL or other "built in"
loads to the structure before the transfer beam is engaged. These built in loads, as is often the case with
Segmental Bridges, would thus exist in addition to any other loads being applied.
Figure: 7.9.a Transfer Beam

The node numbering system for superstructure nodes, including Transfer Beam nodes, is depicted above. The
sequence is as follows per bridge span: node 1 is located at the base of the left elevation beam; node 2 is
located at the top of the left elevation beam; the bridge deck is divided into 10 elements of equal length, with a
node separating each element (nodes 3 through 11); node 12 is located at the top of the right elevation beam;
node 13 is located at the base of the right elevation beam. The number and location of the remaining
superstructure nodes depend on the number of bearing locations. Node 14 is the first bearing location on the left
rigid transfer beam. There is one transfer beam node per bearing location (nodes 14 through 19 as depicted in
figure TR-1). The right transfer beam nodes then follow (nodes 20 through 25 as depicted in figure TR-1).
The transfer beam is used to model the end conditions of the span and to transfer the load to the bearings. The
transfer beams properties are dependent on the properties of the vertical link.
The user can select from one of the three descriptions for the transfer beam:
1. Stiff (default)
2. Soft
3. Custom
Figure: 7.9.b Axis for Transfer Beam and Vertical Rigid Beam
Equation used to generate the transfer beam properties for the stiff (default) and soft options are described
below.
Stiff (default) properties:
Eqn: 7.9.A
Eqn: 7.9.B
Eqn: 7.9.C
Eqn: 7.9.D
Eqn: 7.9.E
Eqn: 7.9.F
Soft properties:
Eqn: 7.9.G
Eqn: 7.9.H
Eqn: 7.9.I
Eqn: 7.9.J
Eqn: 7.9.K
Eqn: 7.9.L
Where,
LTB Length of the transfer beam element.
ATB Cross sectional area of the transfer beam element.
JTB Torsional constant of the transfer beam element.
I3TB Moment of inertia (I3) of the transfer beam element.
I2TB Moment of inertia (I2) of the transfer beam element.
ETB Youngs modulus of the transfer beam element.
GTB Shear modulus of the transfer beam element.
LVL Length of the nearest vertical link element.
AVL Cross sectional area of the nearest vertical link element.
JVL Torsional constant of the nearest vertical link element.
I3VL Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest vertical link element.
I2VL Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest vertical link element.
EVL Youngs modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
GVL Shear modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
7.10 Bearing Pad Properties

The properties of the bearings can be calculated in one of three ways:
1) Based on properties of the Transfer Beam (TB)
2) Based on properties of the Rigid Links (RL)
3) Based on user defined custom curve
When there is fixity the program will use the larger of the first two options.
When there is no fixity (Release) then the program is using "EWEAKSPRING" which is defaulted to 1E-05.
The Spring element that is used has a 12x12 stiffness matrix.
Method 1 - Bearings based on transfer beam properties
Figure: 7.10.a Axis for Bearing and Transfer Beam
Eqn: 7.10.A
Eqn: 7.10.B
Eqn: 7.10.C
Eqn: 7.10.D
Eqn: 7.10.E
Eqn: 7.10.F
Method 2 - Bearings based on rigid link properties
Figure: 7.10.b Axis for Bearing and Offset Rigid Link
Eqn: 7.10.G
Eqn: 7.10.H
Eqn: 7.10.I
Eqn: 7.10.J
Eqn: 7.10.K
Eqn: 7.10.L
7.11 Pier Cap to Pad Link Properties

The properties of the Rigid Link (RL) are based on those of the Pier Cap (PC), where the rigid link is effectively
defined as rigid relative to the pier cap.
Figure: 7.11.a Axis for Offset Rigid Link and Transfer Beam
Eqn: 7.11.A
Eqn: 7.11.B
Eqn: 7.11.C
Eqn: 7.11.D
Where,
LRL User input pad offset from pier cap centerline; 1 inch for single row; 1 inch if no offset is specified.
ARL Cross sectional area of the rigid link element.
JRL Torsional constant of the rigid link element.
I3RL Moment of inertia (I3) of the rigid link element.
I2RL Moment of inertia (I2) of the rigid link element.
E Maximum Youngs modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
G Maximum Shear modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
LPC Distance from the first column centerline to last column centerline.
APC Maximum cross sectional area among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
JPC Maximum Torsional constant among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
I3PC Maximum Moment of inertia (I3) among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
I2PC Maximum Moment of inertia (I2) among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
7.12 Bridge Span Dead Load

This dialog shows the program-generated dead load from the Bridge Span self weight, based upon tributary
span lengths. Prior to version 4.12b of FB-Multipier, these loads were not displayed in the interface, though they
were used in the Analysis. This dialog is only available for Bridge models. For single pier models, the program
does not generate span dead load. To display the Bridge Span Dead Load Dialog, click the "Span Dead Load"
button on the Load Table.
Backwards Compatibility
For input files created prior to version 4.12b, and existing bearing loads are added to the new programgenerated Dead Load. For example, if the user had applied a 100 kip load to each bearing location, and the
program- generated bridge span dead load is 50 kips at each bearing, then the interface will now display a load
of 150 kips at each bearing. This load of 150 kips will be used in the Analysis. If the intent of the user is to have a
100 kip load on each bearing, the user should use the Load Page or Load Table to change the load at each
bearing to 100 kips. It is strongly recommended that the user visit the Load Page or Load Table to ensure the
loading has been transferred correctly.
Figure: 7.12.a Bridge Span Dead Load Dialog Non AASTO

Non AASHTO
During the analysis, the self weight factor will be applied to the span dead load. Thus, these loads as they are
displayed on this dialog and throughout the interface, have not yet been factored. The self weight factor applies
only to the dead load portion of loading at a bearing location. For example, suppose the program-generated
span dead load is 50 kips on each bearing, and the user changes this load to 60 kips. If the user has input a self
weight factor of 1.25, then the load used in the analysis would be (50 kips * 1.25) + 10 kips, or 72.5 kips. This is
the value displayed in the 'Analysis Force Z' column of this dialog.
Helpful Hints: If the user does not wish to have the program automatically generate the span dead load, one
option is to input a span unit weight of 0.0, on the Bridge Span Properties Dialog. Another option is to input a self
weight factor of 0.0, on the Load Page or Load Table. However, this self weight factor is applied to all pier
components (piles, columns, pier cap, bridge spans, etc).
Figure: 7.12.b Bridge Span Dead Load Dialog AASTO

AASHTO
In Aashto mode, in LRFD, the span dead load is displayed in the load case "Components and Attachments"
(DC); in LFD, the span dead load is displayed in the load case "Dead Load" (D). The Analysis will factor these
loads using the given DC (or D) factors. Thus, these loads as they are displayed in the interface, have not yet
been factored.
7.13 Bridge Wind Load Generator

This dialog appears for the Bridge problem type.
Figure: 7.13.a Wind Load Generation Dialog for Multiple Piers

A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The equations used in the wind
load generation are found here.
Note: For the Bridge model, it is up to the user to apply the loads that are associated with wind on substructure.
7.14 Temperatures Dialog

The "Temperatures" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog launches the "Temperatures"
dialog ( Figure: 7.14.a ). This dialog is available for bridge models only, for both AASHTO and non-AASHTO
mode. In non-AASHTO mode, the temperature data input on this dialog is applied to every load case, though
load cases can be excluded from the application of thermal loading via the "Thermal Load button on the Load
Page.
The "Temperatures" dialog is only available when the "Elastic Thermo-Mechanical Analysis" check box is
checked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. In AASHTO mode, this check box is labeled the
"Force Effects Due to Superimposed Deformations (TU, TG)" check box.
Figure: 7.14.a Temperatures Dialog

The "Temperatures" dialog is used to input temperature data for the slab and girders, for each span in the model.
In non-AASHTO mode, this temperature data is applied to the model as thermal loading on a per-load-case
basis. To assign the thermal loading to specific load cases, use the "Thermal Loading" dialog, launched from the
Load Page".
The span for which data will be input on the "Temperatures" dialog is set on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog.
This span number is displayed in the title bar of the "Temperatures" dialog.
The "Reference Temperature" input is used to input a baseline temperature to which all other temperature data is
referenced. For example, if the inputted reference temperature is -100 degrees F, and the inputted slab "Top
Temperature" is 225 degrees F, the analysis will treat the slab top temperature as 125 degrees F (-100 + 225 =
125).
The "TU" and "TG" radio buttons are used to specify the type of AASHTO loading used. These two buttons "TU"
(Uniform Temperature) and "TG" (Thermal Gradient) are only enabled in AASHTO mode.
The "Schematics" section displays a schematic of the temperature inputs and the location within the girder for
each input. There are three different schematics, one for each girder type (steel, concrete, and box). The girder
type is set on the "Section Properties" dialog (see the "Type" section in the "Section Properties" dialog topic).
Figure: 7.14.b Figure: 7.14.c , Figure: 7.14.d show the schematics for each girder type.
Figure: 7.14.b Girder Concrete Temperatures
Figure: 7.14.c Girder Steel Temperatures
Figure: 7.14.d Girder Box Temperatures

The "Thermal Elastic Properties" section is used to input the following values for the girders: Girder Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion, and Slab Coefficient of Thermal Expansion.
The "Slab Temperatures" section is used to input the following values for the slab: Top Temperature
(temperature at the top of the slab), Temperature 4 inches from the Top (of the slab), and Bottom Temperature
(temperature at the bottom of the slab).
The "Girder Temperatures and Heights" table is used to input girder temperature data. The schematic in the
"Schematics" section (described above) is useful in understanding the locations on the girder at which the
temperature inputs are applied.
The "Temperatures (Expanded View)" is launched via the "Expand Table" button. This dialog is used to expand
the viewable size of the temperature and heights table, making viewing large sets of data with many table rows
easy. This expanded table also helps illustrate the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:
When girders are uniform with constant height, one set of girder temperature data is input, and this set of data is
applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is one (1) row of input data ( Figure: 7.14.e ).
Figure: 7.14.e Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders are not uniform with constant height, one set of temperature data is input for each girder. Note
there are two (2) rows of input data, as this model contains 2 girders on the span ( Figure: 7.14.f ).
Figure: 7.14.f Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders are uniform with variable height, one set of temperature data is input per element. Note there are
ten (10) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span elements ( Figure: 7.14.g ).
Figure: 7.14.g Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height

When girders are not uniform and have variable height, one set of temperature data is input per girder per
element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span elements and 2 girders on
the span ( Figure: 7.14.h ).
Figure: 7.14.h Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Variable Height
The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girder Temperatures and Heights" table.
The "Plot" button launches the "Plot" dialog.
The "Plot" dialog displays the plot of the temperature data for the selected girder on the selected span ( Figure:
7.14.i ).
Figure: 7.14.i Thermal Gradient Plot

The "Element" combo box specifies the element for which the thermal gradient plot is displayed. This combo box
is not active when the "Constant" radio button is selected on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, because with
"Constant" properties, all elements within a girder share the same set of temperature data.
The "Girder" combo box specifies the girder for which the thermal gradient plot is displayed. This combo box is
not active when the "Uniform (across all girders)" property is selected on the "Section Properties" dialog is
selected (checked), because with this property selected, there is only one (1) set of temperature data per span.
The "Show Slab Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the slab temperatures on the plot. This
check box does not change the curve line; it merely controls whether the slab temperatures are visible or hidden.
It is useful when slab temperatures and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such that they
overlap. Hiding the slab temperatures in this instance makes viewing the girder temperature data easier to see.
The "Show Girder Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the girder temperatures on the plot. This
check box does not change the curve line; it merely controls whether the girder temperatures are visible or
hidden. It is useful when slab temperatures and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such
that they overlap. Hiding the girder temperatures in this instance makes viewing the slab temperature data easier
to see.
The "Print" button creates a printout of the thermal gradient plot.
8 Setup Options
1. Expanding Memory
2. Program Settings
8.1 Expanding Memory

The amount of memory allocated for running analyses using FB-MultiPier can be increased as needed. If an
analysis requires more memory than is currently allocated, then the analytical engine will generate an error
message:
STORAGE EXCEEDED BY ******** UNITS
Not enough memory is available for the analysis
To change the available memory settings goto
Control -> Program Settings -> Analysis Settings
The memory allocated for an analysis can be increased using the Program Settings Dialog, within in the Control
menu, in the interface. Specifically, supply a larger value for the Memory for Current Analysis, and repeat the
incremental increases until the analysis is able to complete. Note that older computers may not possess
sufficient memory for analyzing relatively large models.
8.2 Program Settings
Figure: 8.2.a Program Settings Dialog

To clarify the two different Analysis Settings:
Memory for Current Analysis is the amount of memory used when the current input file is analyzed and this
value will be saved with input data.
Memory for New Problem is the amount of memory used with each new problem created.
9 FB-MultiPier License Installation

1. License File
2. FB-MultiPier License Installation Help
3. Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation
4. Update/Install a License on a Network Server
5. Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation
6. Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server
7. Transfer License to a Different Computer
9.1 License File

FB-MultiPier operates using a license file to determine its status. All shipped versions run in Demo mode as the
default. The program can be "unlocked" into various modes including full version and student version,
networked or stand-alone. This unlocking can be done by hand, through phone contact with the Bridge
Software Institute (http://bsi-web.ce.ufl.edu ) or automatically through an internet connection to the BSI web
server.
The program requires a license file to be installed. This license file is linked to the computer on which it is
installed.
NOTE: You must have administrator rights to install FB-MultiPier or the license file on a server.
The following describes the modes and processes required:
Stand-Alone
A stand-alone or fixed license version is locked to run on a single machine and only that machine. The license
file is installed on the individual machine.
Network Version
A network version is a floating license version that allows a fixed number of machines to run the program at any
one time. For example, a three-seat installation allows three computers to run the program at the same time.
The program is actually installed on any number of machines. For example, you can install the program on 20
computers in your network. However, only three of the 20 can use the program at the same time.
This installation requires a network server that shares a directory with all the computers wishing to run FBMultiPier. The shared directory is where the license file is installed. All client machines must have read and
write permissions for the shared directory in order for the program to run.
There is a separate install program for installing the license file on the server.
If your network installation has multiple servers, you will need to purchase multiple server versions.
Updating the license
Any installed version can have its permissions changed by entering encrypted numbers into the license file.
This is done by choosing the Control->Update license option from the main menu. The update can be done by
hand or automatically through the Internet.
E-mail/Fax/Phone License Update
This option is for installations that do not have an Internet connection. To do this installation, call the BSI support
number (check the web for the phone number) and you will be stepped through the process. Numbers from your
computer need to be given to the BSI representative and we can Fax or E-mail the encoded numbers you will
need to type into the program.
Internet License Update
This option requires the computer on which you are installing the license file be connected to the Internet. Then,
all numbers are communicated through the Internet and the license updated automatically. The computer can
either be a stand-alone system or the network server for a multiple seat license.
Transfer License
There is a built in function that allows you to transfer you license to another machine. This allows you to move
the license file from your current server or workstation to a new machine.
Troubleshooting
The license file (both for servers and individual workstations) is locked to a machine based on hardware
components contained in the machine. If you change or modify your hardware (drives, motherboards etc) your
installation may not function. To do this, you should first transfer the license, then modify your hardware, and
then re-install the license on the machine.
Novell systems: Be sure that the directory where the license file is saved is accessible to any user. The user
must have read, write, modify, erase and create rights for that directory.
License Update Tutorial
9.2 FB-MultiPier License Installation Help

Before updating the program license for the first time, the FB-MultiPier program will run in demo mode. While
running in demo mode, the model size is limited to a 5x5 pile group and the program execution is limited to 30
days. After purchasing the program, these limitations can be removed by using the License Configuration
Wizard.
To update the software license at any time, select Update Software License from the Control menu while viewing
the intro Logo window. Doing so brings up the License Configuration Wizard.
The initial License Configuration Wizard screen shows four options for updating the software license. The
options are shown below:
Figure: 9.2.a License Configuration Wizard

9.3 Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation
This option is used for a single installation of the software that does not rely on network to run the program. A
license of this type is individually purchased per machine.
Figure: 9.3.a Stand Alone License Configuration Wizard
Click the Next button to continue. The next screen allows the user to update the license by Email
(bsi@ce.ufl.edu).Click Next. Please contact the BSI for assistance if needed.
Figure: 9.3.b Update Methods
License File Update by Email

This option requires to send an email to the BSI. To update a license by Email, select Update by Email and click
the next button to continue. The next screen shows a series of edit boxes for entering license data. The Session
Code and Machine ID need to be given to the BSI representative. EMAILthis Session Code and Machine ID to
bsi@ce.ufl.edu. After validating the users account information and status, the BSI representative will then Email
the user with a series of numerical codes that will modify the configuration of the license file. If the numerical
codes are entered correctly, the program will be unlocked and will run without any limitations. If any of the
numerical codes are entered incorrectly, the wizard will prevent the user from advancing to the next screen.
Click Next after entering the numerical codes.
Figure: 9.3.c License Codes
The Update Complete screen will then be shown after successfully entering the numerical codes. In order to
apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the
Finish button will update and automatically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
9.4 Update/Install a License on a Network Server
This option is used for a single installation of the software on a network server. This license update is identical
to stand alone workstation update, except that the license is configured on the network server. This option
would be used to run the program directly on the server to take advantage of the server hardware configuration
(i.e. more memory, hard disk space, etc.). A license of this type is individually purchases per machine.
Select Update a License on a Network Server from the initial screen and follow the steps outline for Updating a
License on a Stand Alone Workstation.
Figure: 9.4.a Network License Configuration Wizard

9.5 Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation

This option is used to set the license file path to the license on a Stand Alone Workstation. Once this path has
been established it will be saved so that the client machine will automatically find the license file each time the
program is run.
Figure: 9.5.a Set License Path (Stand Alone)

Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license file path on the Stand
Alone Machine. The user can either type the path or preferably click the Browse button to locate the file. The
license file is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click the Browse button, locate the license file on the client machine.
Figure: 9.5.b Browse to License File

Click the Next button after locating the license file. The Update Complete page is now shown. In order to apply
the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish
button will update and automatically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
9.6 Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server

This option is used by the network client computer after a server license file has been configured and
successfully installed on the network server (see LicServe Wizard). When a floating network license is
purchased, the limiting factor is the number of network seats. The FB-MultiPier program can be installed on any
number of client machines, however, the number of clients that can run the program at one time is limited by the
number of network seats purchased. In order for the client machine to run the program using this scenario the
client must locate the license file that has already been installed on the network server. Once this path has been
established it will be saved so that the client machine will automatically find the license file each time the
program is run.
Figure: 9.6.a Set License Path (Network)

Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license file path on the network
server. The user can either type the path or preferably click the Browse button to locate the file. The license file
is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click the Browse button, locate the license file on the network server, and click Open
to continue. You must browse through the network to locate the license file. You can not use a mapped drive
letter.
Figure: 9.6.b Browse to the License File

Click Next after locating the license file on the network server. The Update Complete page is now shown. In
order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be restarted.
Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically close the program. The program will now run in an
unlocked state.
Figure: 9.6.c Press Finish (Update Complete)
9.7 Transfer License to a Different Computer

This option is used to transfer a valid software license to another computer if the user no longer wishes to have
the license on the current computer. Please note that selecting this option will invalidate the license file on the
current machine. Also, this option is only valid for a stand along workstation installation of FB-MultiPier. Floating
network installations are not applicable since the license is stored on the network server.
To proceed, select Transfer License to a Different Computer and click the Next button.
Figure: 9.7.a Transfer Existing License
Because this process can not be reversed, the user must check the box to confirm the remove the license from
the current computer before proceeding. Doing so will enable the Next button. Click the Next button to remove
the license.
Figure: 9.7.b Check to Transfer

The next screen informs the user that the license has been successfully removed. A verification code is
displayed on the screen (and written to the file "LicRemoval.txt" in the application directory). This code must be
given to a BSI representative in order to complete the license transfer process and activate the license on
another computer.
Figure: 9.7.c License Transfer Code
Click the Next button to continue. The Update Complete page is now shown. In order to apply the changes to
the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will
update and automatically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
10 Toolbar Icons
1. Description of Toolbar Icons
2. General Pier Wizard
10.1 Description of Toolbar Icons

The buttons in the toolbar at the top of the screen control the accessed to different modules within the program.
Some of the menu items can also be accessed using the buttons instead for convenience. The purpose of each
button in the toolbar is described below.
Figure: 10.1.a Toolbar Icons
Figure: 10.1.b File Option Icons
Figure: 10.1.c Model Data and Analysis Icons
Figure: 10.1.d Analysis Results Control Icons
Figure: 10.1.e Pier and Load Case Menus
Figure: 10.1.f 3D Control Bar Icons (if activated)
10.2 General Pier Wizard
The General Pier Wizard creates a general pier problem using detail specified information.
Figure: 10.2.a General Pier Wizard

By entering the information requested at each step the user can create a customized general pier model in a
short time.
11 Batch Analysis
1. Batch Mode
2. RunningFB-MultiPier Engine in Batch Mode
11.1 Batch Mode
A batch of input files can be analyzed interactively in Batch Mode.
Figure: 11.1.a Batch Mode Dialog

Check the "Include" box to analyze the input file.
Select the memory size for each input file. Most normal size models only require 8MB of memory. Larger models
may require more memory. The program will provide a notification if the memory size is exceeded. At this time,
FB-MultiPier does not automatically determine the memory requirements in advance of the analysis.
The Completion Status indicates a successful or unsuccessful analysis for each model.
Retrieving input files:

Select "Open Existing Batch File" to retrieve an existing set of input files.
Select "Add Input File(s)" to add input files to a new or existing batch file. One or more files can be added at a
time by using the Ctrl key while selecting files in the Open file dialog.
Run mode:
Select "Run Without Interruption" to analyze all input files without pausing for modeling errors or convergence
failures.
Select "Pause on Analysis Failure" to have the program pause to display modeling errors or convergence
failures a particular model.
11.2 Running FB-MultiPier Engine in Batch Mode

The FB-MultiPier engine can be run in a batch mode. This allows a number of input files to be run sequentially.
The input files need to be created by the graphics program (FB-MultiPier) as normal and saved. Then, the engine
can be run using a batch file or any other scripting language. If you wish to use a DOS type batch, you can do the
following:
1.
Use Notepad to edit a file
2.
The lines of the batch file are:
"C:\program files\BSI\FB-MultiPier\FB-MultiPier_eng.exe" I:\my documents\FB-MultiPier\test.in O:\my

documents\FB-MultiPier\test.out
There can be as many lines as required for the number of input files.
The format is as follows:
The first thing on the line is the location of the executable. This includes the full path to the .exe file. In addition, if
there are spaces in the path name, the entire executable must be enclosed in quotes.
Second is the input file, designated by I: Again, the full path must be included. Quotes should not be used around
the input file path.
Third is the output file name designated by O: Again, the full path must be included. Quotes should not be used
around the output file path.
There can also be a memory allocation change on the line if more memory is required. The format is m:xx,
where xx is the number of megabytes (MB) to use in the analysis. (i.e. m:64) The default value is 8MB.
3.
Save the file as run.bat (run is an arbitrary name, the extension must be .BAT).
4.
Double click on the run.bat file to start execution.
As an example, here is a batch file that will run the program for three input files.
"C:\program files\BSI\ FB-MultiPier\FB-MultiPier_eng.exe" I:\my documents\FB-MultiPier\test1.in O:\my

documents\FB-MultiPier\test1.out
12 Soil-Pile Interaction
Soil-Pile Interaction section characterizes both the axial and lateral soil-pile interaction. The axial soil-pile
interaction is modeled with hyperbolic t-z curves. The tip resistance is modeled with q-z curves given in axial
soil-pile interaction section. The lateral soil-pile interaction is modeled with nonlinear p-y curves. Four of the p-y
models are the same as those given in FHWA's COM624P manual (See "Wang and Reese").
1. Group Interaction
2. Soil Resistance Due to Pile Rotation
3. Soil Properties
4. Lateral Soil-Pile Interaction
5. Axial Soil-Pile Interaction
6. Torsional Soil-Pile Interaction
12.1 Group Interaction

When a group of piles are subject to a vertical or lateral load (i.e. wind, earthquake, etc.) their vertical or lateral
resistance is generally not equal to the sum of the individual pile resistance. Generally the group resistance is
less than the individual pile resistance and is a function of pile location within the group, and pile spacing.
Consider lateral loading of the variable groups (3x3, 4x3, to 7x3) in dense sand shown below:
Experimental testing (centrifuge) on pile groups has resulted in the following shear distribution in each of the
individual rows:
Table: 12.1.A Average Pile Shear (kN) - Medium dense Sand (Dr = 55%)
Layout
3x3
4x3
5x3
6x3
7x3
Average
Lead Row
2nd Row
3rd Row
4th Row
5th Row
6th Row
7th Row
245
178
142
294
205
151
142
294
222
160
151
142
302
205
178
142
142
142
285
222
178
151
142
142
142
284
206
167
148
142
142
142
Group
(Measured)
1664
2375
2909
3336
3790
Group
(Predicted)
1898
2398
2843
3270
3697
Error (%)
14
2.3
2.5
Note that the individual row contributions, with the exception of the trail row, appear to be only a function of row
position. Also, using the average for the row (with exception of trail row) does a good job of predicting the
measured group response. Consequently, the approach recommended by Hannigan et. al. (2006) with Pmultipliers listed in AASHTO 2012 has been implemented in the program.
The following P-multipliers are recommended for lateral loading at 3D pile spacing:
0.8, 0.4, 0.3, 0.3, ..0.3 where 0.8 is the lead row and 0.3 is the trail row value
For 5D pile spacing the following P-multipliers are recommended:
1.0, 0.85, 0.7, 0.7, , 0.7 where 1.0 is the lead row and 0.7 is the trail row value.
These multipliers generally represent group efficiencies of 70-75% for 3D spacings and 95% for 5D pile spaced
groups. Also, the multipliers were found to be independent of soil density (sands).
NOTE: The program will apply the P-multipliers to the correct pile rows (lead to trail) based on the direction the
piles move. The P-multipliers are always given in trail to lead order. This does NOT depend on the direction of
the applied load.
In the case of battered piles (A frame) as shown below:
Figure: 12.1.a Pile Group Plan and Layout

Centrifuge Tests were conducted on both 3D and 5D groups shown in loose and dense sands. Presented is one
of the comparisons of plumb vs. battered response:
Figure: 12.1.b Lateral Load Vs Displacement Curves

Based on the centrifuge results the same multipliers are recommended for battered (A frame) as plumb pile
groups. Presently there is little, if any data on other batter layouts.
Pile Bents
For pile bent models, P-multipliers can be specified for each pile in both the Xp and Yp directions. Note that for
pile bent models with P-multipliers specified in the Xp direction, the multipliers are applied in the same manner
as that used for pier models. However, for pile bent models with P-multipliers specified in the Yp direction, the
pile that is nearest to the Xp-Yp-Zp origin is always assigned the multiplier associated with the lead pile.
Axial Efficiency
The program also has an axial group efficiency factor. This is a factor that affects the force displacement in the
axial direction. The axial efficiency factor is found from the "Soil Page", under the group button. For more
information, see Sayed (1992).
12.2 Considerations for Battered Piles
Modeling of pile inclination (batter) is available in FB-MultiPier, as indicated in Figure: 12.2.a for a pile with
horizontal (H) versus vertical (L) slope. Instructions for making use of the FB-MultiPier UI to incorporate pile
batter into piles are listed here. In the following discussion, soil resistance of battered piles is focused upon,
where considerations made with respect to processing of soil resistance forces and stiffness are detailed.
Figure: 12.2.a Schematic of battered pile

Lateral Soil-Pile Interaction
Lateral soil-pile interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that lateral (horizontal) soil resistance (i.e., P-Y springs) is
NOT rotated for battered piles. Stated alternatively, the P-Y soil springs always remain parallel to the Xp axis (or
Yp axis, as applicable), regardless of the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the tributary length supplied
in integrating the lateral soil resistance force does reflect P-Y spring force along the pile length. Consequently,
the tributary length used for integrating the soil P-Y springs along battered piles reflects the total horizontal soil
resistance available to battered piles.
Vertical Soil-Pile Interaction
Vertical soil-pile interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that vertical soil resistance (i.e., T-Z springs for skin friction; QZ springs for end bearing resistance) is NOT rotated for battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T-Z and Q-Z soil
springs always remain parallel to the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the
tributary length supplied in integrating the vertical soil resistance force does take into account the vertical spring
(T-Z, Q-Z) force along the pile length. Consequently, the tributary length used for integrating the soil vertical soil
resistance springs along battered piles partially captures the total vertical soil resistance available to battered
piles. Likewise, the nodal displacement component (resolved) along the axial battered direction is supplied
when integrating to calculate the vertical soil resistance spring forces.
Critically, subsequent to calculating the soil resistance forces (using batter-oriented tributary lengths and batteroriented, axial nodal displacements), ONLY the vertical component of the forces is retained for use in forming the
vertical soil resistance stiffness.
Torsional Soil-Pile Interaction
Torsional (rotation about the pile axial direction) soil-pile interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that torsional soil
resistance (i.e., T- springs) is NOT rotated for battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T- soil springs always
such that torsion aligns with rotation about the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching pile node.
However, the tributary length supplied in integrating the torsional soil resistance does take into account the
length along the battered pile. Consequently, the tributary length used for integrating the soil torsional soil
resistance springs along battered piles partially captures the total torsional soil resistance available to battered
piles. Likewise, the nodal rotation component (resolved) along the axial battered direction is supplied when
integrating to calculate the torsional soil resistance spring forces.
Critically, note that ONLY the rotation and corresponding component of torsional resistance for rotation about Zp
is used in forming the torsional soil resistance stiffness.
12.3 Soil Properties

Following are the important soil properties required as input parameters.
1. Preliminary Soil Values

2. Buoyancy
3. Young's Modulus
4. Poisson's Ratio
5. Shear Modulus
6. Angle of Internal Friction
7. Undrained Strength
8. Subgrade Modulus
12.3.1 Preliminary Soil Values

Preliminary Soil Values
12.3.2 Buoyancy
The buoyant force on the bridge substructure that is submerged, i.e., below the water table, is automatically
computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is selected in non-AASHTO mode or if buoyancy is activated
(checked on) in AASHTO mode. The computation includes piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of the
pile cap is accounted for, where the volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be used to determine the
buoyant force acting on the pile cap. A convenient way to check buoyancy and self-weight calculations is to
include only these loads, run the program, and then view the "Sum of Total Soil Spring Loads", Z direction in the
output file.
12.3.3 Young's Modulus

The youngs modulus, of soils, can be obtained from following empirical equations:
For Sand
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.A
where
= 5 for sands with fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure ( 2000 psf)
= corrected SPT blow-count (blows/ft)
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.B
where
= subgrade modulus (pcf)
= width of pile (ft)
= poissons ratio
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.C
where
= depth below ground surface (ft)
For Clay
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.D
where
= range of beta is shown in the table below
= undrained shear strength (psf)
Range of for Clay
12.3.4 Poisson's Ratio
The following typical values may be used for the Poisson's ratio for soils:
= 0.2 to 0.45 for sand
= 0.4 to 0.5 for clay
or a spatial average, for the values of over depth may be used for soils consisting of both sand and clay.
12.3.5 Shear Modulus

The shear modulus, G of soils, is a function of soil type, past loading, and geological history. It is recommended
that G be obtained from insitu tests such as dilatometer, CPT and SPT.
G can be computed from Young's Modulus , E and Poisson's ratio , v, from the following correlation:
Eqn: 12.3.E
For Sand
(ksf)
Eqn: 12.3.F
where
= maximum shear modulus (ksf)
use the values of Young's Modulus, E from equations Eqn: 12.3.A Eqn: 12.3.B and Eqn: 12.3.C into Eqn:
12.3.E to calculate shear modulus for sand.
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.G
where
= 5 for sand fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure( 2000 psf)
= width of pile (ft)
= poisson's ratio
= depth below ground surface (ft)
For Clay
Use the values of, Young's Modulus, E from equation Eqn: 12.3.D into Eqn: 12.3.E to calculate shear modulus
for clay.
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.H
where
= range of beta shown in Eqn: 12.3.D
= undrained shear strength (psf)
12.3.6 Angle of Internal Friction

Angle of internal friction, ', can be computed from SPT N values using the following empirical correlation:
Eqn: 12.3.I
where
C
= correction for overburden pressure
FHWA 96 uses the correction by Peck, et al. (1974):
Eqn: 12.3.J
valid only for v 0.25 tsf (24 kPa) (Bowles, 1977 )
Normalizing for atmospheric pressure (pa): (1 atm = 101.3 kPa = 1.06 tsf )
Eqn: 12.3.K
Larger values should be used for granular material with 5% or less of fine sand and silt.
For numerical implementation, the average correlation can be expressed as
Eqn: 12.3.L
where
12.3.7 Undrained Strength

Estimates of undrained shear strength, cu can be made using the correlations of qu with SPT N-values (see the
figure below).
Eqn: 12.3.M
where
qu = unconfined compressive strength
Figure: 12.3.a Correlations between SPT N-value and Unconfined Compressive Strength
12.3.8 Subgrade Modulus

Subgrade modulus, k (F/L3 ) of cohesionless soil can be estimated from empirical correlations. For sand, use SPT
N-value to find in Figure: 12.3.b and use Figure: 12.3.c to find k.
Figure: 12.3.b SPT Blow Count vs. Friction Angle and Relative Density
Figure: 12.3.c K vs. Relative Density
12.4 Lateral Soil-Pile Interaction

For the lateral pile-soil interaction, the user can select any of the following p-y models.
1. O'Neill's Sand
2. Sand of Reese, Cox, and Koop
3. Sand (API)
4. O'Neill's Clay
5. Matlock's Soft Clay Below Water Table
6. Reese's Stiff Clay Below Water Table
7. Reese and Welch's Stiff Clay Above Water Table
8. Clay (API)
9. Limestone (McVay)
10. Limestone (McVay) 2-3 Option
11. Custom P-Y
12.4.1 O'Neill's Sand

SOIL=1, is O'Neill (1984) recommended p-y curve for sands:
Eqn: 12.4.A
where
= a factor used to describe pile shape;
= 1.0 for circular piles;
A= 0.9 for cyclic loading;
= 3-0.8 z/D 0.9 for static loading;
D= diameter of pile;
pu = ultimate soil resistance per unit of depth;
k = modulus of lateral soil reaction (lb/ft3 or N/m3 );

z = depth;
y = deflection.
The ultimate soil resistance pu in equation Eqn: 12.4.A is determined from the lesser value given by equations
Eqn: 12.4.B and Eqn: 12.4.C .
Eqn: 12.4.B
Eqn: 12.4.C
wherez = depth in soil from ground surface;
= effective unit weight of soil;
Ka = Rankine active coefficient;
= (1 - sin )/(1 + sin )
Kp = Rankine passive coefficient;
= 1/Ka ;
Ko = at-rest earth pressure coefficient;
= 1 - sin ;
= angle of internal friction;
= 45o + /2 .
The p-y relationship given in equation Eqn: 12.4.A depends on the soil parameters k (lb/in3 or N/m3 ) and
(deg), which may be obtained from insitu SPT data. For sand, use SPT to find ( Figure: 12.4.b ) and to find k
(F/L) ( Figure: 12.4.c ).
A comparison between O'Neill's p-y curve for sand and Reese et. al. (1974) curve (SOIL=2) is shown in Figure:
12.4.a for =35 k=150 lb/in3 , and buoyant =52.6 lb/ft3 at a depth of 25 ft. Evident from the figure, O'Neill's curve
fits Reese's initially, but differs for Pu (generally the case).
Figure: 12.4.a Comparison of ONeills and Reese, Cox, and Koops P-Y Curves
Figure: 12.4.b SPT Blow Count vs. Friction Angle and Relative Density
Figure: 12.4.c K vs. Relative Density
12.4.2 Sand of Reese, Cox, and Koop

SOIL=2, Reese, Cox, and Koop (1974) developed p-y curves for static and cyclic loading of sands based on an
extensive testing of pipe piles in Texas. The p-y curve is shown below and a complete description of curve is
available in FHWA's COM624P (1993) manual. User must supply the soil's angle of internal friction , ,
subgrade modulus, K, and the sand's buoyant unit weight, ' .
Figure: 12.4.d P-Y Curves for Static and Cyclic Loading of Sand (after Reese, et al, 1974)
12.4.3 Sand (API)

API Sand Model p-y Curve (Refer to Section G.8.6 and G.8.7 API RP2A LRFD)
The ultimate lateral bearing capacity for sand at a given depth is used as the smaller value between pus (ultimate
lateral resistance at shallow depths) to pud (ultimate lateral resistance at greater depths), which are determined
by the following equations ( Eqn: 12.4.D and Eqn: 12.4.E ).
Eqn: 12.4.D
Eqn: 12.4.E
where z
p'o
D
C1,C2,C3
=
=
=
=
=
depth below ground surface

effective overburden pressure in stress units
diameter of the pile
coefficients determined from Figure G.8-1, which is a function of
effective internal friction angle
The variation of coefficients of C1,C2,and C3 with are given in the graph below.
Figure: 12.4.e Figure Variation of coefficients C1, C2 and C3 with

Using the ultimate lateral resistance, the lateral soil resistance deflection (p-y) relationship for sand is
approximated as
Eqn: 12.4.F
where pu = ultimate bearing capacity, which is defined as smaller value from the Eqn: 12.4.D nd Eqn: 12.4.E
subgrade modulus, force per volume units, is determined from Figure: 12.3.c , which is a function of
k =
' = effective internal friction angle

z = depth below ground surface
y = lateral deflection
A = factor to account for cyclic or static loading conditions, which is defined as
For cyclic loading,
For static loading,
12.4.4 O'Neill's Clay

SOIL=3, is O'Neill's P-Y method for static and cyclic loading of clays. Shown in the figures below are both the
static and cyclic curves. The user must supply the clay's undrained strength , c, the strain (in/in) at 50% failure,
50 and 100% of failure 100 from an unconfined compression test.
Figure: 12.4.f O'Neill's Integrated Method for Clay (b) Cyclic Loading Case
Figure: 12.4.g ONeills Integrated Method for Clay (b) Static Loading Case
12.4.5 Matlock's Soft Clay Below Water Table

SOIL=4 is Matlock's (1970) p-y representation of soft clays below the water table. The p-y curves for both the
static and cyclic response are shown below. The user must supply the soil's unit weight, , undrained strength, c,
and the strain, 50 at 50% of the failure stress in an unconfined compression test. A complete description of the
curves are given in the FHWA's COM624 manual, as well as recommended soil values.
Figure: 12.4.h P-Y Curve for Soft Clay Below Water Surface (Static Loading)
Figure: 12.4.i P-Y Curve for Soft Clay Below Water Surface (Cyclic Loading)
12.4.6 Reese's Stiff Clay Below Water Table

SOIL=5 is Reese et al. (1975) p-y model for stiff clays located below the water table. The p-y curves for both the
static and cyclic response are shown below. The user must supply the soil's subgrade modulus, k, unit weight, ,
undrained strength, c, the strain, 50 at 50% of the failure stress in an unconfined compression test, and the
average undrained strength cavg for the whole clay layer. A complete description of the curves are given in the
FHWA's COM624 manual, as well as recommended values if no triaxial tests are performed.
Figure: 12.4.j Reese et al (1975) Cyclic P-Y Curve for Stiff Clay Located Below the Water Level
Figure: 12.4.k Reese et al (1975) Static P-Y Curve for Stiff Clay Located Below the Water Table
12.4.7 Reese and Welch's Stiff Clay Above Water Table

SOIL=6 is Reese and Welch's (1975) p-y model for stiff clays above the water table. The p-y curves for both the
static and cyclic response is shown below. The user must supply the soil's unit weight, , undrained strength , c,
the strain, 50 at 50% of the failure stress in an unconfined compression test, and the average undrained
strength cavg for the whole clay layer. Since this model is a function of the number of load cycles, the variable,
KCYC on line 7 of the input is used. A complete description of the curves is given in the FHWA's COM624
manual, as well as recommended values if no triaxial tests are performed.
Figure: 12.4.l Welch and Reese (1972) Static P-Y Curve for Stiff Clay Above Water Table
Figure: 12.4.m Welch and Reese (1972) Cyclic P-Y Curve for Stiff Clay Above Water Table
12.4.8 Clay (API)

API Clay Model p-y Curve (Refer to Section G.8.2 to G.8.5 API RP2A LRFD)
The ultimate unit lateral bearing capacity, pu , for soft clay under static lateral loads can vary between 8c to 12c
except at the shallow depths. In the absence of more definitive criteria, use the empirical equation given by API
RP2A LFRD:
Eqn: 12.4.G
Eqn: 12.4.H
where c
p'o
z
D
J
XR
=
=
=
=
=
=
undrained shear strength of undisturbed clay soil samples, in stress units

effective overburden pressure in stress units
depth below ground surface
diameter of the pile
dimensionless empirical constant
depth from the ground surface to the bottom of reduced resistance zone, which is defined as;
Eqn: 12.4.I
where ' = effective unit weight of soil in weight density units
In FB-MultiPier analysis, the value of J is set equal to 0.5, which is recommended for Gulf of Mexico clays. The
data used in piecewise linear p-y curves of API clay are given in the table:
Figure: 12.4.n p-y Curve for API Clay (z < XR)
Figure: 12.4.o p-y Curve for API Clay (z XR)

Notation used for axis labels is defined as
P
Pu
y
yc
=
=
=
=
actual lateral resistance in stress units

ultimate lateral bearing capacity in stress units
actual lateral deflection
defined as;
Eqn: 12.4.J
where c = strain occurring at one-half the maximum stress on laboratory undrained compression tests of
undisturbed soil samples
12.4.9 P-Y Resistance for Florida Limestone (McVay)
The data for the PY curves presented below is based on the report "Development of Modified T-Z curves for large
diameter piles/drilled shafts in limestone for FBPIER"(McVay et. Al. (2004)). The data for the back computed
curves were obtained from 12 lateral load tests performed in the centrifuge with diameters of 6 and 9 ft,
embedment (L/D) of 2, 3, and 4 and rock strengths of 10 and 20 tsf. (The report recommends that full scale field
tests be employed to validate the curves presented). Each lateral load test gave multiple P-Y curves, which were
averaged to obtain a representative curve.
Presented in Figure: 12.4.p are back-adjusted P-Y curves for all twelve-centrifuge tests with side shear
considerations; i.e., two shaft diameters (6 and 9), three embedment lengths (L/D = 2, 3, and 4) and two rock
strengths (10 tsf and 20 tsf). Also shown in the figure are the predicted P-Y curves for soft and stiff clay models.
Figure: 12.4.p P-Y curves from 12 lateral tests corrected for side shear.
Evident from the figure, even though the lateral resistance is normalized with rock strength and diameter, there is
quite a bit of variability in the P-Y curves. Therefore the curves were normalized even further to be represented
by a single trend-line. The P values are normalized with q 0.15 D0.85. Figure: 12.4.q shows the normalized Pu
Y curves for Florida Limestone corrected for side friction. Note that the curves are valid for all the experimental
results (i.e., 6 and 9 diameter shafts, different rock strengths, etc.). Note also that the P-Y curves are unit
dependent. That is for the English system, the rock unconfined compressive strength (q ), the shaft diameter and
u
rocks lateral resistance, P must be in ksf, feet and kips/ft, respectively. For the Metric system, the rock unconfined
compressive strength (q ), the shaft diameter and rocks lateral resistance, P must be in KN/m2, m and KN/m,
u
respectively. The normalized curves can be obtained by the following equations:
Eqn: 12.4.K
Eqn: 12.4.L
where:
D = Pile diameter
qu = Unconfined Compressive strength
y = Pile Displacement
Figure: 12.4.q Normalized P-Y curves corrected for side shear.
12.4.10 Limestone (McVay) 2-3 Option

When a shaft that is embedded in rock strata is laterally loaded then the lateral response at any elevation along
the shaft length is a function of the lateral resistance of the rock and the side shear (skin friction) that is
developed at the shaft/rock interface. The commonly used back calculated P-Y curves do not account for the
contribution of the side shear explicitly. Rather the skin friction contribution is implicitly accounted for in the
method of back calculating the P-Y curves. However as the diameter of the shaft becomes larger together with
the high shear stress that is developed at the shaft/rock interface this effect can become very significant and the
explicit determination of the side shear contribution may be justified. Such effort will involve the inclusion of the
side shear contribution to the lateral response mechanism of the soil and thus it will reflect in the P-Y curves.
Figure: 12.4.r shows a free body diagram of an element of the shaft of length dz. Based on force equilibrium we
can calculate the lateral response of the soil per shaft unit length either neglecting or including the contribution
the side shear forces. If the contribution of side shear T, is included in the calculation then we see that there is a
moment Ms due to the side shear.
Ms = TD/dz
This will result in a lateral force component, dP, which acts to reduce lateral demand.
dP = - d(Ms)/dz
The skin friction in the shaft interface causes the reduction.
Figure: 12.4.r Forces acting on a shaft element of length dz
P-Y curves for Florida Limestone with/without the inclusion of 2-3 rotation are given below. The data for the P-Y
curves presented below are derived from the technical research report "Development of Modified T-Z curves for
large diameter piles/drilled shafts in limestone for FBPIER", McVay et al. (2004). Note that the P-Y curves are unit
dependent: for the English system, the rock unconfined compressive strength (qu), the shaft diameter and rocks
lateral resistance, P must be in ksf, feet and kips/ft, respectively. For the Metric system, the rock unconfined
compressive strength (qu), the shaft diameter and rocks lateral resistance, P must be in KN/m2 , m and KN/m,
respectively. The curves can be obtained by the following equations:
Eqn: 12.4.M
Eqn: 12.4.N
where:
D = Pile diameter
qu = Unconfined Compressive strength
y = Pile Displacement
Note that p is held constant for values of y/D exceeding 0.1
FB-MultiPier can generate two types of P-Y curves for the Florida limestone to allow the user to either include or
exclude the effect of the side shear contribution during the analysis. This option is activated when choosing "Soil
Resistance due to Pile Rotation about 2 and 3 axes" from the soil page, under Soil Layer Models Lateral. More
information on "Soil Resistance Due to Pile Rotation". When the analysis is requested to include the side shear
contribution to the lateral response mechanism then the program calculates the additional term dP. If on the
other hand the option is not selected then the effect of side shear is not calculated. Based on the discussion
above the user should use this feature with the necessary caution and only where the use is justified. That is
when this option is chosen then care must be taken so that the appropriate P-Y curve is used.
Limestone (McVay) 23 Option is an option for Soil Layer Model Lateral.
Figure: 12.4.s M1 Limestone (McVay) 23 Option Soil Properties

Soil Resistance due to Pile Rotation about 2 - 3 axes may be selected or deselected on this dialog.
Figure: 12.4.t M2 Limestone (McVay) 23 Option Soil Properties
12.4.11 Custom P-Y

User can select the "Custom P-Y" curve option for applying user-defined P-Y curves to subsurface pile nodes that
fall within a given soil layer.
The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points. Please enter the data set in two columns.
User defined P-Y data
Y1 P1
Y2 P2
Y3 P3
... ...
Y10 P10
Where
Yiis the ith Y (lateral deflection) value on the user specified P-Y curve.
Piis the ith P (lateral resistance) value on the user specified P-Y curve.
12.5 Axial Soil-Pile Interaction

Axial pile capacity is comprised of side friction and tip resistance. Respective component forces are obtained
from the following curves:
1. Axial T-Z Curve for Side Friction
2. Q-Z Curve for Tip Resistance
12.5.1 Axial T-Z Curve for Side Friction

Axial T-Z curves for modeling the soil-pile interaction are categorized for the following cases:
1. Driven Piles
2. Axial Skin Friction for Limestone (McVay)
3. Driven Pile Sand (API)
4. Driven Pile Clay (API)
5. Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
6. Custom T-Z
12.5.1.1 Driven Piles

The axial T-Z curves used in modeling the pile-soil interaction along the length of the driven pile is shown in
following figure (McVay, 1989) and given as
Eqn: 12.5.A
where
Eqn: 12.5.B
At a particular location on the pile, is the shear stress being transferred to the soil for a given z displacement,
o
where r is the radius of the pile and r is the radius out from the pile where axial loading effects on soil are
o
m
negligible, assumed to be initially equal to the product of the pile length, (1- soil's Poisson's ratio), and the ratio of
the soil's shear modulus at the pile's center to the value at its tip. The user must supply Gi, the initial shear
modulus of soil, v, Poisson's ratio of soil, and f, the maximum shear stress between the pile and soil at the depth
in question. Evident from the equation above, the side springs are highly nonlinear.
Figure: 12.5.a Axial T-Z Curve for Pile
12.5.1.2 Axial Skin Friction for Florida Limestone (McVay)
The following data is based on tests which were performed on 6 diameter shafts embedded 18 (L/D = 3) into
the rock and are described in the report "Development of Modified T-Z curves for large diameter piles/drilled
shafts in limestone for FBPIER"(McVay et. Al. (2004) ). All of the plots, Figure: 12.5.b Figure: 12.5.d show
the loaddis place ment data which mobilize significant axial resistance with small displacements (i.e., 80%
capacities at 0.5% of diameter). Axial load tests in lower strength 5 tsf rock, proved unattainable, because the
rock mass fractured from the shaft to the boundaries of the bucket.
Figure: 12.5.b Axial load vs. displacement in 10 tsf strength rock
Figure: 12.5.c Axial load vs. displacement in 20 tsf strength rock.
Figure: 12.5.d Axial load vs. displacement in 40 tsf strength rock.

The load applied at the top of each shaft was subsequently converted into shear stress (skin friction, f ) on the
s
shaft/rock interface by dividing by the shaft area. Styro-foam was placed at the shaft tip so the entire load was
transferred to the rock through skin friction. Plots of f vs. axial displacement (T-Z curves) for each strength rock
s
are shown in Figure: 12.5.e .
Figure: 12.5.e T-Z curves for 10, 20 and 40 tsf rocks.

From the T-Z curves, the ultimate unit skin frictions were established from the horizontal tangents. Ultimate unit
skin friction of 53 psi, 92 psi and 160 psi, were found for rock strengths of 10 tsf, 20 tsf, and 40 tsf, respectively.
Shown in Figure: 12.5.f are the normalized T-Z curves : f values were normalized with respect f
(ultimate
s
smax
unit skin friction) and vertical displacement, Z, was normalized with respect to D (diameter).
Figure: 12.5.f Normalized T-Z curves for synthetic rock.
The three normalized curves are quite similar and can be represented by a single curve (shown in bold line), with the
following equations:
0 R 0.5
Eqn: 12.5.C
0.5 R 3
Eqn: 12.5.D
3 R
Eqn: 12.5.E
where: R = z/D*100.
fs = skin friction
fsmax = ultimate unit skin friction
Kim (2001) analyzed data from 33 axial load tests (Osterberg) from various bridge sites throughout Florida and
recommended the normalized T-Z curve for the natural Florida Limestone given in Figure: 12.5.g . A
comparison of Kims normalized T-Z curve with the synthetic rock curve, Figure: 12.5.f is also shown in Figure:
12.5.g . Evident from the figure there is a very good agreement between the normalized T-Z behavior of the
natural limestone and the synthetic rock.
Figure: 12.5.g Comparison of normalized T-Z curves.
12.5.1.3 Driven Pile Sand (API)

API Sand Model t-z Curve (Refer to Section G.4.3 and G.7.2 API RP2A LRFD)
For pipe piles in cohesionless soils, the unit skin friction is calculated for API sand as
Eqn: 12.5.F
where K = dimensionless coefficient of lateral earth pressure (ratio of horizontal to vertical normal effective stress
(for unplugged K=0.8 and for plugged K=1.0)
p'
= effective overburden pressure in stress units
o
= friction angle between the soil and pile wall, which is defined as
Eqn: 12.5.G
where = internal friction angle
It is recommended that the ultimate (limiting) values of unit skin friction, fult, be considered, which are given in
Table G.4.3-1 API RP2A LRFD In FB-MultiPier analysis, the t-z curves are generated using piecewise linear
function based on the data given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.h Normalized t-z curve for API Sand

t
= mobilized skin friction
tmax = maximum unit skin capacity accordingly to Eqn: 12.5.F
z
= local pile deflection
12.5.1.4 Driven Pile Clay (API)

API Clay Model t-z Curve (Refer to Section G.4.2 and G.7.2 API RP2A LRFD)
For pipe piles in cohesive soils, the skin friction can be calculated by the equation.
Eqn: 12.5.H
where c = undrained shear strength of the soil in stress units
= a dimensionless factor, which is defined as
Eqn: 12.5.I
Eqn: 12.5.J
Eqn: 12.5.K
where p'o = effective overburden pressure in stress units
The data used in piecewise linear t-z curves of API clay are given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.i Normalized t-z curve for API Clay

t
tmax
z
D
=
=
=
=
mobilized skin friction

maximum unit skin friction capacity according to Eqn: 12.5.H
local pile deflection
diameter of pile
NOTE: In FB-MultiPier analysis, a ratio of residual stress to ultimate stress is set equal to 0.9
12.5.1.5 Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
The T-Z curves used for drilled and cast insitu piles/shafts are based on the recommendations found in Wang
and Reese (1993). In particular, the curves are based on the trend lines and are computed for each node. Trend
lines of stress transfer for axial end bearing and side resistance are provided for the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sand
Clay
Intermediate Geomaterial
User Defined
Sand
Valid for 30
Eqn: 12.5.L
Eqn: 12.5.M
Eqn: 12.5.N
valid for depths ranging from 5 to 87.5 ft (1.5 to 26.7 m)
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear t-z springs, with the shape presented in following
Figure: 12.5.j . The equations are provided but it should be referred that there is a considerable scatter around
the trend line.
Side friction mobilization (trendline)
for R 0.908333
Eqn: 12.5.O
for R > 0.908333

Eqn: 12.5.P
where
Eqn: 12.5.Q
Figure: 12.5.j Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft Side Friction in Sand
Clay
unless tests prove otherwise

Eqn: 12.5.R
From ground surface to depth of 5 ft (1.5 m) = 0

Bottom 1 diameter of drilled shaft or 1 stem diameter above top of bell = 0
All other points along the sides of the drilled shaft = 0.55
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear t-z springs, with the shape presented in following
Figure: 12.5.k . The equations are provided but it should be referred that there is a considerable scatter around
these trend lines.
Side friction mobilization (trendline)

fs/fsmax = 0.593157*R/0.12for R 0.12
fs/fsmax = R/(0.095155+0.892937*R)for R 0.74
fs/fsmax = 0.978929-0.115817*(R-0.74)for R 2.0

fs/fsmax = 0.833for R > 2.0
where
Eqn: 12.5.S
Figure: 12.5.k Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft Side Friction in Clay
The design of drilled shafts founded in intermediate Geomaterials is directly from FHWA's Load Transfer for
Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials .
Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following 3 Types:
1. (Type 1) Argillaceous geomaterials: Heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale, saprolite and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous Rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very Dense Granular Geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock, and glacial till.
l
Note:
Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials with an undrained strength, qu in the range of 0.5
to 5.0 Mpa.
Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100
Method 1 proposed by FHWA's Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials, for Type 1 and 2
materials has been coded herein.
l
Valid for IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < qu < 5.0 Mpa; Recovery > 50 %;
Appropriate for very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);
Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is artificially roughened and
part is smooth
Required Data:
l
Number of Layers
Type of surface (rough or smooth)
qu (Mpa)
modulus ritio (Em/Ei)
unit weight of soil
Mass Modulus - Em
Thickness
drilled shaft diameter
Youngs modulus of drilled shaft
unit weight of concrete in drilled shaft
pumping rate of concrete placement
slump of concrete in drilled shaft
Ei is the Youngs modulus for the impact sample.

Em can be taken as 115 qu for Type 2 IGMs and 250 qu for Type 1 IGMs for design purposes if modulus
measurements are not made, provided that soft seams and open fractures are not present. Load Transfer for
Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials, pp. 80
A range of typical Em values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.
Table: 12.5.A Estimation of Em/Ei based on RQD
RQD
Em/Ei
Em/Ei
(percent)
(closed joints)
(open joints)
100
1.00
0.60
70
0.70
0.10
50
0.15
0.10
20
0.05
0.05
Note: Values of Em/Ei for RQD values between those shown can be estimated by linear interpolation on RQD.
12.5.1.6 Custom T-Z
User can select the "Custom T-Z" curve option for applying user-defined T-Z curves to subsurface pile nodes that
User defined T-Z data
Z1 T1
Z2 T2
Z3 T3
... ...
Z10 T10
Where
Ziis the ith Z (axial pile deflection) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
Tiis the ith T (shear stress) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
12.5.2 Q-Z Curve for Tip Resistance

Q-Z curves for tip resistance are categorized for the following cases:
1. Driven Piles
2. Driven Pile Sand (API)
3. Driven Pile Clay (API)
4. Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
5. Custom Q-Z
12.5.2.1 Driven Piles

The nonlinear pile's tip spring, i.e. Q-Z curve for driven pile is shown in the following figure and given as (McVay
1989):
Eqn: 12.5.A
where Qf is the ultimate tip resistance (force), Gi and v are the initial shear modulus and Poisson's ratio of the soil
at the pile tip. r0 is again the radius of the pile, and Qb is the mobilized tip resistance.
Figure: 12.5.a Q-Z Curve for Driven Pile
12.5.2.2 Driven Pile Sand (API)

API Sand Model q-z Curve (Refer to Section G.4.3 and G.7.3 API RP2A LRFD)
The unit end bearing, in stress units, can be calculated by the equation
Eqn: 12.5.B
where p'o = effective overburden pressure, in stress units, at the pile tip
Nq = dimensionless bearing capacity factor, which is defined as
Eqn: 12.5.C
where ' = effective internal friction angle
Based on a total unit weight of soil, an effective unit weight, i.e.soil = soil water is calculated for p'o that is
subsequently used to compute the unit end bearing in Eqn: 12.5.B
It is recommended that the ultimate (limiting) values of unit end bearing qult be considered, which are given in
Table G.4.3-1 API RP2A LRFD.
The ultimate end bearing capacity, in force units, may be calculated by the equation
Eqn: 12.5.D
where A = sectional area at tip of pile and is calculated, based on pile end condition
Plugged a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity
Unplugged a cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity
The q-z curves are generated using piecewise linear function based on the data given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.b Normalized q-z curve for API Sand

Q
Qp
z
D
=
=
=
=
mobilized end bearing capacity

total end bearing capacity according to Eqn: 12.5.D
axial deflection of pile tip
diameter of pile
12.5.2.3 Driven Pile Clay (API)

API Clay Model q-z Curve (Refer to Section G.4.2 and G.7.3 API RP2A LRFD)
The unit end bearing of pipe pile founded in cohesive soil is given by
Eqn: 12.5.E
where c
undrained shear strength of the soil, in stress units, at the pile tip
The ultimate end bearing capacity is then calculated
Eqn: 12.5.F
where A = sectional area at the tip of pile, which is based on the pile end condition
Plugged a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity
Unplugged a cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity
In FB-MultiPier analysis, q-z curves of API clay are defined as a piecewise linear function based on the data
given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.c Normalized q-z curve for API Clay

Q = mobilized end bearing capacity
Qp = total end bearing capacity according to Eqn: 12.5.F
z = axial deflection of pile tip

D = diameter of pile
12.5.2.4 Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
The Q-Z curves used for drilled and cast insitu piles/shafts are based on the recommendations found in Wang
and Reese (1993). In particular, the curves are based on the trend lines and are computed for each node. Trend
lines of stress transfer for axial end bearing and side resistance are provided for the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sand
Clay
User Defined
Sand
Valid for NSPT > 10
if Bb > 50 in (1.27 m):
Eqn: 12.5.G
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear Q-z springs, with the shape presented in figure
shown below. The equation is provided but is should be referred that there is a considerable scatter around the
trend line.
End bearing mobilization (trendline)
Eqn: 12.5.H
Figure: 12.5.d Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft End Bearings in Sand
Clay
unless tests prove otherwise

Eqn: 12.5.I
Eqn: 12.5.J
where cub = average undrained shear strength of the clay (computed 1 to 2 diameters below the shaft)
for Bb > 75 in (1.90 m)
Eqn: 12.5.K
Eqn: 12.5.L
Eqn: 12.5.M
Immediate Settlements (trendline)

The reference curve is presented in the following Figure. The marks represent the values proposed by Wang and
Reese (1993) and the solid line is the adopted curve. It should be observed that a considerable scatter is present
around the curve.
Reference curve (trendline)
for R 6.5
Eqn: 12.5.N
for R > 6.5

Eqn: 12.5.O
Figure: 12.5.e Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft End Bearings in Clay
The design of drilled shafts founded in intermediate Geomaterials is directly from FHWA's Load Transfer for
Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials.
Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following 3 Types:

1. (Type 1) Argillaceous geomaterials: Heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale, saprolite and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous Rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very Dense Granular Geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock, and glacial till.
l
Note:
Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials with an undrained strength, qu in the range of 0.5 to
5.0 Mpa.
Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100
Method 1 proposed by FHWA's Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials, for Type 1 and 2
materials has been coded herein.
l
Valid for IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < qu < 5.0 Mpa; Recovery > 50 %;
Appropriate for very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);
Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is artificially roughened and
part is smooth
Required Data:
l
Number of Layers
Type of surface (rough or smooth)
qu (Mpa)
modulus ritio (Em/Ei)
, unit weight of soil
Mass Modulus - Em
Thickness
drilled shaft diameter
Youngs modulus of drilled shaft
unit weight of concrete in drilled shaft
pumping rate of concrete placement
slump of concrete in drilled shaft
Ei is the Youngs modulus for the impact sample.

Em can be taken as 115 qu for Type 2 IGMs and 250 qu for Type 1 IGMs for design purposes if modulus
measurements are not made, provided that soft seams and open fractures are not present. Load Transfer for
Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials, pp. 80
A range of typical Em values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.
Table: 12.5.A Estimation of Em/Ei based on RQD

RQD
Em/Ei
Em/Ei
(percent)
100
70
(closed joints)
1.00
0.70
(open joints)
0.60
0.10
50
20
0.15
0.05
0.10
0.05
Note: Values of Em/Ei for RQD values between those shown can be estimated by linear interpolation on RQD.
12.5.2.5 Custom Q-Z
User can select the "Custom Q-Z" curve option for applying user-defined Q-Z curves to subsurface pile nodes that
User defined Q-Z data
Z1 Q1
Z2 Q2
Z3 Q3
... ...
Z10 Q10
Where
Ziis the ith Z (axial deflection of pile tip) value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
Qiis the ith Q (end bearing) value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
12.6 Torsional Soil-Pile Interaction
The torsional stiffness of a pile embedded in soil is modeled using T- springs, where T is the torque applied to
the pile and is the angle of twist, in radians. The springs are located at the nodal points. T- springs can be
modeled as follows:
1. Hyperbolic Curve
2. Custom T-
12.6.1 Hyperbolic Curve
The non-linear T- behavior of the soil is modeled using an hyperbolic curve, with initial slope as a function of
the shear modulus G. The ultimate value is based on the ultimate shear stress at the contact pile/soil.
Figure: 12.6.a Hyperbolic representation of T- curve
For a length of pile L, the torque is given by
Eqn: 12.6.A
where:
r = radius of the pile
o
= shear stress along L
o
For a long rigid pile embedded in a soil with shear modulus G, Randolph (1981) deduced the expression for the
torque per unit length
Eqn: 12.6.B
This expression does not consider the pile tip stiffness. For a long pile the tip contribution may be considered
negligible.
Using an hyperbolic curve defined by
Eqn: 12.6.C
where the coefficients a and b are given by
Eqn: 12.6.D
Eqn: 12.6.E
The ultimate shear stress can be obtained with the same procedures as for axial skin friction. As for the initial
shear modulus, it should be determined from in-situ tests.
12.6.2 Custom T-
User can select the "Custom T-" curve option for applying user-defined T- curves to subsurface pile nodes that
User defined T- data
1 T1
2 T2
3 T3
... ...
10 T10
Where
iis the ith (pile rotation) value on the user specified T- curve.
Tiis the ith T (axial stress) value on the user specified T- curve.
12.7 Soil Resistance Due to Pile Rotation
Soil Resistance Due to Pile Rotation is only applicable to "Limestone (McVay) 2-3 Option" soil type. This option
is used for the program to calculate and apply rotational springs to the pile nodes in the ground. These springs
are based on the axial resistance of the piles (skin friction) as well as the rotation of the piles. It is particularly
important in soil layers where the piles can develop large values of skin friction.
Calculation of bending strains

At each location along the length of the pile, the total strain consists of an axial and a bending component. Of
interest is the bending strain, b at any given section of the shaft,
Eqn: 12.7.A
where: 1 and 2 are the values of the strain on the opposite sides of the shaft.
Figure: 12.7.a shows in detail how the bending strains are obtained from the measured strains.
Figure: 12.7.a Total, axial and bending strains on cross-section.
Soils Lateral Resistance P(F/L) Form Bending Moments and Skin Friction
The difference in the moment at two different elevations is caused by soils lateral (P force/length) and axial force
(T force/length) resistance at the soil-shaft interface. The contribution to moment in the case of the latter is a
function of shaft diameter, and the soils T-Z curve as well as the rotation of the shaft. Shown in the figure below
are the forces acting on a buried element of length dz.
Eqn: 12.7.B
Consequently, from lateral force equilibrium, Figure: 12.7.b , the soil lateral P (force/length) is found as
Eqn: 12.7.C
If the side shear, T ( Figure: 12.7.b ), is taken into account, then moment equilibrium results:
Eqn: 12.7.D
OR
Eqn: 12.7.E
Figure: 12.7.b Forces acting on a buried element of length dz.

where: M = moment on the cross-section
Ms = moment per unit shaft length from the side shear force, T
Evoking horizontal force equilibrium,
Eqn: 12.7.F
Substituting Eqn: 12.7.E into Eqn: 12.7.F , then the soil lateral resistance, P, is obtained:
Eqn: 12.7.G
Evident from Eqn: 12.7.G vs. Eqn: 12.7.C , the side shear on the buried element will act to shed load away from
the lateral resistance, P. The moment/unit length, Ms, of the side shear is obtained from the T-Z curve for the soil.
The value of T requires the displacement, Z, at a point on the shaft.
Moment Due to Side Shear, Ms

Lateral loading causes a rotation of the shaft at any given cross section. The shaft rotation is resisted through
skin friction, T, and lateral soil resistance, P, acting on the sides of the shaft. In the case of the unit skin friction, a
Moment/length resistance, Ms , may be computed at any cross-section. The value of Ms is a function of the unit
skin friction at the periphery of the shaft, which varies around the shafts circumference. To estimate the moment
due to side shear (Ms), the shaft cross section was divided into slices as shown in Figure: 12.7.c ,Ri is the
distance from the center of shaft to the center of slice i. For example R1 , is the distance from the center of the
shaft to the middle of slice 1.
Figure: 12.7.c Shaft cross-section divided into slices to calculate Ms .

The value of shear stress, , is a function of vertical displacement, Z , which is a function of the rotation, , and
i
i
the distance from the center of cross-section to the center of the slice, R . If Z is the average axial displacement
i
1
of slice 1 and (obtained from T-Z curve knowing Z ) and C1 the arc length of slice 1 then the side shear
1
1
force/unit length, T , acting on slice 1 is given by
1
Eqn: 12.7.H
The moment per unit shaft length about O, M , is found by multiplying T by the distance to the cross-section
s1
1
centroid, R , as
1
Eqn: 12.7.I
The total moment per unit length may be found by summing the moments acting on all the slices:
Eqn: 12.7.J
where: n = number of slices
13 Finite Element Theory

Following types of elements are available in FB-MultiPier:
1. Membrane Element
2. Plate Element
3. Flat Shell Element
4. Mindlin Theory
5. Generalized Stress and Strain
6. Special Element for FB-MultiPier
7. Mesh Correctness and Convergence
13.1 Membrane Element

The membrane element is a flat, constant thickness element. It can be triangular, rectangular or have curved
sides. The element can have configurations of three, four, six, eight or nine nodes. Whatever the shape or
number of nodes, the element has two translational DOF per node. These DOF must lie in the plane of the
element. The results from the element consist of two normal stresses and a shear stress in the plane of the
element, (see Figure: 13.1.a below). The stress results are given at each corner node in the element in FBMultiPier.
Figure: 13.1.a Membrane Stress Sign Convention

Note:
S1 and S2 represent in-plane normal stresses. Positive S1 (as shown in Figure: 13.1.a ) causes tension along
the local 1-axis in the membrane element . S1 and S21 represent in-plane shear stresses along the edges
perpendicular to the local 1- and 2-axis, respectively. Unit of S1 , S2 , and S12 is force per unit area, e.g., ksi.
The difference between element behavior is dictated by the choice of the number of nodes and hence the
number of DOF for the element. The three node triangle has linear shape functions and hence constant strain
and stress. This element is referred to as the constant strain triangle. The four node element has slightly better
response than the three node element. The six node triangle has quadratic shape functions and linear stress
and strain. The eight and nine node element has better response than the six node element. FB-MultiPier uses a
nine node version for the membrane (in-plane) stresses.
13.2 Plate Element

True plate elements do not include in-plane effects. In-plane effects are handled by membrane elements.
Similarly in a beam element the bending and axial effects are un-coupled. This is the same in two dimensions.
These two elements are commonly merged to get a complete in and out-of plane element referred to as a Flat
Shell Element. We will discuss a true plate element before discussing the flat shell elements used in FBMultiPier. To do this we must cover a small amount of theory.
There are two common versions of plate theory used in finite elements: Kirchoff and Mindlin. Kirchoff plate
bending theory is derived in a similar fashion to beam bending but includes bending in both directions. The
derivation assumes that the normal displacement, vertical displacement w, controls. In Kirchoff theory the
rotation, , in the plate is the derivative of w. This is the same as beam theory. This means that shear
deformations are ignored. In Mindlin theory, shear is included and the rotation is the sum of the derivative of w
and the shear angle. FB-MultiPier uses a Mindlin formulation.
The results from all plate elements consist of moments. Some plate elements also give the transverse shear, Q,
as a result. It is important to note that the moments and shear results are per unit length of plate. The following
figure ( Figure: 13.2.a ) gives the sign convention for moment and shear results.
Figure: 13.2.a Plate Bending Moment Sign Conventions

Note:
M1 represents flexural moment about the local Yp -axis where bending occurs. Positive M1 (as shown in Figure:
13.2.a ) causes tension at the top surface of the plate. S13 represents shear force acting out-of-plane along the
edges parallel to the local Zp -axis. Unit of M1 , M2 , and M12 is moment per unit length, e.g., in-kip/in. Unit of S13 ,
and S23 is force per unit length, e.g., kip/in.
Flat Plate elements can be found in three to nine node versions, just like the membrane elements (see Figure:
13.2.b below). The same concepts of shape function order are true for the plates as well as for the membrane.
Three node triangular plates model constant moments exactly. Nine node elements model linear moments with
some second order effects. It is important to note that in plates, moments are equivalent to stress and
curvature is equivalent to strain, in terms of modeling. In other words, we need more elements in a high
moment gradient area for plates.
Figure: 13.2.b Common Flat Plate Configurations
13.3 Flat Shell Elements

Shell elements combine the effects of plate bending and in-plane (membrane) effects. There exist formulations
for both flat and curved shell elements. The curved element formulation is a much more complicated derivation.
The flat shell however can be considered to be merely the addition of the membrane and flat plate elements (see
Figure: 13.3.a below). This is the most common form of shell element found.
Figure: 13.3.a Flat Shell Element as a Combination of Membrane and Plate Element
The flat shell element can be used to model structures where both bending and stretching effects need to be
considered. Many small flat shell elements can be used to form curved surfaces. The modeling of bridge decks,
wide flange beams and curved shell structures are three such structures where flat shell elements are commonly
used.
Figure: 13.3.b Common Applications of Flat Shell Elements

FB-MULTIPIER, uses a nine node, Mindlin flat shell element for the pile cap.
13.4 Mindlin Theory

Mindlin theory includes shear deformations. As a result, the normal to the surface does not remain normal.
Likewise, the derivative of the shape function for the normal displacement w(x,y) is not equal to the slope. In
Mindlin theory the slope of the surface is the sum of the derivative of w(x,y) and the shear angle change. Figure:
13.4.a below shows the relationship between the displacement w(x,y), shear angle and the derivative of the
displacement.
Figure: 13.4.a Mindlin Plate Theory

This sum of angles to get the total rotation implies that different shape functions can be used for the
displacement w and the rotations (x , y). This is the most common formulation found in flat plate and shell
elements used in current computer programs. This means there will not be rotational continuity across elements
boundaries (since shear exists). Hence the elements are considered to be C0 elements. The following figure (
Figure: 13.4.b ) shows this lack of continuity across elements.
Figure: 13.4.b Lack of Rotational Continuity for Mindlin Plate Theory

In either case, the pure plate bending element has three DOF per node; the normal displacement w and the out
of plane rotations (x , y). These are shown in Figure: 13.4.c below.
Figure: 13.4.c Plate Degrees of Freedom
13.5 Generalized Stress and Strain

In plate theory, most derivations refer to the equations for generalized stress and strain. This is because the
equations for plate behavior can be converted to the form:
Eqn: 13.5.A
Where E* is a modified constitutive matrix. Notice that this is just like the equation for stress and strain except we
have moments and curvature. In plates, the displacement unknowns are the normal displacement and the two
rotations. Following the analogy of generalized stress, moments are equivalent to stress and curvature is
equivalent to strain. This means when using these elements in modeling, we treat the moment gradient like we
would stress to determine the level of shape function and number of elements required for an accurate analysis.
In addition, the difference in moment at a common node between two elements indicates the adequateness of
the mesh.
13.6 Special Element for FB-MultiPier

Neither the membrane nor the plate element offer normal rotational stiffness. This means that pile torsion would
not be transmitted to the pile cap using a standard element formulation. To account for this torsional force
transfer, special normal rotational stiffness terms have been incorporated into the shell element formulation. The
stiffness is calculated based on an equivalent beam formulation using the tributary area of the pier cap over each
pile. This is an approximate method offering good transfer for thick pile caps.
Using the above formulation, the Zp rotational degree of freedom becomes active for corner nodes of pile cap
shell elements. Note, however, that the Zp rotation degree of freedom is not active for the mid-side and center
nodes of pile cap shell elements.
The second enhancement is the use of an eight point gauss integration scheme for the element. The eight point
scheme is a reduced integration scheme offering good shear integration while avoiding locking problems. The
eight point scheme is tuned for the pile problem so that zero energy modes are removed while still retaining
good element flexibility.
13.7 Mesh Correctness and Convergence

The accuracy of a finite element solution depends on the number of elements and the order of the shape
functions. As the number of elements increase, the piece-wise displacement approximation approaches any true
displacement field. Recall that two linear elements provided a better response than a single linear element. Also,
a single quadratic element performs even better.
The stress results also follow the same pattern. More elements provide better stress results. However, since we
only guarantee the continuity of the displacements, the stresses are discontinuous. This means that at a node
where two elements meet, the stresses do not match. However, as the number of elements increase, the stresses
between elements get closer. As an example, below is a plot of the stress along the top of the cantilever beam.
The results are plotted for the four - four node membranes, the two nine node membranes and the 40 - four node
membranes.
Figure: 13.7.a Stress Plot for Cantilever Beam
Notice that for the four - four node elements, the difference between the elements is 28%. This large percentage
error indicates a poor mesh (or not enough elements). Looking at the two - nine node model we see a closer
difference. Here the error is 14.0%. This indicates that the mesh is marginal but probably sufficient. Finally we
look at the 40 element model. Here the error is much better and only 3%. The 40 element model is very good.
The difference in element stresses at a node is an important measure of model correctness. In general, we
do not have the exact displacements in order to check our model. Hence, the stress check is necessary to
verify convergence of our model. If the difference in stresses between elements is small the finite element
mesh is good.
14 Nonlinear Behavior
A discrete element formulation is used to model the nonlinear behavior of piles, pier columns, and pier cap
members in FB-MultiPier. The discrete element accounts for both constitutive (i.e., material) and kinematic (i.e.,
geometric) nonlinear behavior. The nonlinear material behavior is modeled by integrating stress-strain curves
over the cross-section that is applicable to each element. The nonlinear geometric behavior is modeled using Pdelta moments (the product of the axial force and relative displacements that occur across a given element).
Additionally, because pile, pier column, and pier cap members are discretized into a number of sub-elements, Py moments (the product of axial force and bending-induced internal displacements within a given element) are
also accounted for in the discrete element formulation.
1. Discrete Element Model

2. Stress-Strain Curves
3. Confined Concrete Model
4. Bi-axial Interaction Diagram
5. Nonlinear Solution Strategies
14.1 Discrete Element Model

The discrete element model (Mitchell 1973 and Andrade 1994) can be represented as a mechanical model as
shown in Figure: 14.1.a The center bar can both twist and extend but is otherwise rigid. The center bar is
connected by two universal joints to two rigid end blocks. The universal joints permit bending at the quarter
points about the y and z axes. Discrete deformational angle changes 1, 2, 3, 4 occur corresponding to
the bending moments M2, M1, M4, M3, respectively. A discrete axial shortening corresponds to the axial thrust T
and the torsional angle 5 corresponds to the torsional moment in the center bar M5.
Figure: 14.1.a Discrete Element Model
Salient aspects of the discrete element model are discussed in the links provided below.
1. Element Deformation Relations

2. Integration of Stresses
3. Element End Forces
4. Element Stiffness
14.1.1 Element Deformation Relations

In Figure: 14.1.a , w1 - w3 and w7 - w9 represent displacements in the x, y and z directions at the left and right
ends respectively, w4 and w10 represent axial twists (twists about the x -axis) at the left and right ends,
respectively, and w5-w6 and w11- w12 represent the angles at the left and right end blocks about the x and z
axes, respectively. Based on a small displacement geometric analysis:
Eqn: 14.1.A
Eqn: 14.1.B
The elongation of the center section of the element is calculated as follows:
Eqn: 14.1.C
The angle changes for the center section about the z and y-axes are then defined below:
Eqn: 14.1.D
Eqn: 14.1.E
The discretized vertical and horizontal angle changes at the two universal joints are then:
;
Eqn: 14.1.F
;
Eqn: 14.1.G
and the twist in the center part of the element is defined as:
Eqn: 14.1.H
Thus, the internal deformations of the discrete element model are uniquely defined for any combination of
element end displacements.
The curvature for small displacements at the left and right universal joints about the y and the z axes are defined
as follow:
At the left joint,
;
Eqn: 14.1.I
At the right joint,
;
Eqn: 14.1.J
The axial strain at the center of the section is given by:
Eqn: 14.1.K
14.1.2 Integration of Stresses

Consider a beam subjected to both bending and axial loads. It is assumed that the strains vary linearly over the
area of the cross-section. This assumption enables the strain components due to bending about the z and yaxes, and the axial strain, to be separated or combined using superposition. Examples of these three
components are represented separately in Figure: 14.1.b -(a-c) and combined in Figure: 14.1.b -d. Also shown
in Figure: 14.1.b -d is a differential force, dFi, acting on a differential area, dAi. Finally Figure: 14.1.b -e
represents the stress-strain relationship for the material.
Figure: 14.1.b Linear Strain Distribution over Square Cross-Section

Then
Eqn: 14.1.L
And, to satisfy equilibrium:
Eqn: 14.1.M
Eqn: 14.1.N
Eqn: 14.1.O
The relationship for strain at any point in the cross-section is:
Eqn: 14.1.P
The stress at any location in the section is found using the appropriate material stress-strain curve described
subsequently.
Numerical integration of equations is done using Gaussian Quadrature. To use the method of Gaussian
Quadrature, the function being integrated must be evaluated at those points specified by the position factors.
These values are then multiplied by the appropriate weighting factors and the products accumulated. Figure:
14.1.c shows a square section with 25 integration points (a 5x5 mesh). The number of defaults integration points
for square pile is set at 49 (a 7 by 7 mesh). For circular sections, the section is divided into circular sections (12
radial divisions and 5 circumferential divisions as shown in Figure: 14.1.d ). The sections are integrated at the
centroid of each sector using weighting factors of 1.0. The stress in all steel bars is evaluated at the centroid and
a weighting factor of 1 is used for each bar.
Figure: 14.1.c Section Integration Divisions - Cross Section of square pile showing integration points
Figure: 14.1.d Section Integration Divisions - Circular pile cross section showing steel rebars
When a circular void is encountered in a square section, the force is first computed on the un-voided section and
then the force that would be acting on the voided circular area is computed and subtracted from the force
computed for the non-void section. Circular sections with voids are divided into sectors omitting the voided
portion.
Even for nonlinear material analysis, the torsional moment M5 is assumed to be a linear function of the angle of
twist, 5 , and the torsional stiffness GJ, where J is the torsional constant and G is the shear modulus as shown
next
Eqn: 14.1.Q
14.1.3 Element End Forces

From equilibrium of the center bar (see Figure: 14.1.a ):
Eqn: 14.1.R
Eqn: 14.1.S
And from equilibrium of the end bars:
;
Eqn: 14.1.T
;
Eqn: 14.1.U
;
Eqn: 14.1.V
;
Eqn: 14.1.W
where f1- f3 and f7 - f9 are the acting end forces, and f4 - f6 and f10 - f 12 are the end moments.
14.1.4 Element Stiffness

Using the standard definition, the stiffness of an element having n degrees of freedom (d.o.f.) is a square matrix
[K] of order n in which Kij is the force necessary in the i-th d.o.f. to produce a unit deflection of the j-th d.o.f. The
secant stiffness computed is the stiffness that the members would have if each of the integration points had the
secant stiffness defined by dividing the present stress by the present strain as shown in the following figure.
Figure: 14.1.e Secant Stiffness for Nonlinear Stress-Strain

During the iteration process the element stiffness matrix is reevaluated in each new deformed position. For each
iteration, initially the secant stiffness is stored at all integration points within an element. Then on 12 subsequent
passes a unit displacement is applied to each element degree of freedom in turn keeping all other
displacements as zero and the forces corresponding to that unit displacement are calculated by integrating the
stresses over the cross-section of the element as described earlier. The previously stored secant moduli at each
of the Gaussian integration points are used in this integration of stresses. The element end forces thus computed
would be the nth column of the stiffness matrix corresponding to a case where the nth degree of freedom has a
unit displacement imposed, all other displacements being held to zero.
14.2 Stress-Strain Curves

The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the default values described
below.
1. Concrete
2. Mild Steel
3. High Strength Prestressing Steels
4. Adjustment for Prestressing
14.2.1 Concrete
The figure below shows the default stress-strain curve used by FB-MultiPier in determining internal demands for
concrete portions of member sections in nonlinear analyses. The function values are dependent upon f'c and Ec,
as input by the user. Note that this stress-strain model incorporates tension stiffening, and is applicable for
unconfined normal weight concrete with compressive strengths of approximately 41 MPa (6,000 psi) or less
(MacGregor and Wight 2005).
The tensile portion of the curve is assumed as linear up to a stress of fr. Piece-wise linear tension softening is
modeled out to a tensile strain of 0.002, and no tensile stress contribution is modeled for tensile strains greater
than 0.002. The tension softening portion of the stress-strain curve is intended to account for the uncracked
portions of in-tension concrete sections, which are capable of carrying some non-zero level of tensile stress. The
value of fr is based on the fixed value of r shown in the figure below, and the modulus of elasticity Ec input by the
user. For English units this will give a value of fr of 7.5 f'c.
The compression portion of the concrete curve is highly non-linear, and is defined by the Modified Hognestad
parabola. For compressive strains bounded between the strain at peak compressive stress (0 ) and the ultimate
compressive strain (cu ), a linear descending curve segment is employed. For any members that generate
compressive strain levels exceeding cu , the stress level is estimated using linear extrapolation. For instances
where such large compressive strain levels are reached (or for other instances where the default curve may not
be applicable), users are recommended to supply a user-defined stress-strain curve. Additionally, confined
concrete model is available.
Figure: 14.2.a Default Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete

References:
MacGregor, J. G., Wight, J. K. (2005). Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design 4th Edition, Prentice Hall,
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
14.2.2 Mild Steel

For mild steel reinforcement the stress-strain relationship is assumed to be elastic-plastic and similar in both
tension and compression. A yield strain is computed based on the yield stress, fy and the modulus of elasticity
y
input E ,
s
Eqn: 14.2.A
The default relations for the mild steel stress-strain curve are given by,
Eqn: 14.2.B
Eqn: 14.2.C
Eqn: 14.2.D
The default stress-strain curve generated for steel with f' =60 ksi and E =29600 ksi is shown in the figure below.
y
c
Figure: 14.2.b Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve for F = 60 ksi.

y
14.2.3 High Strength Prestressing Steels

The figure in mild steel shows reinforcing as rebars. However, the user may select high strength reinforcing
strands as well as rebars. The stress-strain curves for prestressing steels generally do not have a definite yield
point as illustrated by the curve for fsu = 270 ksi in the figure below. The most common values of fsu used in
prestressing practice are fsu = 250 ksi and 270 ksi. For these two input values when using standard (English)
Units, the curves defined by the PCI design handbook (PCI 1992) will be used. For other strengths or when using
nonstandard units, the default curves will be obtained by using non-dimensional equations based on curve fitting
the two cited curves. These curves are not recommended for use for values of fsu that fall outside of the range of
standard values.
Figure: 14.2.c Prestressing Steel Stress-strain Curve for fsu = 270 ksi.
14.2.4 Adjustment for Prestressing

When piles are prestressed prior to installation, there are stresses and strains existing at the time of installation
due to the prestressing. The program shifts the origin of the stress-strain curve for the steel by the amount of the
prestressing stress in the steel and the corresponding steel strain. Also, the program shifts the origin of the
concrete stress-strain curve by the amount of compression in the concrete and the corresponding concrete
strain. It is assumed that the prestressing is symmetrically placed and thus only a constant compressive stress is
developed in the concrete due to the prestressing.
14.3 Confined Concrete Model

Confinement options available in the FB-MultiPier GUI were introduced in "Circular Section Properties".
Introduction
Effective confinement has been shown to considerably enhance the compressive strength and ductility of
concrete. The strength and ductility enhancement from confinement of the concrete will of course cause
corresponding increases in the axial and flexural strength and ductility of reinforced concrete columns or piles.
The confining effect of the column or pile may be accomplished through the use of circular hoops, spiral
reinforcement, and an external steel jacket.
In the case of internal confinement i.e. spirals or circular hoops, the cover concrete will be unconfined and will
become ineffective after the maximum compressive strain of the concrete has been attained, but the confined
core will continue to carry stress at high strains. The compressive stress-strain response used for the core and
cover concrete are those obtained by the Mander model (Mander and Priestly, 1988) for confined and
unconfined concrete, respectively.
In the case of an external jacket, the jacket will provide confinement to the cover concrete and the inner concrete
will be doubly confined by the jacket and the internal confinement due to the circular hoops or spirals. Although
the steel area of the shell (casing) is not considered for direct bending or axial strength the confining effects to
the concrete are. The compressive stress-strain response used for the core and cover concrete are those
obtained by the modified Mander model. The Mander model was modified for the confining effects of the external
shell by Priestly et al (1991).
14.3.1 Mander Models for Confined Concrete

Both the Mander and modified Mander models use the following equation for the longitudinal compressive stress
of confined concrete:
Eqn: 14.3.A
where
f
cc
is the compressive strength of the of confined concrete
x is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.B
The expression suggested for
cc
increases linearly with f
cc
and is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.C
where
f
co
co
is the unconfined compressive stress of the concrete

is the unconfined concrete compressive strain, adopted as 0.002
The parameter r is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.D
Figure: 14.3.a Confining Effect on Compressive Response of Concrete (Priestly et al 1991)

E
is the tangent modulus of elasticity for unconfined concrete and is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.E
E
sec
is the secant modulus for confined concrete, defined with respect to f
cc
and
cc
and is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.F
For f , the confined concrete strength, Mander used the five-parameter failure criterion proposed by William
cc
and Warnke and the tri-axial test data of Schickert and Winkler. In the case of circular columns confined by
circular hoops or spirals, the confined concrete compressive stress has been shown to be:
Eqn: 14.3.G
where
f is effective confining pressure, and may be obtained from the equilibrium of internal forces acting on the
l
dissected sections shown in Figure: 14.3.b
For the cover concrete in columns, assuming uniform yield of the jacket, the equilibrium of forces requires:
Eqn: 14.3.H
where
f
is the lateral confining pressure acting on the cover concrete

lj
D is the outside diameter of the steel jacket
j
t is the thickness of the steel jacket
j
f is the yield strength of the steel jacket
yj
Figure: 14.3.b Confining Action of Steel Jacket and Internal Hoops [4]
The confining ratio for the steel jacket is defined as:
Eqn: 14.3.I
Substituting into Eqn: 14.3.H we obtain
Eqn: 14.3.J
By using f = f in Eqn: 14.3.G , the compressive strength of the cover concrete confined by the steel jacket
l
lj
can be determined.
Additional confinement is provided to the concrete core by the transverse reinforcement. The additional lateral
pressure, f , may also be determined from the equilibrium of forces. Assuming uniform yield of the transverse
lh
steel yields the following equation:
Eqn: 14.3.K
where
d
is the diameter of the concrete core defined along the center line of the confining steel
s is the vertical spacing of the transverse steel

f
is the yield strength of the transverse reinforcement
yh
A is the cross-sectional area of the transverse steel
sh
The confinement effectiveness coefficient, k , is defined as:
e
Eqn: 14.3.L
where
A is the area of an effectively confined concrete core
e
Eqn: 14.3.M
where
A
cc
is the core area of the section

is the ratio of the area of longitudinal reinforcement to the confined area of the concrete core of the section
A , i.e.:
c
Eqn: 14.3.N
where
A is the total longitudinal steel area .
s
By assuming an arching action between circular hoops in the form of a second -degree parabola with an initial
tangent slope of 45E, the confinement effectiveness ratio has been shown to be:
Eqn: 14.3.O
where
s is the clear distance between the hoop.
Similarly, the confinement effectiveness coefficient for a circular spiral has been shown to be:
Eqn: 14.3.P
By introducing as the ratio of the volume of transverse confining steel to the volume of confined concrete i.e.:
s
Eqn: 14.3.Q
Figure: 14.3.c Definition of Confinement Effectiveness Coefficient [4]
Eqn: 14.3.R
The lateral confining pressure due to transverse steel in Eqn: 14.3.J may be written as:
Eqn: 14.3.S
Thus using f =f + f in Eqn: 14.3.G will allow the enhanced compressive strength of the concrete core to be
l
lj
lh
determined.
Scott et al (1989) proposed an expression for the ultimate compressive strain, , which is given by:
cu
Eqn: 14.3.T
where
is the volumetric ratio of steel to concrete core
f is the yield strength of the transverse steel

yh
14.3.2 Unconfined Concrete

For the concrete outside the inner core when a steel shell is not used , the unconfined condition may be
simulated by setting the lateral confinement pressure equal to zero, i.e f = 0. The following simplifications can
l
be made to the prior equations:
Eqn: 14.3.U
Eqn: 14.3.V
Eqn: 14.3.W
Eqn: 14.3.X
It is assumed that the stress-strain curve for unconfined concrete follows Eqn: 14.3.Y during the earlier stages of
loading up to 2 . For compressive strains larger than 2 , the strains are assumed to decrease linearly with
co
co
strains up to the spalling strain . A value of 0.005 has been adopted for . The longitudinal compressive
sp
sp
stress for unconfined concrete may be written as:
For <= 2 ,
c
co
Eqn: 14.3.Y
For 2
co
< <= ,
c
sp
Eqn: 14.3.Z
For >
c sp
Eqn: 14.3.AA
14.3.3 Reinforcement
To avoid congestion of reinforcement, earlier design practices tended to use large diameter bars, up to #14 or
#18, however, such practice may lead to potential bond problems in cases where the column main reinforcement
were lapped at insufficient length with starter bars in the plastic hinge regions. Consequently, such columns are
characterized by very rapid flexural strength degradation under the design seismic loads. The current Caltrans
(1981) approach has been to avoid lap splicing of the main reinforcement in the potential plastic hinge region of
bridge columns. The analytical model developed here assumes full yield of the main reinforcement including
strain hardening.
14.3.4 Longitudinal Reinforcement
The monotonic uniaxial stress-strain curve of a typical reinforcing steel is shown by an elastic region, a yield
plateau, a strain hardening region, followed by a falling branch after peak stress up to the strain at which fracture
occurs. A typical stress-strain curve for the reinforcing steel is shown in Figure: 14.3.d .
The monotonic uniaxial stress strain curve for reinforcing steel is defined by the following equations:
For the elastic range, i.e. <=
s
y
Eqn: 14.3.AB
Where
is the axial strain in the reinforcing steel
s
f is the stress in the reinforcing steel
s
E is the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcing steel
s
For the yield plateau, i.e. < < ,
y s sh
Eqn: 14.3.AC
where
is the axial strain at the on-set of strain hardening

sh
f is the yield stress of the reinforcing steel
y
Figure: 14.3.d Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve [4]
For the strain-hardening range, i.e. <= <

sh
s su
Eqn: 14.3.AD
where
is the ultimate strain in the reinforcing steel
su
f
is the ultimate stress in the reinforcing steel and
su
Eqn: 14.3.AE
Eqn: 14.3.AF
It has been shown by Mizra and MacGregor (1979) that the ratio of ultimate to yield strength was f /f = 1.55.
su y
The steel model adopted for the program assumes a modulus of elasticity of 29000 ksi and a slightly lower
ultimate to yield strength ratio of 1.50. The other mechanical properties assumed for the stress strain model are:
For all grades of steel,
Eqn: 14.3.AG
Eqn: 14.3.AH
where
f is equal to 40 for ksi units. This would be converted to any other consistent set of units
yl
The above equations are non-dimensional, allowing the model to be used with any grade steel. They were
obtained by interpolating from the values given by Priestly for 40 and 60 ksi steel.
It should be noted that the tangent modulus at the onset of strain hardening may be obtained by taking the
derivative of Eqn: 14.3.AD with respect to steel strain, and operated at the strain-hardening strain, :
s
sh
Eqn: 14.3.AI
14.3.5 Transverse Reinforcement

Closely spaced transverse reinforcement in regions of severe inelastic actions will maintain the integrity of the
concrete core and increase the rotational capacity of the column. Maintaining the integrity of the core also allows
higher shear forces to be resisted by the concrete. The potential shear failure plane must intersect a large
quantity of transverse reinforcement, which increases the shear resistance. Lateral stability of the longitudinal
reinforcement is improved by the presence of the closely spaced hoop or spiral. The hoops or spiral acts as antibuckling ties to allow full compression yield of the mild steel to be developed. The integrity of the core and mild
steel ensures the vertical load carrying capacity of the column after a severe earthquake.
The effective use of the transverse reinforcement also requires careful detailing of spirals or hoops. Current
usage may entail welding at the lap splices of the spiral or hoop, or bending back of these bars into the concrete
core for anchorage in order to develop full yield capacity. Design practice prefers the use of since fewer
anchorages are required for spirals when compared to hoops. The transverse reinforcement in earlier design
practice, however was often anchored with lap splices in the plastic hinge regions where serious spalling of the
cover concrete is expected. The loss of cover concrete may initiate unwinding of the spirals or hoops and
renders the transverse reinforcement ineffective. The model used here assumes full development of the
transverse steel strength at the ultimate condition.
14.3.6 Steel Jacket

The role of the steel jacket for a column is the same as that of the transverse reinforcement. The jacket prevents
the spalling of cover concrete and allows the development o large compressive strains in the mild steel without
buckling. The shear strength of the encased region is also enhanced.
Although the commercially available structural steel for steel jackets has yield strengths ranging from 36 ksi to 50
ksi or higher, the level of confining pressure required does not generally require yield strength greater than 36
ksi. Suitable steel for the jacket is the A36 hot-rolled, which has relatively low carbon content (from 0.25 to
0.29%). The low carbon content provides a good welding property, which is important for on-site welding of the
steel jacket.
Grout
It is assumed that the steel jacket is fully bonded to the reinforced concrete column to facilitate composite action.
It is further assumed that the strength of the grout is the same as that of the concrete column.
Voids in members
While voids are allowed in the general analysis procedures used in FB-MultiPier, the reduction in the beneficial
effects of confinement due to voids in columns and piles are not considered in the Mander and modified Mander
models used FB-MultiPier.
Examples
Several example columns are analyzed and comparisons are made between the experimental results, the
results obtained from FB-MultiPier program with those produced by the COLRET computer program.
In the analysis performed with FB-MultiPier, to achieve the large post yield displacements on the flat portion of
the P-D curves, a spring was placed at the tip of the column.
The force plotted is the force absorbed by the column attached to the spring. This is a technique called
displacement control.
14.3.7 Full-Scale Column without Steel Casing

The example used in the comparison was a full scale (60" diameter) flexure column tested by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (Stone and Cheok, 1989). The column represents the current ductile
design for bridge columns. The design details for the column are described in Table below. The test column was
subjected to an axial compression force of 1000 kips and a lateral cyclic displacement of increasing amplitudes
until failure of the column.
Table: 14.3.A Design details for Full-Scale Flexure Column
Diameter D
Height L
cover to main bar
Concrete Strength fco
Longitudinal Steel
60"
30'
4"
5.2 ksi
25 #14
Yield Strength fy
Transverse Steel
68.9 ksi
#5 Spiral at 3.5"
Yield Strength fyh

Axial Force
71.5 ksi
1000 kips
Figure: 14.3.e Force Deformation Curve for Full Scale Column
The force deformation curve for the full-scale column is given in the figure above. As can be seen from the figure,
the data from FB-MultiPier program is generally close to both the COLRET values and the experimental data. For
the majority of the curve the FB-MultiPier values are less than the COLRET values. Also, it is noted that the initial
stiffness of the response is higher from the CORLET than obtained from the FB-MultiPier Analysis and the
measured response.
14.3.8 Half Scale Column With Steel Retrofitting Jacket

The second example analyzed for comparison purposes was a test column with a 24" diameter. It is retrofitted
with a steel sleeve that has a length of 48 inches. The design details for the column are shown in the table
below.
Table: 14.3.B Design details for Column With Steel Jacket
Diameter D
Height L
Cover to Main Bar
Concrete Strength fco
Longitudinal Steel
24"
12'
4"
5.2 ksi
26 #6
Yield Strength fy
Transverse Steel
45.7 ksi
#2 hoops at 5 in.
Yield Strength fyh

Length of Jacket
Thickness of Jacket
Yield strength of Jacket
Axial Force
51.0 ksi
48"
.188"
47 ksi
400 kips
Figure: 14.3.f Force Deformation Curve for Jacketed Column
The force-deformation curve for the jacketed column is given in the figure above. Looking at the results, we can
see that FB-MultiPier provides a close estimation of the experimental and COLRET curves until the post yield
region of curve where we see a reduction in the lateral load capacity predicted by FB-MultiPier in comparison to
the experimental and COLRET values. It is also noted that the CORLET program show slightly greater strengths
than that for the test.
14.3.9 Conclusions
A model for the prediction of the non-linear response of circular concrete piles with confinement has been
presented. More details on the model are available in Stone and Cheok (1989) .
This model has been incorporated into the FB-MultiPier computer program that is used specifically for analyzing
bridge pier structures consisting of pier columns and cap supported on piles or shafts. This allows the user of the
program to model the behavior of concrete piles confined by hoops, spirals and/or a steel jacket subjected to a
broad variety of loadings.
In the comparative studies conducted, the FB-MultiPier results show generally less of an increase in strength and
ductility than those given by the COLRET program. This is due to the following differences between the FBMultiPier program and the CORLET program.
First, Eqn: 14.3.T is used to compute the maximum concrete strain, gives less strain than the procedure
cu
using COLRET. COLRET uses a more complex procedure that was only documented for grade 40 and grade 60
steel. The FB-MultiPier program is written to handle a wide variety of inputs and thus it used the more
conservative Eqn: 14.3.T which is applicable for any grade of steel.
Second, the COLRET program assumes the entire area contained within a diameter ds is confined in integrating
the stresses over the column area, whereas FB-MultiPier conservatively uses only the effectively confined area
of the core.
Finally, in the case of an external steel jacket, FB-MultiPier neglects the longitudinal stiffness of the jacket, when
using the confined model and the COLRET program takes this stiffness into account.
These differences tend to give a somewhat conservative solution, which is probably best for a general purpose
program to be used for a wide variety of applications. The program can of course be modified to accommodate
more detailed models in the future.
14.4 Interaction Diagrams

Assumptions and Features for the Biaxial Interaction Diagram
The strength routines compute section strength under axial force and internal bending moments about the two
principle axes for a prestressed or non-prestressed reinforced concrete and steel cross sections which can be
used for both columns or piles. The analysis routine computes the section moments, M and M , and axial
nz
ny
force, Pn and multiplies these by the appropriate strength reduction () factors which are discussed later for steel
and concrete.
It is assumed that the user inputs the appropriate factored loads (service-level loads times load factors). The
analysis routines then compute the factored moments, M and M , and axial force, Pu , acting at each section.
uz
uy
The strength routines indicate whether the section is adequate or not adequate. This information can be
displayed graphically on an interaction diagram of moments for a given level of axial force or found in the output
as a single factor, called a Demand/Capacity ratio, DC. The details of how the DC is calculated will be discussed
later. If the DC is less than or equal to one, this indicates the section is safe for the applied factored moments and
axial force.
The interaction diagram routines do not consider any long column or stability effects that are important for
slender members. However, if the nonlinear analysis option is selected for the piles and the structure, then the
slenderness effects through the P and Py moments are considered in the computation of the factored axial force
and moments as discussed earlier. Thus the direct use of the interaction diagrams using the linear analysis
option for the piles and structure could be very unsafe for slender members. The option to use the interaction
diagrams and linear analysis of the piles and structure is provided for preliminary design phases and must not
be used for a final design.
Also it should be noted that the nonlinear analysis procedures while very thorough may not reflect all of the
criteria required for design of slender structures in appropriate codes. A list of factors that may affect the final
design that are not considered in the analysis are as follow:
1) Creep in concrete.
2) Initial imperfections or out of straightness of members.
3) Residual stresses.
4) A separate analysis phi factor to account for the possibility of undersized members.
All of the factors could potentially increase the defections and thus the P and Py moments above those given by
the nonlinear analysis routines and should be accounted for by the designer as appropriate.
The routine operates by computing numerous horizontal slices of the P , M , M (nominal strength) interaction
n nx ny
surface. The result is a series of M , M interaction curves for various magnitudes of axial load, P . Next, each
nx ny
n
interaction curve is represented in the form.
Eqn: 14.4.A
The moments M and M represent the nominal moment strength at axial load, P , for uni-axial bending about
0z
0y
n
the z and y axes respectively. The exponents, and are computed in by the least squares method. They
enable the above expression to fit the computed interaction curve, and vary with axial load. The actual DC is
computed, by interpolation for the axial force P / using the stored values of axial force and exponents, and .
u
The program then computes the parameter, DC, as; the ratio of the length of the vector for the actual forces (in 3d space M , M and P) divided by the length of the vector with the same direction as the actual results but
ux uy
with that vector touching the 3-D failure surface. This has the effect of assuming that the moments and axial load
will increase proportionally until failure.
Note that the routines handle square, rectangular or circular sections with prestressed or non-prestressed steel
and H-piles that themselves may be encased in concrete. The capabilities and limitations of sections were
discussed in detail earlier in the User Guide. The interaction diagrams for all sections that contain concrete are
handled in a similar manner and will be discussed next. Then the case of the H-pile section without concrete will
be discussed last.
Sections with reinforced or prestressed concrete.
The routine assumes a planar strain distribution across the section. The criterion for section failure is that the
concrete reaches the crushing strain cu. ( = -0.003 in/in) at one corner of the section. This conservatively
cu
ignores any effect of the ties or spiral reinforcement on the compressive strength or crushing strain of the
concrete.
All tensile stresses in the concrete are neglected. This includes both tension in uncracked regions and tension
stiffening in cracked regions.
AASHTO doesnt permit the design of a perfectly axially loaded column. A certain minimum eccentricity of load
must always be included. This is accomplished by limiting the applied factored axial force, P , to a factor times
u
P , where P is the nominal capacity of the section in an axially loaded column. For a tied column, this
0
0
maximum load is 0.8P , while for a column with spiral reinforcement the maximum load is 0.85P . When a
0
0
factored load, Pu , larger than these limits is input to the routine, the routine responds that the section is
inadequate.
The routine also includes a maximum axial tension for a section based on all the mild steel bars attaining the
yield stress fy for mild steel and all the prestressing strands attaining the ultimate stress fsu . If the factored Pu
exceeds this maximum tension force the routine responds that the section is inadequate.
Solutions for and for approximately 30 points between the maximum compressive and tensile forces are
attempted. The values of axial force are obtained for strains in the extreme bar farthest away from the corner of
the section where limiting (tensile and compressive) reinforcement (mild and prestressed) strains are taken in
accordance with those values given in Sec. 5.7.2.1 of the AASHTO LRFD code
The strength reduction factor, , is determined according to the unified requirements for prestressed and
nonprestressed concrete of AASHTO - LRFD. In these requirements, the magnitude of is based on the net
tensile strain occurring in the most heavily strained steel bar or strand when the nominal strength of the section is
attained (when the concrete crushes). The net tensile strain is that portion of the steel strain associated with the
development of tensile strain in the concrete adjacent to the steel bar or strand. For nonprestressed steel, the net
tensile strain is exactly the total strain in the steel. For prestressed steel, the net tensile strain is the total strain in
the steel minus the sum of the effective prestress strain in the steel and the effective prestress strain in the
concrete adjacent to the steel. The latter term can be thought of as the decompression strain.
The factor can be obtained for net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel in nonprestressed reinforcement
by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression controlled reinforcement strain limit ) to 0.90 (at tension
cl
controlled strain limit ). Whereas the factor for prestressed reinforcement can be obtained for net tensile
tl
strain in extreme steel by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression controlled strain limit ) to 1.00 (at
cl
tension controlled strain limit ). (Refer to Sec. 5.5.4.2.1 in the AASHTO LRFD code).
tl
H-piles embedded in concrete are treated as if fully bonded to the concrete and are thus treated just as if they
were an equivalent group of a large number of small rectangular reinforcing bars.
H-piles without Concrete
H-Piles not embedded in concrete have their interaction diagrams computed in a similar manner to the sections
with concrete except that steel does not have a small limiting compression strain due to its ductility. Thus the 30
points defining the range of axial forces are obtained by locating the neutral axis in successive positions across
the depth of the section and the steel is assume fully yielded on both sides of the neutral axis. Solutions are
attempted for and to represent the interaction curves for 30 Points with varying axial load from a peak in
tension to compression.
Steel Only Sections
The interaction diagram of steel sections such as H-pile and pipe pile sections is based on development of full
plastic section. Steel code requirements must be checked for design purposes.
14.4.1 Demand/Capacity Ratio for Cross Sections

FB-MultiPier calculates the demand/capacity ratio for each cross section used in the analysis. The
Demand/Capacity ratio as well as the interaction diagram are only calculated when full cross sections are
specified (either linear with full cross section or nonlinear). The Demand/Capacity ratio is an estimate of the
percentage of the cross sections' capacity that has been reached for that particular loading state. The
Demand/Capacity ratio is calculated as the length of the vector for the current load state divided by the length of
the vector when it pierces the failure surface.
Figure: 14.4.a Biaxial-Moment Interaction Diagram calculations for Demand/Capacity Ratio

The actual result vector is the current set of forces that the cross section is experiencing due to the applied load.
The surface piercing vector length assumes that the applied loads will be increased proportionally until the cross
section fails. This assumption implies that the result state (P,M ,M ) will also increase proportionally until the
x y
cross section fails. As a result, the surface piercing point is found by extending the length of the result vector
along its known direction until it pierces the failure surface.
Typically, a cross section Demand/Capacity ratio is calculated by taking the M -M diagram for a constant axial
x y
load P. This is equivalent to the shaded slice of the 3-D failure surface. Then the Demand\Capacity ratio is
calculated as the (M ,M ) vector length divided by the point at which the extended vector will touch the failure
x y
curve. This assumes that the axial load will remain constant. While conservative, it is not very realistic. In
indeterminate structures, all forces interact and in order for the moments to increase, the axial load must also
increase. For pile groups, this is caused by the frame action of the group which changes the axial load in the
piles due to a changed lateral load.
14.5 Nonlinear Solution Strategies

A program such as FB-MULTIPIER, which takes nonlinearity into account can be used to provide some very
good models of physical behavior. However, the use of nonlinear analysis programs implies that the user
understand the nonlinear models very thoroughly. The nonlinear models are described in the program
documentation and it is assumed that the user is familiar with these. However, the user should also understand
that the use of the nonlinear characteristics of the program may cause the program to be unable to converge on
a solution for a particular loading and that in some cases described later, nonlinear programs may converge on
a mathematical solution that isnt physically reasonable.
A novice user may then be tempted to say that one should stick to linear programs and avoid such difficulty.
However, the counter argument can be made that a linear analysis will almost always find a solution even if the
user puts in a totally unreasonable loading.
For the sake of discussion, assume that a relatively simple structure is being modeled by FB-MULTIPIER,
perhaps even a single pile cap with one or two piles with some vertical load applied which is held constant and
then a lateral load is applied gradually. Several different scenarios of lateral load versus lateral displacement are
possible as shown in the following figure.
Figure: 14.5.a Different Types of Load Displacement Response

The most desirable nonlinear response of the structure is shown as case 1. The load displacement response
starts to soften at about point a or b, reaches a peak load at c and has an essentially flat top that show very good
ductility. This is primarily due to yielding of the structure at several locations in the piles possibly combined with
similar action in some of the supporting soil layers. However, if the user should put in a load above that
corresponding to point c, it is obvious that a solution will not be found. Likewise if a load near c is tried, it is
possible that the solution will be very slow to converge and may fail if a large number of iterations are not
allowed.
This failure to converge can be avoided by doing a preliminary linear pile analysis and then checking the
strength ratios of the pile to see if they are all less than 1. However, the capacities of the soils springs should be
considered as well. It should also be noted that solutions may be found where the pile strength ratios are greater
than 1.0. This is primarily because the analysis program does not use capacity reduction factors as are used in
generating the strength ratios.
The response indicated by case 2 is not as good as shown in case 1. The difference is that some element in the
soil or the pile has a very limited ductility and causes the collapse of the structure before sufficient ductility is
obtained. As examples, a section of the pile could be under reinforced and fail when cracking or a section could
be over reinforced and fail when the concrete fails in compression without adequate yielding of the steel.
Numerous other causes are possible such as premature shear failure and the designer must insure that these
failure modes do not prevent adequate ductile response, since they are not considered in the analysis. As in the
type 1 response the user may encounter difficulties when trying to apply loads near the level of the capacity.
Suppose the designer wants to demonstrate that the behavior is indeed type 1 versus type 2. A push over
analysis could be done and this requires a displacement-controlled solution. A large spring would be placed at
the node where the lateral load is applied and then a series of large loads would be applied. The spring would
take the larger amount of the load but by properly choosing the spring stiffness and load, the displacements
could be controlled and the load absorbed by the structure could be found and the pushover results plotted.
In rare instances the response of a structure may resemble that shown for case 3. Here at a load near d the curve
flattens and may even decrease. However, for increasingly large displacements the load may start to rise again.
It will be very difficult to obtain converged solutions for loads near d. However, if a much larger load is applied a
solution may be found on the curve well above d. This type of behavior generally occurs when some type of local
failure occurs. If the structure has sufficient ductility it may then be able to find a new path to distribute the forces
and carry some additional load, albeit with a considerable reduction in stiffness. An example of this type of
behavior is when the gravity loading is small and because of a large lateral load a pull out occurs on one of the
piles. The question then arises, should the design based on the post pull out behavior be used?
Clearly the use of nonlinear analysis programs do not remove the responsibility of the designer to monitor the
local responses of the structure. Fortunately the program outputs detailed information about the behavior of the
soil and pile that can and must be reviewed before a structure can be said to be adequate.
Finally, case 4 in which the structure appears to move against the loads must be considered. For very slender
structures with very large gravity loading, the stiffness of the structure will go negative when the elastic buckling
loading of the structure is exceeded. Again this is a rare case and would almost never happen for a designer
evaluating a real structure. However, someone trying the program out with arbitrary dimensions and loads might
create such a condition and then be disturbed that the program is giving obvious unreasonable results. A linear
analysis program would of course produce even more possibly dangerous results; it would indicate a positive
displacement, which would then not give any indication that something was wrong with the structure.
15 Dynamic Behavior
The dynamic behavior used in FB-MultiPier is explained in detail in the following topics:
1. Analysis Type
2. Time Stepping Parameters
3. Dynamic Relaxation
4. Damping
5. Global Mass
6. Time Functions
7. Dynamic Soil Properties
8. Structural Material Behavior
15.1 Dynamic Analysis Types

FB-MultiPier contains transient dynamic (time-history) analysis features for analyzing structural response under
time-varying loads. Transient dynamic analysis enables structural response to be determined when inertial
and/or damping effects are considered to be significant. Correspondingly, the equation to be solved in dynamic
analysis contains mass and damping terms, in addition to those of stiffness and external load :
Eqn: 15.1.A
where
is the mass matrix;
velocity vector;
vector.
is the nodal acceleration vector;
is the stiffness matrix;
is the damping matrix;
is the nodal displacement vector; and,
is the nodal
is the external force
For a given structural system, the solution to Eqn: 15.1.A is necessary to determine structural response to
external loading
. However, for systems that possess kinematic nonlinearity; constitutive nonlinearity;
many degrees-of-freedom (DOF); or any combination thereof, the obtainment of a direct analytical solution to
Eqn: 1.1.A is not feasible. In place of a direct analytical solution, FB-MultiPier employs implicit time integration
algorithms to obtain a numerical solution of Eqn: 15.1.A . Specifically, in FB-MultiPier, both the Newmark and
Wilson-Theta methods are available for finding the numerical solution to Eqn: 1.1.A at user-specified, discrete
time increments (i.e., time-steps, t). See Fernandez (1999) for details regarding the theory and implementation
of these methods in FB-MultiPier.
Determination of time-step t:
An important property of the implicit dynamic time-integration methods in FB-MultiPier is that these methods are
implemented so as to be unconditionally stable: for a given structural system, the numerical solution will not
diverge solely due to the selection of a very large time-step, t, for the analysis. It is important to note, however,
that other factors (e.g., loading a nonlinear system beyond the system capacity) can still result in a lack of
convergence for a given analysis. Furthermore, numerical stability in the implemented time-integration methods
does not guarantee a numerically accurate solution. The following expression is recommended in Tedesco et al.
(1999) for determining an appropriate time-step for a given implicit time-integration analysis, with consideration
of accuracy:
Eqn: 15.1.B
where
(sec) is the smallest period of interest in the analysis.
Transient loading
Transient loading can be specified as an arbitrary set of nodal load-histories,
, in FB-MultiPier. Such
loading is readily handled by the time-integration methods implemented in FB-MultiPier, given that a proper
time-step t has been selected.
15.2 Structural Material Behavior
The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the default values described
below.
1.
Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)
2.
Concrete (Hysteretic)
3.
Steel Reinforcement (Hysteretic - Bilinear)
4.
Steel Reinforcement (Hysteretic - Strain Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)
15.2.1 Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)
Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided into fibers for the
purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal forces. The default constitutive behavior for
concrete portions of cross-sections in nonlinear dynamic analyses is that of nonlinear elastic behavior.
Alternatively stated, the default approach in mapping concrete strains to stresses is such that no deviation occurs
from the backbone curve. While this approach increases the likelihood of convergence for a model, no
hysteresis occurs within concrete fibers.
Stress-strain curve description
The default stress-strain curves for concrete portions of structural members are described here (for unconfined
concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined concrete sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits userdefined input of stress-strain curves for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the
user-defined stress-strain curve is treated as the backbone curve (but with no deviation from the backbone
curve).
Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.
15.2.2 Concrete (Hysteretic)
Overview
purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal forces. Hysteretic behavior can be incorporated
into the constitutive behavior of concrete portions of cross-sections in nonlinear dynamic analyses. Alternatively
stated, an option is available to introduce behaviors such as unloading, reloading, and softening of concrete
fibers while conducting time-history analyses. Incorporating hysteresis increases model fidelity with respect to
that of physical systems containing concrete members. However, the incorporation of concrete hysteresis
substantially constrains the circumstances under which convergence can be reached. Specifically, because FBMultiPier utilizes a tangent stiffness formulation for time-history analysis, convergence is not likely to be reached
in the event that a given system is force-driven AND, for said system, several fibers within any one frame element
cross-section develop strains corresponding to (or exceeding) a state of material softening. Note that if a
displacement-driven process is modeled, then it is possible to reach convergence despite reaching a state of
material softening among the computed response data.
The default stress-strain backbone curves for concrete portions of structural members are described here (for
unconfined concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined concrete sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier
permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this
latter case, the user-defined stress-strain curve is treated as the backbone curve. The algorithm governing
deviations from the backbone stress-strain curve is adopted from Yassin (1994) .
Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)
The concrete hysteresis option may be activated by navigating to the Advanced dialog, located on the
Dynamics page. From within the Advanced dialog, check the Concrete Hysteresis option. Note that this
option, when activated, applies to all nonlinear frame elements in the model.
15.2.3 Steel (Hysteretic - Bilinear)
Overview
purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal forces. The default constitutive behavior for
steel portions of cross-sections in nonlinear dynamic analyses is that of a bilinear approach to modeling
hysteresis. Alternatively stated, the default approach in mapping steel strains to stresses is such that deviations
from the input stress-strain curve (i.e., the backbone curve) adopt a slope that is equal to the initial slope of the
backbone curve. While this approach mimics increases the likelihood of convergence for a model, no hysteresis
occurs for concrete fibers.
The default stress-strain curves for longitudinal reinforcement within structural members are described here (for
mild steel bars) and here (for prestressed tendons). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of
stress-strain curves for steel portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-defined stressstrain curve is treated as the backbone curve (where all deviations adhere to the initial tangent stiffness of the
backbone curve).
15.2.4 Steel (Hysteretic-Strain-Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)
Overview
purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal forces. The option to incorporate relatively
more advanced hysteresis behavior into steel portions of cross-sections is available for nonlinear dynamic
analyses. Specifically, in contrast to the (default) Steel-Bilinear hysteresis modeling approach, phenomena such
as strain-hardening and the Bauschinger effect can be included among the simulated steel unloading, reloading,
and material evolution behaviors.
The stress-strain backbone curves for steel portions of structural members are described in Filippou et al.
(1983) , where only the Youngs modulus and yield stress need to be specified. Alternatively, FB-MultiPier
permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves for steel portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter
case, parameters that satisfy the curve given in Filippou et al. (1983) are derived from the user-defined stressstrain curve.
Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)
This option may be activated by navigating to the Advanced dialog, located on the Dynamics page. From
within the Advanced dialog, check the Steel Hysteresis (Strain-Hardening and Bauschinger Effect) option.
Note that this option, when activated, applies to all nonlinear frame elements in the model.
15.3 Time Stepping Parameters

Three time step integration techniques are available in FB-MultiPier:
1.
Average Acceleration (Newmark);
2.
Linear Acceleration (Newmark) ; and,
3.
Wilson-Theta.
See Tedesco et al. (1999) for details regarding each technique. For a selected time step integration, the time
step size (sec) and the number of time-steps must additionally be input.
15.4 Dynamic Relaxation

When conducting a static analysis, the application of permanent loading,
, is typically trivial. During static
analysis, the structure achieves static equilibrium between the product of stiffness
response to the application of
and displacements
in
. However, to analyze the structure dynamically, careful consideration of
permanent loads,
, is necessary.
Dynamically, an abrupt application of self weight loading is unrealistic, and furthermore, can lead to undesired
dynamic response. In Figure: 15.4.a , an example of improper dynamic self-weight load (w) application is given
to demonstrate that instantaneous application of permanent loads can lead to exaggerated structural response.
Inertial forces caused by motion of the single-degree of freedom (SDF) mass push the system far beyond the
static displacement, ust. By applying the load w abruptly, the maximum dynamic displacement, umax, is 100%
larger than that predicted by a static analysis. Additionally, the excessive displacement leads to amplified
internal forces,
, and potentially, unwarranted inelastic deformations.
Figure: 15.4.a Dynamic amplification due to instantaneous application of load (w).

When a bridge structure is loaded in this manner (i.e., through instantaneous application of
oscillations result in amplified internal forces,
loads,
), vertical
, in the pier columns and piles. Furthermore, if transient
, are additionally applied, vertical oscillations due to the suddenly applied
can exaggerate the
dynamic structural response. The erratic pier behavior caused by instantaneous application of
renders any
assessment of structural responsesuch as determining maximum internal forces or load-moment interaction
unreliable.
The dynamic relaxation feature is used in FB-MultiPier to facilitate staged loading in transient dynamic analysis
by initializing the dynamic system such that it is in equilibrium with an arbitrary set of permanent, or static, loads
(e.g., gravity loads),
initialized as:
. When dynamic relaxation is employed, the equation of motion (recall Eqn: 15.1.A ) is
Eqn: 15.4.A
where
is the initial nodal acceleration vector;
matrix obtained from a static pre-analysis;
is the initial nodal velocity vector;
is the stiffness
is the nodal displacement vector obtained from the same static
pre-analysis; and,
is the initial transient load vector. It is important to note that
to be constant throughout the analysis.
and
are assumed
As expressed in Eqn: 15.4.A and shown in Figure: 15.4.b , for dynamic relaxation, structural response to
is initialized by means of a static pre-analysis. Meaning, two distinct analyses are conductedone static analysis
(with only
applied), and one dynamic analysis, where both
the structure reaches equilibrium, the stiffness matrix
and
are applied. Statically, once
and displacement vector
are stored. These
quantities are then used to define the initial state for a time-domain analysis. In the dynamic analysis,
is
applied instantaneously. However, because the dynamic terms

respectively, the abrupt application of
that
and
are initialized to
and
does not cause undesired vertical oscillations. It is important to note
remains constant throughout the dynamic analysis, even though updated
, and
quantities are present in the equation of motion after the first numerical solution iteration.
Figure: 15.4.b Dynamic analysis using stiffness
and displacements
from static pre-analysis to
properly initialize structural response to
Examples of dynamic relaxation:

The emphasis of the following discussion is placed on the utility of employing the dynamic relaxation feature as a
means of introducing self-weight loading into a dynamic structural analysis. Selected demonstration cases are
presented to illustrate the effectiveness of dynamic relaxation in mitigating structural response amplification
(when such amplifications should not be present). Models of a single pile, single pier, and partial bridge
configuration are used for the demonstration cases (shown in the figures below). The models were analyzed
(with only self-weightgravity and buoyancyloading) using three methods: static analysis, dynamic analysis
with instantaneous gravity loading, and dynamic analysis with static pre-analysis.
In the following, displacements at pertinent locations within each structure are compared for the three analysis
types. Specifically, for the single pile model, vertical displacements are compared at the pile head; for the
pier/bridge models, vertical displacements are compared at the pile cap center node of pier 1.
Single square pile:
Displacements for the 30x 30 prestressed pile were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.c Single square pile displacements.

Single pier:
Displacements for the single pier model were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.d Single pier displacements

Three-pier partial bridge:
Displacements for the three-pier partial bridge model were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.e Three-pier model displacements (pier 1 is the rearmost pier).

For each of the above cases, employment of dynamic relaxation also produces system axial forces that are inline with those obtained statically. This is in contrast, however to those obtained from a non-restart dynamic
analysis, as shown in Figure: 15.4.f .
Figure: 15.4.f Total soil reaction (at analysis termination time) per model and analysis type.
15.5 Damping
The following forms of damping can be defined:

1.Global Damping : The user can specify global damping through the Dynamic Page
For time step integration dynamic analysis:
Rayleigh damping coefficients are inputted.
The Rayleigh damping mass (i.e., alpha) and stiffness (i.e., beta) coefficients can be supplied for each of:
a. Pier structural members;

b. Pile structural members; and,
c. Soil Springs
See Tedesco et al. (1999). for details regarding calculation of the Rayleigh damping coefficients.
For modal response analysis:
Damping in proportion to critical damping is input. Damping can be incorporated into the system by supplying
the damping ratio.
where the damping ratio (between 0.0 and 1.0) is the fraction of critical damping for the fundamental vibration
mode of the system.
2.Concentrated dampers. These dampers are applied using the Mass/Damper Page.
3.Hysteretic damping. This form of damping is available when gap modeling is enabled for the lateral soil
response as well as for nonlinear pile and pier material behavior. Refer to "Dynamic Soil Properties" for more
details.
15.6 Global Mass

Consistent Mass (distributed) mass is used in FB-MultiPier.
15.7 Time Functions

For a given time step integration analysis, one of two different types of load-time functions can be utilized:
1. Applied Load (i.e., load vs time); or,
2. Ground acceleration (i.e. acceleration vs. time).
For the Ground acceleration loading option, the acceleration through time is specified in relation to g (e.g., 9.81
m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2 ). A scale factor, applied to g, is additionally input for the Ground acceleration loading
option. As a result, the acceleration for a given time (t) is prescribed as:
Acceleration(t) = (Scale Factor)*(g)*(Time Function Ordinate)
For response spectrum analysis spectral acceleration (i.e. acceleration vs. frequency) is utilized.
When the ground acceleration option is specified, only one load function can be defined and is automatically
applied to the entire model.
Note: For models utilizing the English unit system, and for instances where the RX, RY, or RZ degrees of
freedom are activated, then the units of the Load Function for these degrees of freedom is kip-in/sec.
15.8 Dynamic Soil Properties

1. Cycles
Cycles defines the number of loading cycles needed to reduce the soil strength by 50%.
The number of loading cycles is dependent upon the soil type and system natural frequencies. For details, see
the figures from "Sudip Basack. 2007".
2. Load rate
This effect occurs with an increase in the apparent soil (axial or lateral) resistance caused by rapid rates of
loading that occur in most extreme events, which is approximated as:
Eqn: 15.8.A
where,
pi = instantaneous soil resistance,
pc = resistance considering only cyclic loading,
tr = actual rate of loading (hz)
ts = corresponding rate of loading for standard slow cyclic loading (typically 0.01 to 0.1 hz)
f2 = soil factor
sands = 0.01 - 0.03, silts = 0.02 - 0.07, clays = 0.02 - 0.12, calcareous = 0.01 - 0.03
3. Shear Wave Velocity
Shear Wave velocity is used in the calculation of "Radiation Damping".
4. Degradation Soil Factor:
The soil degradation factor is used to scale soil p-y curves to mimic degraded soil behavior. Soil degradation
factors can typically range from 0.5 to 0.75.
5. Soil Damping Factor
The Soil Damping Factor is used to directly impose damping behavior into subsurface nodes. At the end of any
time step numbering two or greater, the global damping matrix entries corresponding to degrees of freedom of
subsurface nodes are updated by:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cataloging the soil reaction forces and moments.

Scaling the cataloged soil reactions by the soil damping factor.
Cataloging the change in the Step B. Products between the current time step and the previous time step.
Updating the corresponding entries of the global damping matrix using the quantities obtained from Step C.
6. Soil Gap
Users can incorporate soil gapping into dynamic analyses. Refer to Chapter 9 of "Consolazio et al. 2006" for
details about how this feature incorporates hysterisis into the soil behavior.
Cyclic degradation can be activated on the "Soil Page". During analysis, cyclic degradation is carried out
usings:
Eqn: 15.8.B
where,
pc = soil resistance for the current cycle of loading,
pp = value of the resistance corresponding to the present value of deflection, i.e. y of p-y curve, on the previous
cycle of loading,
pd = fully degraded value of p at the present value of y specified by the user in py-curve
c1 = soil degradation parameter
.
Eqn: 15.8.C
where,
n50 = number of cycles that would be required to degrade the soil by 50%.
Radiation Damping:
Radiation damping of embedded nodes is utilized within the FB-MultiPier engine when global damping is active
(by checking the Damping checkbox on the "Dynamics Page"), but the mass and stiffness (Rayleigh) damping
coefficients for the Soil are both defined as 0.0. Note that radiation damping is only imposed on horizontal
translations using:
C = 4d( / GF)SW
Eqn: 15.8.D
where,
d = Effective diameter of the pile section.
= Unit weight of the soil.
GF = Gravity factor= g (Scale Factor); g = 9.81 m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2 ; Scale Factor = user input in the
Dynamic Page.
SW = Shear wave velocity of soil.
16 Equivalent Stiffness Formulation

1. Equivalent Stiffness Generation
2. Converting FB-MultiPier Coordinates to a Standard Coordinate System
16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation

FB-MultiPier can be used to calculate system stiffness at a node of interest for pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and
pile bent models. This feature stiffness feature is typically used to estimate the collective, nonlinear stiffness of
the foundation structure including the piles, the pile cap, and soil. The equivalent stiffness is reported at a single
point and therefore it is a 6x6 matrix. The user can select any point (node) within the pile, pile-and-cap, single
pier, or pile bent model for which the equivalent stiffness matrix is of interest, and the matrix terms will be
automatically calculated for each load case.
The equivalent stiffness at a node is calculated as follows:
1.
The model (pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, or pile bent) is analyzed based on the applied loading.
2.
After the solution is obtained for the applied loading, the program calculates the flexibility matrix of the
structure at the particular equilibrium state, following general principles. To do that the program internally
applies unit forces at the selected node of interest. The unit forces are applied successively in all six
possible directions (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz).
3.
The displacements from each solution at the selected node comprise the columns of the flexibility matrix
(e.g., the displacements from the solution under the application of the Fx unit load comprise the first
column of the flexibility matrix).
4.
After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse, which constitutes the
equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.
5.
The program reports both the flexibility and equivalent stiffness matrices.
The calculated stiffness (or flexibility) matrix is calculated after the equilibrium state of the structure is obtained.
This is necessary since models generally contain nonlinear elements (including the soil springs). Therefore, the
snapshot in time (i.e., the equilibrium state) at which the stiffness is calculated is very important.
If the program was not following the particular sequence (not obtaining the equilibrium solution prior to
calculating the equivalent stiffness), then the calculation of the equivalent system stiffness would be incorrect
since it would be obtained using information for a state of the structure other than the loading-induced
equilibrium state.
The stiffness can be thought of as being the tangent stiffness (instead of secant) for the simple reason that it is
calculated for a particular instance in time (equilibrium state).
Given below is a step by step guide to obtain a stiffness matrix at any nodes selected in pile, pile and cap, single
pier, and pile bent models.
Step 1: Select new problem type and click on pile and cap model. This will open a default pile and cap model in
FB-MultiPier (See Figure: 16.1.a )
Figure: 16.1.a Selecting New Problem Type.

Step 2: Click on the stiffness node in Stiffness options Panel on Analysis Page (See Figure: 16.1.b )
Figure: 16.1.b Clicking the stiffness node option

Step 3: Select a node in the structure (e.g., node 15) from the 3D View (See Figure: 16.1.c ).
Figure: 16.1.c Selecting Node 15 from 3D edit window

Step 4: Run the analysis and check the output file for the stiffness matrix (See Figure: 16.1.d ).
Figure: 16.1.d Selecting Node 15 from 3D edit window

In contrast to the relatively more generalized equivalent stiffness procedure discussed above for single pile, pileand-cap, single pier, and pile bent models, when the Stiffness pile-and-cap model type is employed, the
program only permits loading to be applied to the center of the pile cap. Further, in association with use of the
Stiffness feature, the equivalent stiffness is calculated at a special stiffness node located at the center of the
pile cap, and only for a single load case. It is therefore imperative, when the Stiffness model type is utilized, that
the engineer makes sure that the resultant of the loads from the superstructure (bridge pier) passes through the
center of the pile cap.
16.2 Converting FB-MultiPier Coordinates to a Standard Coordinate System
The following explanation shows how to convert a 6x6 stiffness matrix from the FB-MultiPier global coordinate
system to a standard coordinate system defined below.
Figure: 16.2.a FB-MultiPier Coordinate System
Figure: 16.2.b Standard Coordinate System
A 3x3 transformation matrix (T) is first defined to show how the two coordinate systems are related.
Which can be stated as [d] = [T][D]

This shows that x maps to X, y maps to Z, and z maps to Y.
The same transformation matrix [T] is then used to transform the stiffness matrix from the FB-MultiPier coordinate
system to the standard 3D coordinate system as follows.
Eqn: 16.2.A
This requires 2 matrix multiplications to obtain the transformed stiffness matrix. This can be easily done using
either Excel or MathCad.
As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the following.
Note: Both the locations and signs change for some of the stiffness terms.
Example
The FB-MultiPier stiffness matrix is given by
Then the stiffness matrix in the standard coordinate system would be.
To transform the 6x6 stiffness matrix generated by FB-MultiPier from the 2D x-z coordinates system to a
standard 2D X-Y coordinate system.
Figure: 16.2.c FB-MultiPier Coordinate System
Figure: 16.2.d Standard Coordinate System
The following transformation is used to transform the stiffness matrix from the FB-MultiPier coordinate system to
the standard 2D coordinate system as follows.
Eqn: 16.2.B
As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the following.
17 Engine Input Useres Guide

1. Engine Input Overview
2. Global Headers
3. Pier Specific Headers
17.1 Engine Input Overview
The engine input parameters are divided into two categories. The Global headers category describes control
data for the entire model. The Pier Specific headers category describes data that is specific to a particular pier in
the model.
Pier specific data is separated in the input file by a special pier header as follows:
__PIER#x
Where
xPier number
17.2 Global Headers

1. Problem Data
2. Print Control
3. General Control
4. Multiple Pier Substructure Information
5. Superstructure Information
6. User Defined Bearing Connection
7. Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors
8. Bridge Spring Toggle
9. Pushover
10. PreLoad
11. Combination (AASHTO)
12. Modify Load Factors
13. Dynamic Control Parameters
14. Dynamic Step be Step Integration
15. Spectrum Analysis
16. Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions
17. Span Concentrated Nodal Loads
18. Span Thermal Data
19. Span Thermal Load Case
20. One Pier Two Span (OPTS)
21. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Spring
22. Span Mass

23. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
17.2.1 Problem Data

PROBLEM
Problem Title
Units
Client
Project Name
Project Manager
Date
Completed By
Description
The first two lines* are reserved for user information - TITLE, DATE, JOB NUMBER, .... etc. For instance, the
second line usually serves as a reminder to the user of the units that were used to create the input file. The
above lines are always required.
*Note: a comment line can be added anywhere in the input file by simply placing a C in column 1 of the line.
17.2.2 Print Control
The following two lines specify the data to be printed to the output file. These lines are always required.
PRINT
L=L1 M=M1 D=D1 O=O1 S=S1 P=P1 T=T1 F=F1 C=C1 B=B1 J=J1 H=H1 I=I1 R=R1 N=N1 X=X1 G=G1 A=A1
Z=Z1 E=E1 K=K1 Q=Q1 V=V1 W=W1
Any of the values: L1,M1,D1... etc. can be either 0 or 1. Setting a value to 1 enables its printing. Setting the value
to 0 turns off the printing of that data block. The default is =0 (NO print). Only the options desired (=1) are
required. A SUMMARY OUTPUT TABLE WILL ALWAYS BE PRINTED.
Where
L1is the flag for printing of the Pile and Structural coordinates.
M1is the flag for printing the pier material properties.
D1is the flag for printing the pile displacement.
O1is the flag for the out of balance forces.
S1is the flag for the soil response forces.
P1is the flag for the pile element forces.
T1is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap displacement.
F1is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap force output.
C1is the flag for the pile cap stress/moment output.
B1is the flag for the bridge simulation spring force output.
J1 is the flag for the Bride Span Element Displacement.
H1 is the flag for the Bridge element forces.
I1is the flag for printing the output of the interaction diagram.
R1is the flag for printing section stress-strain data.
N1is the flag for printing missing pile information.
X1is the flag for XML data printing. This is used in conjunction with the Model Data Report Generator for data
extraction.
G1 is the flag for the Pile Material Properties
A1 is the flag for the Soil data per layer
Z1is the dynamics printing option.
E1 is the flag for the Soil data per pile node;
K1 is the flag for the soil graph per pile node
0 = print displacement, velocity, and acceleration results to a binary file
1 = print displacement, velocity, and acceleration results to an ASCII file
Q1is the flag for the printing span properties.
V1 is the flag for the to Stop Analysis after Eigenvectors are printed.
W1 is the flag for printing span temperature input data and loading.
17.2.3 General Control
The following lines specify the control parameters for the FB-MULTIPIER program. There are four lines of input
for the general control section. These lines are always required.
CONTROL line 1
NUMLC U=U1 D=DESIGN S=S1 V=VER N=NPLNOD Z=RSOIL E=DYTPE H=DYRELAX P=PRELOAD
R=NPUSH S=STIFF K=NSTIF F=PROTL=RIGSTIFF Y=TRANSSTIFF B=RIGMOD G=TRANSMOD A=TORSION
W=SPANTEMPERATURE line 2
Where
NUMLCis the number of load cases (INTEGER)
U1= 0 is mixed for English units (ld-f, kips, inches, ft)
= 1 is for SI units (kilonewtons and meters)
= 2 is for metric (kilonewtons and millimeters)
DESIGN is the flag for the preliminary design option(currently limited to off, or '0')
S1= 0 for no stiffness creation
= 1 for stiffness creation
VER=Version for English Units
=0 is for English units are Kip & Inches.
=1 is for metric units of newtons and meters.
=2 is for metric units of newtons and millimeters.
NPLNOD= number of nodes per pile
RSOIL is the flag for the rotated soil option (not currently available in GUI)
=0 do not use rotated soil option
=1 use rotated soil option
DYTYPE is the flag for Dynamic Analysis Type (which is selected on the Dynamics Page)
=0 Time Step Integration
=1 Modal Response
DYRELAX is the flag for Dynamic Relaxation (which is selected on the Dynamics Page)
=0 do not apply dynamic relaxation
=1 apply dynamic relaxation
PRELOADis the preload option
=0 for no preload
=1 for preload
NPUSHis the pushover option
=0 for normal analysis
=1 for pushover analysis
STIFF is the stiffness creation option
=0 no stiffness creation
=1 stiffness creation - one column, or (foundation stiffness option and modal analysis)
=2 stiffness creation - with multiple columns (modal analysis)
NSTIFis the type of stiffness.
= 0 secant stiffness (default).
= 1 tangent stiffness. (required for preload and time step dynamics, optional for a static analysis)
PROTis the soil resistance due to pile rotation about the 2 and 3 axis
= 0 do not include soil resistance
= 1 include soil resistance (default)
RIGSTIFF is the flag for Rigid Link Stiffness (not currently available in GUI)
TRANSSTIFF is the flag for Transfer Beam Stiffness (not currently available in GUI)
RIGMOD is the flag for Rigid Link Modulus (not currently available in GUI)
TRANSMOD is the flag for Transfer Beam Modulus (not currently available in GUI)
TORSION is the flag for Torsion PG(not currently available in GUI)
SPANTEMPERATURE is the flag to indicate whether or not span temperature loading is utilized, and if so, the
scope of activity.
= -1 is for use when temperature loading is utilized while in AASHTO analysis mode.
= 0 is for when span temperature loading is not utilized.
= 1 is for when span temperature loading is utilized in non-AASHTO analyses.
NUMLC is the number of different load cases for analysis within a single input file. Each load case is a separate
analysis of the same structure with a different set of loads. It is intended to reduce the number of input files that
need to be created in order to analyze a bridge pier structure. An input of 0 will execute the data check mode.
This halts the execution of FB-MultiPier after all the structure data has been generated and writes to the plot
database files for viewing with post processor. The latter is useful for data checking.
U1 identifies the standard FDOT English or metric pile sections.
S1 identifies that the analysis is to create an equivalent foundation stiffness. There can be no structure, only a
cap. All six loads must be given (three forces and three moments). These will be applied at the center of the pile
cap.
S=IFLEX T=ITIP, TSTIF P=NLOPT F=PHI PHITENSION PHI FLEXURE line 3
Where
IFLEXcontrols how the soil is to be modeled (INTEGER)
=0 user supplied P-multipliers must be given
=1 all user supplied P-multipliers are set to 1 internally in FB-MULTIPIER
=2 pile restraint only occurs through tip springs (i.e. no soil); soil information may be supplied, but is ignored.
ITIPis for the linear tip spring option (IFLEX=2) (INTEGER)
=0 for no linear tip springs on piles
=1 for axial tip springs on piles of stiffness TSTIF
=2 all d.o.f. at tip have springs with stiffness TSTIF
TSTIFis the stiffness of linear tips springs (REAL)
PHI is the user defined Phi factor over-ride used for creating the interaction diagrams. (REAL)
PHI TENSION is the user-defined tension Phi factor (not currently available in GUI)
PHI FLEXURE is the user-defined flexure Phi factor (not currently available in GUI)
NLOPT chooses linear or nonlinear piles
=1 for linear piles
=2 for nonlinear piles (cracked concrete, steel yielding and P-).
=3 for linear piles where interaction diagrams are generated
The no soil model (IFLEX=2) can be useful in testing the model and comparing its results to other solutions. In
this case, the user must make sure the structure is stable through the proper use of tip springs (ITIP) and pile cap
fixity (KFIX). The tip spring model allows the user to add either linear springs to the axial (ITIP=1) or to all (ITIP=2)
degrees of freedom at the bottom of each pile. In the case of IFLEX=0 or 1, ITIP or TSTIF are still active in addition
to any soil tip properties specified through the use of soil tip modeling.
I=MAXITER T=TOLER M=MEM X=TRANS V=VERL=LETTER line 4
Where
MAXITERis the maximum # of iterations for the nonlinear soil analysis (INTEGER)
TOLERis the tolerance on the maximum out-of-balance force for any node in the system in the nonlinear
analysis (REAL)
MEMis the amount of memory used during analysis, always in Megabytes (MB)
TRANSis the option to use the transformed section properties
= 0 do not use the transformed section
= 1 do use the transformed section
VERVersion number used to generate input file
LETTERis the version letter. This value, combined with the version number, fully describes the version of the
program
The out of balance forces are obtained in the following manner. The stiffness matrix is multiplied times the
current set of displacements to obtain a force vector. This force vector is then compared with the applied forces
on the structure. If the structure is in static equilibrium then the two force vectors would be identical. The
difference between the two sets of forces are the out of balance forces.
The following default values are be used for the maximum # of iterations for nonlinear analysis (MAXITER) and
the tolerance on the out-of balance forces (TOLER) for convergence:
MAXITER= 50
TOLER= 1.0
FB-MULTIPIER offers the option to use linear or nonlinear piles and piers. Linear piles will converge more
quickly and should be used for preliminary design and when nonlinear sections are not significant. NLOPT (on
previous line) chooses which type of pile behavior will be used.
17.2.4 Multiple Pier Substructure Information
The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information under the SUBSTR header
describes the pier to pier geometry.
SUBSTR
NPIERS
PIERNUM X= XDIST Y= YDIST R= ZROT A= LBROT B= RBROT
Where
NPIERS is the number of piers (or pile bents)
XDIST is the x-distance from the global origin (located at the first pier)
YDISTis the y-distance from the global origin
ZROTis the pier rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved alignments)
LBROTis the left bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved alignments)
RBROTis the right bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved alignments)
This section must end with a blank line.
The pier rotation option allows each pier to be rotated about the global z-axis (clockwise positive) to
accommodate skew and curved bridge alignments. The rotation is performed as follows based on the bottom left
corner of the pile cap
Figure: 17.2.a Pier rotation options
17.2.5 Superstructure Information
The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information under the SUPPROP header
describes the superstructure properties. These properties are used in establishing the pier to pier connectivity.
SUPPROP
A=AREA, AREASUP I=I3, I2 J= TOR E=EMOD G=GMOD S=WEIGHT F=BEGIN X=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD,
GMOD B=END Y=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD C= CONTIN Z= AREA, I3 , I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD T=
BEGINVERT K= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD P= ENDVERT Q= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD H=H1,
H2 L=LH V=VARSP N=NODES
(One line for each span)
If variable span properties are present, each property line that follows applies to an element along the span.
There are a total of 10 elements per span. The above line contains the properties for Element #1.
A=AREA I=I3, I2 J= TOR E=EMOD G=GMOD(One line for each span element for variable span properties)
Where
AREAis the transverse cross-sectional area of the corresponding superstructure component
AREASUPis the span profile area used for wind load generation
I3is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (strong axis bending)
I2is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (weak axis bending)
TORis the torsional moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component
EMODis the elastic modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
GMODis the shear modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
WEIGHTis the unit weight of the superstructure
BEGINis the flag for the begin (left) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No Diaphragm; 2 = Custom)
ENDis the flag for the end (right) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No Diaphragm; 2 = Custom)
XProperty list for begin (left) span end condition
YProperty list for end (right) span end condition
CONTIN is the flag to indicate custom input of continuity link properties (0=default; 1=custom)
ZProperty list for continuity link element
BEGINVERTis the flag to indicate custom input of begin vertical link properties (0=default; 1=custom)
ENDVERTis the flag to indicate custom input of end vertical link properties (0=default; 1=custom)
KProperty list for begin vertical link element
PProperty list for end vertical link element
H1is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the superstructure (beginning
of span)
H2is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the superstructure (end of
span)
LHis the live load height from the center of the pier cap to the center of the live load
VARSPindicates whether variable span properties are present (0;no, 1;yes).
NODES is the total number of nodes on the bridge span (not currently available in GUI, and is set to 11, creating
10 span elements per span)
:
Each span of the superstructure is modeling with a single beam (divided into sub-elements) that spans from the
center of the back span pier to the center of the forward span pier. The superstructure beam is connected to rigid
beams at the back span and forward span, which distribute the load to the bearing locations.
Figure: 17.2.b Superstructure Beam
Figure: 17.2.c Superstructure Beam with Continuity Link
Figure: 17.2.d Continuity Rigid Link
17.2.6 User Defined Bearing Connection
The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information under the PADPROP header
describes the load-displacement behavior for the bearing locations. This information is only provided for userdefined substructure to superstructure connectivity.
PADPROP
NPROP
X1,X2,X3,,X20
F1,F2,F3,,F20
T=TYPE1,TYPE2.....TYPE100
Where
NPROPis the number of custom load-displacement curve definitions
F1F20are the load values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points max.)
X1X20are the displacement values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points max.)
TYPE1....TYPE100 are the bearing curve types. A value of 1 is written for translational, a value of 2 for rotational.
(Repeat curve pair values for each user-defined curve definition)
:
A maximum of 20 points can be used to describe the load-displacement relationship for the bearing. Load values
should be entered for both positive and negative displacements. Zero force values can be entered intentionally.
For example, to model no vertical reaction due to girder uplift, enter a load-displacement curve for the vertical
displacement with positive load and displacement values (for loads acting downward) and zero force values for
negative displacement (loads acting upward). Displacement values must be entered in order from the largest
negative displacement to the largest positive displacement.
Examples:
Figure: 17.2.e Example Load-Displacement Curve for Vertical Displacement
17.2.7 Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors

Self weight and Buoyancy loading is handled automatically in the program by entering a unit weight for each
type of element (Pile, Pile cap and pier elements). Since self-weight and Buoyancy have different load factors,
these load factors can be input per load case. The following data is input for the load factors for self-weight and
buoyancy:
SWFACT
LC F=FSW, FBUO (one line per load case)
Where
LCis the load case in which to apply the load factors
FSWis the load factor for the self-weight in load case LC.
FBUOis the load factory for buoyancy in load case LC
17.2.8 Bridge Spring Toggle

Bridge spring toggle info,
BRSPR
Case #1
Case #2
Case #3
Case #n
Where Integer #n is the load case number for which the bridge springs are turned OFF. If pre-load is used and
bridge springs are present, a 1 value should appear in this list to indicate that springs are turned off for the preload case. If pre-load is used and no bridge springs are present, the BRSPR header is not required.
17.2.9 Pushover
For static pushover analysis,
PUSH
N=NPSTEP I=PINCR
Where
NPSTEPis the number of load steps
PINCR is load increment (e.g. 1.0 = increase initial load by 100% for each load step)
2 load cases are required
Use load case #1 for permanently applied loads
Use load case #2 for initial load to be incremented
Under the CONTROL header,
R=NPUSH
Where
NPUSH = 0 for normal analysis
= 1 for pushover analysis
17.2.10 PreLoad Case

This data is used to determine which load cases will be initialized using the results from a PreLoad case.
PRELOAD
line1
For Load Case 1, store the load case number (LCNUM) and indicate if the load case will utilize the PreLoad
feature (LCFLAG), where a value of 1 indicates that the PreLoad feature is used for the corresponding load
case number, and a value of 0 indicates that the PreLoad is not being used for the corresponding load case
number.
L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG
line2
Repeat input for each load case (excluding the PRELOAD header).
17.2.11 Combination (AASHTO)

AASHTO limit states can be turned on or off as needed. In the input file after the COMBINATION header,
COMBINATION
D= CODE
F=DMM
K= L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10, L11, L12, L13
N= NREVER M= MAXMIN
L= STYPE1, STYPE2, STYPE3, STYPE4, STYPE5
Where
Code = 0 for LRFD
= 1 for LFD
DMM = 0 for Maximum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
= 1 for Minimum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
(LRFD)
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
L12
L13
= 1 for STRENGTH-I
= 1 for STRENGTH-II
= 1 for STRENGTH-III
= 1 for STRENGTH-IV
= 1 for STRENGTH-V
= 1 for EXTREME-I
= 1 for EXTREME-II
= 1 for SERVICE-I
= 1 for SERVICE-II
= 1 for SERVICE-III
= 1 for SERVICE-IV
= 1 for FATIGUE-I
= 1 for FATIGUE-II
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(LFD)
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
= 1 for GROUP-I
= 1 for GROUP-IA
= 1 for GROUP-III
= 1 for GROUP-II
= 1 for GROUP-IV
= 1 for GROUP-V
= 1 for GROUP-VI
= 1 for GROUP-VII
= 1 for GROUP-VIII
= 1 for GROUP-IX
= 1 for GROUP-VESSEL
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
(0 otherwise)
NREVER = 1 for reversible loads (0 otherwise)

Reversible Loads: WS, WL, BR, FR (LFRD)
W, WL, LF, R, S, T (LFD)
MAXMIN = 1 to consider max and min factors for LFRD permanent loads (DC, DD, DW) (0 otherwise)
STYPE1...STYPE5 are the load case subtypes associated with the five load cases that accept subtypes.
Here is a list of these load cases and their respective subtypes:
1) Downdrag - Piles (alpha Tomlimson), Piles (lambda method), and Drilled Shafts (O'Neill & Reese).
2) Horiz. Earth Press . - Active, and At Rest.
3) Vert. Earth Press. - Retaining Walls & Abutments, Rigid Buried Structures, Rigid Frames, Flexible Buried
Structures, and Flexible Metal Box Culverts.
4) Creep - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
5) Shrinkage - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
17.2.12 Modify Load Factors

Any of the AASHTO load combination factors can also be modified as follows. In the input file after the COEFF
header,
COEFF
COEFF S=LIMST T=TYPE
Where
COEFFis the new load factor
LIMSTis the limit state to be modified (LRFD)
= 1 for STRENGTH I
= 2 for STRENGTH II
= 3 for STRENGTH III
= 4 for STRENGTH IV
= 5 for STRENGTH V
= 6 for EXTREME I
= 7 for EXTREME II
= 8 for SERVICE I
= 9 for SERVICE II
= 10 for SERVICE III
= 11 for SERVICEIV
= 12 for FATIGUE I
= 13 for FATIGUE II
LIMSTis the load group to be modified (LFD)
= 1 for GROUP I
= 2 for GROUP I-A
= 3 for GROUP II
= 4 for GROUP III
= 5 for GROUP IV
= 6 for GROUP V
= 7 for GROUP VI
= 8 for GROUP VII
= 9 for GROUP VIII
= 10 for GROUP IX
TYPEis the load type specified in AASHTO
Use one line per load factor.
Example:
COEFF
1.60 S= 1 T= DC
1.45 S= 3 T= WS
:
17.2.13 Dynamic Control Parameters

The following lines specify the dynamic control parameters for the FB-MULTIPIER program.
DYN
Y=NDYNS C=NDAMP F=ALPHA1,BETA1,ALPHA2,BETA2 S=NPMAX J=DMP K=DMS O=NPRT M=SMASS
H=NSHM L=NBMM N=NDYSOL U=NMSE E=EPP R=NCMOD T=NSTEEL P=D1,D2,D3,D4,D5,D6,D7 Z=NFREQ
Q=CFRQ A=NSCS W=JPIL(1),JPIL(2),JPIL(3) (all on one line)
Where
NDYNSis the type of dynamics solution.
= 0 Step by step integration (default).
= 1 Spectrum analysis (for the structure only).
NDAMPis the damping option.
= 0 no damping (default).
= 1 damping.
ALPHA1,BETA1coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the structure (C=ALPHA*M+BETA*K).
ALPHA2,BETA2coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the piles.
ALPHA3,BETA3coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the soil.
NPMAXis the maximum number of time steps for the analysis.
DMPis the mass density for the piles. This a default global value used if a weight density if not given for a pile
cross-section.
DMSis the mass density for the pier (excluding pile cap). This a default global value used if a weight density if
not given for a pier cross-section.
NPRTis the output option for time step analysis.
= 0 maximum displacements and maximum forces caused by the maximum displacements (default).
= 1 all displacements and maximum forces.
= 2 maximum displacements and all forces.
= 3 all displacements and all forces.
Note that NPRT = 2 or 3 options only allow the program to compute the element forces for the options above
(because this may take some time for a large structure), to print them out, you still have to use these in addition to
the print out option. For example, if you want the pile forces for every time step use O=4 and set P=1 under the
PRINT label. If you want only the structure forces use T=1. The maximum forces are the forces caused by the
maximum displacements, note that these can be smaller than the maximum forces for the structure. For options 2
and 3 a summary of the maximum forces and the time step when it occurred will be printed out at the end.
SMASS is the concentrated mass adopted for the soil. This mass is applied to all the translational DOF X, Y and
Z to represent the attached soil mass.
NSHM is the option for the mass matrix for the cap.
= 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
= 1 lumped mass matrix.
NBMMis the option for the mass matrix for the structure and piles.
= 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
= 1 lumped mass matrix.
NDYSOL is the option for the type of numerical solution. This option is only valid for step by step solution
(NDYNS=0)
= 0 Newmark's method - average acceleration (default).
= 1 Newmark's method - linear acceleration. This method is conditionally stable and is not guaranteed to
converge unless dt/T < 0.551 for all vibration modes.
= 2 Wilson-Theta method.
NMSE is the option for multiple support excitation.
= 0 standard analysis.
= 1 multiple support excitation.
EPP is the strain rate for concrete (default = 1e-5)
NCMODis the option for the concrete model in nonlinear analysis.
= 0 ; nonlinear elastic (default)
= 1 ; hysteresis
NSTEELis the steel model
= 0 ; bilinear (default)
= 1 ; strain - hardening and Bauschinger effect
D1...D7this is an option if the user wants to save a specific NODE displacement to a file for possible later plotting
or checking.
D1 - is the number of NODES that will me saved (maximum = 6).
D2...D7 - is the number of the NODE to be saved. For example:
P=6,1,2,3,4,5,6
D1 = 6 - six NODES will be saved to the file.
1...6 - NODES 1 to 6 will be saved to the file. They do not have to be in any specific order.
Note that the displacements will be saved in a text file with the name: 'inputname'.DSn, the velocities in
'inputname'.VSn, and the accelerations in 'inputname'.ASn, where n is the file number for the chosen node. In the
example above if the input file is called test.in, the displacements for node 1 are saved in test.DS1, for node 2 in
test.DS2 and so on.
NFREQ is the option for computing the period.
= 0 (default) - initial period for the structure will not be computed.
= 1- computes the initial periods for the structure.
CFRQ is the frequency of loading (used for cyclic degradation, in Hz)
NSCS is the option for subtracting the stress in the concrete at the level of the steel bar for dynamic analysis.
= 0 (default) - does not subtract.
= 1 - subtracts.
JPIL is the option to track the forces in a specific pile element.
JPIL(1) = pile number
JPIL(2) = element number, must be between 1 and 16. 1 is top element, 16 is bottom element. If not specified is
set to 1.
JPIL(3) = element node, must be 1 or 2. 1 is bottom element node, 2 is top element node. If not specified is set to
1.
This information is saved to the file INPUT.DFO, where INPUT is the input file name.
This section MUST end with a blank line.
Options shown with a strikethrough font will be implemented in the future.
17.2.14 Dynamic Step by Step Integration

Any structure may be analyzed using the step by step integration method of dynamic analysis. This method uses
the Newmark method and Raleigh damping to solve for dynamic response resulting from time varying loading.
The time varying loading can be applied as a single load function applied at many nodes or different time
functions applied at specific DOF. The STEP program will perform this analysis. The distributed and concentrated
loads applied to the structure will be applied as a CONSTANT load throughout the analysis. The applied load
function can be a force or a ground acceleration.
TRANSIENT
T=T1 L=L1 P=P1 Q=Q1 G=GF A=A0 B=A1 F=FF C=PB
Where
T1is the time step increment for integration, default is 0.01s.
L1is the number of time varying load functions to be specified. The functions are applied at the specified nodes
and DOF.
P1is the maximum number of time points specified for any load function. If three functions are specified, P1 is the
maximum number of points used to specify any of the three functions.
Q1 is the flag for the type of load function applied. If Q1=0 then the load is a force. If Q1=1, then the load applied
is a ground acceleration.
GFis the gravity factor to multiply times the acceleration or load record input below. If the acceleration record is
given in gs, then the gravity factor would be 386.4 in/sec2 or 9.81 m/sec2 . Use GF=1.0 if the acceleration is not
normalized by g.
A0, A1are global damping factors, implying that only one damping factor will be applied to structure, piles and
soil.
FF is the flag for the file format of the load function file(s): 1 is for new format, o is for old format.
PB is the Peer Berkeley decryption string, to describe the Load Function.
Note: you must choose one damping factor, either here or under the DYN header, only for the soil. Both can not
be chosen.
Z= LFN
Where
LFNis the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.
LOADING FUNCTION DEFINITIONS (L1 Sets of lines)
If you choose the multiple support excitation option, you have to create one set of loading functions for each pile
node. Including the first line.
The next lines specify the loading function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs of numbers each. The
number of lines is dictated by the maximum number of points used to specify the function (P1). The points do
NOT need to be at even spacing.
T1,F1 T2,F2 T3,F3 T4,F4
Where
Ti,Fiare the time and force (or acceleration) values for the point being specified.
17.2.15 Spectrum Analysis

The results of an EIGEN solution can be used to perform a spectrum analysis. This procedure uses the mode
superposition method to combine the individual eigen vectors into a single response, based on the excitation
given by a response spectrum. Response spectrums are usually given for earthquake loading. This procedure
combines the individual modes response for a spectrum acting in each of the three global directions, X,Y, and Z.
The modal responses are combined using the Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC) procedure, the
directions are combined using Square Root Sum of the Squares (SRSS). SPECT allows only a single input
response spectrum with different scale factors for that spectrum in each of the three directions (X, Y, and Z). The
program will allow either an input spectrum or an input acceleration record and generate the spectrum values
internally.
SPECTRUM
For input Spectrum use the following lines:
S=SP D=DX,DY,DZ N=NV F=FF E= EF H=CM L=SM
Where
SP is the number of spectrum points used to define the response spectrum curve. The points are given in pairs
(Circular frequency (rad/ sec), Value) and are assumed linear between values.
X is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the X direction. The response spectrum values are
scaled by this factor when used for the X direction.
DYis the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Y direction. The response spectrum values are
scaled by this factor when used for the Y direction.
DZ is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Z direction. The response spectrum values are
scaled by this factor when used for the Z direction.
NV is the number of eigenvectors to use for the responses. The default is the total number of vectors solved for
from EIGEN.
FFis the flag for the file format of the modal response spectrum function file. 1 is for new format, 0 isfor old
format.
EFis the eigenvector analysis stop flag. 1 means analysis will stop after eigenvector calculations are complete.
0 means analysis will run through to normal completion.
CMis the global mass flag for the cap. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
SMis the global mass flag for the structure. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
A spectrum analysis also needs damping ratios for each mode used in the analysis. The damping ratio is the
percentage of damping for the mode in question. These values must be specified if a spectrum analysis is to be
performed. The next line specifies the damping ratios to use.
NF,NL,NI S=S1
Where
NFis the first mode in a generation sequence for which the damping ratio is used.
NLis the last mode in a generation sequence for which the damping ratio is used.
NIis the increment for generating mode for which the damping ratio is used. Modes between NF and NL will also
use the specified ratio.
NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
S1is the damping ratio value to be used (as a decimal).
Z= LFN
Where
LFNis the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.
C=PB
Where
PB is the Peer Berkeley decryption string, to describe the Load Function.
SPECTRUM DEFINITION LINES (Repeat for as many lines as necessary)
The next lines specify the spectrum function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs of numbers each. The
number of lines is dictated by the number of points used to specify the function (SP). The points do NOT need to
be at even spacing.
F1,A1 F2,A2 F3,A3 F4,A4
Where
Fi,Aiare the frequency (rad/sec) and acceleration (length/sec^2) values for the point being specified.
The acceleration values should represent the maximum absolute acceleration (spectral
acceleration), not the relative acceleration (between the structure and moving support).
17.2.16 Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions

This data is used to define discrete span cross-section geometry for each span.
SPANDIM line 1
For Span 1, specify superstructure cross-section type (SUPXSECTYPE), whether or not girders all have the
same cross-section (GIRGEOM), and the number of girders (NGIRDERS).
Note that for SUPXSECTYPE, 1 = steel girders on slab, 2 = concrete girders on slab, and 3 = box girders; for
GIRGEOM, 0 = all girders have the same cross-section, 1 = geometry varies among girders. Finally, note that
whether or not the girders are prismatic is determined from data given under the SPANheader.
T= SUPXSECTYPE G= GIRGEOM N= NGIRDERS line 2
For Span 1, specify depth of slab (SLABDEPTH), width of slab (SLABWIDTH), slab elastic modulus (SEMOD),
slab shear modulus (SGMOD), slab unit weight (SUNWT), girder elastic modulus (GEMOD), girder shear
modulus (GGMOD), and girder unit weight (GUNWT).
Note that the following line of parameters is read only once per span.
B= SLABDEPTH U= SLABWIDTH E= SEMOD G= SGMOD S= SUNWT F= GEMOD H= GGMOD T= GUNWT line
3
For steel girders (SUPXSECTYPE= 1) that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 0), the
following parameters are read once. For steel girders (SUPXSECTYPE= 1) that are prismatic and mutually
varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 1), the following parameters are read once for each girder. For steel girders
(SUPXSECTYPE= 1) that are non-prismatic but identical (GIRGEOM= 0), the following parameters are read once
for each span element. For steel girders (SUPXSECTYPE= 1) that are non-prismatic and mutually varying in
cross-section (GIRGEOM= 1), the following parameters are read for each girder of each span element.
Specify bottom flange depth (BFLDEPTH) and bottom flange width (BFLDEPTH).
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH line 4
Specify web depth (WEBDEPTH) and web width (WEBWIDTH).
E= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH line 5
Specify top flange depth (TFLDEPTH) and top flange width (TFLWIDTH).
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH line 6
For concrete girders (SUPXSECTYPE= 2) that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 0), the
following parameters are read once. For concrete girders (SUPXSECTYPE= 2) that are prismatic and mutually
varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 1), the following parameters are read once for each girder. For concrete
girders (SUPXSECTYPE = 2) that are non-prismatic but identical (GIRGEOM = 0), the following parameters are
read once for each span element. For concrete girders (SUPXSECTYPE = 2) that are non-prismatic and mutually
varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM = 1), the following parameters are read for each girder of each span
element.
Specify bottom flange depth (BFLDEPTH) and bottom flange width (BFLWIDTH).
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH line 4
Specify bottom taper depth (ie, depth of taper between bottom flange and web) (BTDEPTH).
E= BTDEPTH line 5
Specify web depth (WEBDEPTH) and web width (WEBWIDTH).
F= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH line 6
Specify top taper depth (ie, depth of taper between web and top flange) (TTDEPTH).
G= TTDEPTH line 7
Specify top flange depth (TFLDEPTH) and top flange width (TFLWIDTH).
H= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH line 8
For box girders (SUPXSECTYPE = 3) that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (GIRGEOM = 0), the
following parameters are read once. For box girders (SUPXSECTYPE = 3) that are prismatic and mutually
varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM = 1), the following parameters are read once for each girder. For box girders
(SUPXSECTYPE = 3) that are non-prismatic but identical (GIRGEOM = 0), the following parameters are read for
on girder of each span element. For box girders (SUPXSECTYPE = 3) that are non-prismatic and mutually
varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM = 1), the following parameters are read for each girder of each span
element.
Specify girders bottom flange depth (BSLDEPTH) and the girders bottom slab width (BSLWIDTH).
D= BSLDEPTH W= BSLWIDTH line 4
Specify number of web-walls (NWEBW) and the width at top of web walls (ie, the horizontal distance from the
top, outside of the outermost web walls) (WEBWDIST).
N= NWEBW O= WEBWDIST line 5
Specify the web wall depth (WEBWDEPTH) and web wall width (ie, the average web-wall width)
(AWEBWWIDTH).
E= WEBWDEPTH X= AWEBWWIDTH line 6
Specify the top flange depth (TFLDEPTH) and top flange width (TFLWIDTH).
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH line 7

Repeat input (excluding the SPANDIM header) for each additional span.
17.2.17 Span Concentrated Nodal Loads

These are automatically generate load input lines. As many lines as needed can be used. One line must be
supplied for each loaded node and each load condition The load is the self weight of the bridge span dispersed
onto it's left and right rows of bearings. There is a net load of 0.
Note: Users should not hand edit this data.
SPANLOAD
NODE L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, T=TYPE, S=SPAN, B=BRG, I=INDEX, P=PIER, R=ROW N=PHODE,
D=DL, U=UF
(one line per nodal load)
Where
NODESpan node number
LCis the load case number
FXis the force in the global X-direction
FYis the force in the global Y-direction
FZis the force in the global Z-direction
MXis the moment about the global X-axis
MYis the moment about the global Y-axis
MZis the moment about the global Z-axis
TYPEis the load type specified in AASHTO (ignore for non-AASHTO loads)
LRFD Loads:
TYPE =
DCDead load of components
DDDowndrag
DWDead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EHHorizontal earth pressure load
EVVertical earth pressure load
ESEarth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
CRCreep
SHShrinkage
LLLive load
IMImpact
CEVehicular centrifugal force
BRVehicular braking force
PLPedestrian live load
LSLive load surcharge
WAWater load and stream pressure
WSWind load on structure
WLWind load on live load
VP Vertical Wind Pressure

VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FRFriction
TUUniform temperature
TGTemperature gradient
SESettlement
EQEarthquake
ICIce load
CTVehicular collision force
CVVessel collision force
LFD Loads:
TYPE =
DDead load
LLLive load (AASHTO Type "L")
IMImpact (AASHTO Type "I")
EEarth pressure
BBuoyancy
WSWind load on structure (ASSHTO Type "W")
LFLongitudinal force from live load
CFCentrifugal force
RRib shortening
SShrinkage
TTemperature
EQEarthquake
SFStream flow pressure
ICEIce pressure
SPANspan number (starting at left pier)
BRG is the flag for the span node's association with a bearing location; 1 is for bearing association, 0 is for no
bearing association. Span nodes on the transfer beam have bearing associated with them.
INDEXis the 0-based bearing position index that the span node is associated, with the span node's bearing
row.
PIER is the 0-based pier number that the span node is associated with.
ROW is flag for the bearing row number in which the span node is located; 0 is the left row, 1 is for the middle
row (when there is one row of bearings), and 2 is for the right row.
PNODE is the 1-based pier node number that the span node is associated with.
DLis the span dead load applied to the node, which includes the self weight factor. This is used to differentiate
the Z direction load that is user-applied.
UF is the span dead load applied to the node, which does NOT include the self weight factor.
17.2.18 Span Thermal Data

This data is used to determine span thermal loading conditions (either uniform or gradient-based) for each span.
SPANTHERM
line 1
For Span 1, define the reference temperature (REFT), and if using the AASHTO Combinations Design Options
feature, the uniform span temperature (UNIFT).
R= REFT U=UNIFT line 2
For Span 1, skip the next line (the perimeter SPANNO is only read by the GUI).
S= SPANNO line 3
For Span 1, define the coefficient of thermal expansion (GALPHA) for the girders.
A= GALPHA line 4
For Span 1, define the coefficient of thermal expansion (SALPHA) for the slab.
B= SALPHA line 5
For Span 1, specify the slab top (SLABTOPT) temperature, the temperature 4 in. below the slab top (SLABFINT),
and the slab bottom temperature (SLABBOTT). Note that these temperatures are read only once for each span.
S= SLABTOPT T=SLABFINT U= SLABBOTT line 6
For steel girders that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (as determined in the SPANDIM header), the
following parameters are read once. For steel girders that are prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section,
the following parameters are read once for each girder. For steel girders that are non-prismatic but identical in
cross-section, the following parameters are read once for each element. For steel girders that are non-prismatic
and mutually varying in cross-section, the following parameters are read for each girder of each span element.
Specify the girder temperatures at the bottom of the girder (T1), top of the bottom flange (T2), first arbitrary web
depth (T3), second arbitrary web depth (T4), third arbitrary web depth (T5), top of the web (T6), and top of the top
flange (T7).
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 line 7
Specify the arbitrary vertical offsets (D3, D4, and D5) that correspond to the arbitrary web depth temperatures
(T3, T4, and T5). Note that the offsets are cumulative, where D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the
current element being defined.
D= D3 D4 D5 line 8
For concrete girders that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (as determined in the SPANDIM header),
the following parameters are read once. For concrete girders that are prismatic and mutually varying in crosssection, the following parameters are read once for each girder. For concrete girders that are non-prismatic but
identical in cross-section, the following parameters are read once for each element. For steel girders that are
non-prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the following parameters are read for each girder of each
span element.
Specify the girder and slab temperatures at the bottom of the girder (T1), top of the bottom flange (T2), top of the
bottom flange to web taper (T3), first arbitrary web depth (T4), second arbitrary web depth (T5), third arbitrary
web depth (T6), bottom of the web to top flange taper (T7), bottom of the top flange (T8), and top of the top flange
(T9).
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 line 7
Specify the arbitrary web depths (D4, D5, and D6) that correspond to the arbitrary web depth temperatures (T4,
T5, and T6). Note that the offsets are cumulative, where D4 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the
D= D4 D5 D6 line 8
For box girders that are prismatic and identical in cross-section (as determined in the SPANDIM header), the
following parameters are read once. For box girders that are prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the
following parameters are read once for each girder. For box girders that are non-prismatic but identical in crosssection, the following parameters are read once for each element. For box girders that are non-prismatic and
mutually varying in cross-section, the following parameters are read for each girder of each span element.
Specify the box-girder and slab temperatures at the bottom slab of the box-girder (T1), top of the box-girder
bottom slab (T2), first arbitrary web-wall depth (T3), second arbitrary web-wall depth (T4), third arbitrary web-wall
depth (T5), top of the web-wall (T6), and top of the top flange (T7).
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 line 7
Specify the arbitrary web depths (D3, D4, and D5) that correspond to the arbitrary web depth temperatures (T3,
T4, and T5). Note that the offsets are cumulative, where D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the
D= D3 D4 D5 line 8
Repeat input for each span (excluding the SPANTHERM header and the reference temperature, REFT).
17.2.19 Span Thermal Load Case

This data is used to determine which load cases are active for non-AASHTO models that utilize span thermal
loading.
SPANLCTHERM line 1
For Load Case 1, store the load case number (LCNUM) and indicate if the load case will utilize the span thermal
loading feature (LCFLAG), where a value of 1 indicates that the span thermal loading feature is used for the
corresponding load case number, and a value of 0 indicates that the span thermal is not being used for the
corresponding load case number.
L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG line 2
Repeat input for each load case (excluding the SPANLCTHERM header).
17.2.20 One Pier Two Span (OPTS)

The OPTS header contains input to determine whether or not an OPTS analysis will be conducted. If OPTS
analysis is utilized, then the input file must also contain the X, Y and Z direction offsets (all parallel to the
respective global axes) from the top node of the vertical link element (see Transfer Beam Properties) of the pier.
Used in conjunction with appropriately determined span springs and span masses, OPTS analysis employs a
single pier and two spans to produce output of similar accuracy with respect to that obtained from analyzing a
multiple-pier model (see Davidson 2007).
OPTS
X=SXPXL Y=SPYL Z=SPZL
X=SXPXR Y=SPYR Z=SPZR
where
SPXL is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the left span.
SPYL is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the left span.
SPZL is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the left span.
SPXR is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the right span.
SPYR is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the right span.
SPZR is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of the right span.
Note: 1. In the English system, units are feet for span offsets.
2. In the SI system, units are meters for span offsets.
17.2.21 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Springs

The following lines specify span end spring stiffness input for the OPTS model in FB-MultiPier. There are six lines
of input for each span end. These lines are always required if the header is present in the text input file.
OPTS_DIR line 1
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
line 2
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26
line 3
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36
line 4
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46
line 5
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56
line 6
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66
line 7
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
line 8
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26
line 9
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36
line 10
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46
line 11
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56
line 12
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66
line 13
where
X, Y, Z, P, Q, R correspond to the rows of the 6x6 stiffness matrices, and where lines 2-7 pertain to the left extent
of the OPTS model, while lines 8-13 pertain to the right extent of the OPTS model.
S11, S12, S13 are the individual stiffness terms. For each of the six data rows allotted for the left and right
model extents, the rows correspond to X-translation, Y-translation, Z-translation, X-rotation, Y-rotation, and Zrotation degrees-of-freedom, respectively. For example, entry S44 of line 5 corresponds to the diagonal value of
X-rotational stiffness for the left extent of the OPTS model.
Note: For Spring Stiffness, the English units are kip/in and kip-ft/rad for translational and rotational terms,
respectively. SI units are kN/m and kN-m/rad, respectively.
17.2.22 Span Mass

The SPANMASS header contains input that allows users to specify additional (discrete) mass at span nodes.
The input indicates which span(s) and node(s) to which the mass(es) will be applied.
SPANMASS
NODE M=MTX,MTY,MTZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ S=SPAN (one line per nodal mass set)
:
where
NODE is the span node number to which the Mass will be applied
MTX is the additional mass in the x-axis translational DOF
MTY is the additional mass in the y-axis translational DOF
MTZ is the additional mass in the z-axis translational DOF
MRX is the additional mass in the x-axis rotational DOF
MRY is the additional mass in the y-axis rotational DOF
MRZ is the additional mass in the z-axis rotational DOF
SPAN is the span to which the mass(es) will be applied
Note: For Span mass, the English units are kip-sec^2/in and kip-sec^2/rad for translational and rotational
DOF, respectively.
17.2.23 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)

With the COUPLED header active, FB-MULTIPIER conducts an impact analysis on the pier structure based upon
the characteristics of a moving vessel. Using vessel weight and initial velocity, as well as the load-deformation
characteristics of the vessel bow, the impact loading can be quantified at each time step, and applied to the
impacted pier. The vessel bow can be characterized using elastic-plastic behavior, or arbitrarily defined bow
load-deformation data. To use the COUPLED analysis feature, the external force modification flag (MODEXT)
must be set to 1 in the LOADYN header.
COUPLED
D=IDEFN I=IVTYPE W=WB V=VBIX,VBIY
where
IDEFN is the vessel definition method [Pre-defined=1, User-defined=2]
IVTYPE is the vessel type:
If definition is Pre-defined (IDEFN=1):
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is a barge
If definition is User-defined (IDEFN=2)
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is defined by an elastic, perfectly-plastic curve
IVTYPE=2 indicates the vessel is defined by general load and unloading curves
WB is the weight of the vessel
VBIX is the initial velocity of the vessel in the x-direction
VBIY is the initial velocity of the vessel in the y-direction
If IDEFN=1 and IVTYPE=1 (Pre-defined vessel, barge)
W=WIDTH S=SURF
WIDTH is the effective impact zone width on the vessel bow
SURF is the shape of the impact surface (1=planar surface, 2=non-planar surface)
If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=1 (User-defined vessel, elastic, perfectly-plastic)
A=ABY P=PBY
ABY is the crush depth at yield for the vessel bow
PBY is the yield load for the vessel bow
If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=2 (User-defined, general loading and unloading)
N=NABPB
NABPB is the number of points in bow force-deformation curve [limited to 200 points]
AB(1) PB(1)
AB(2) PB(2)
AB is the abscissa for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve
PB is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve
N=NABPBU X=ABMAXU
NABPBU is the number of points in current unloading curve [limited to 25 points]
ABMAXU is the crush level at which the loading and unloading curves intersect
ABU(1) PBU(1)
ABU(2) PBU(2)
ABU is the abscissa for the current user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
PBU is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
17.3 Pier Specific Headers

1. Pile Information
2. Multiple Pile Sets
3. Pile Batter Information
4. Missing Pile Data
5. Soil Information
6. Multiple Soil Sets
7. Structural Information
8. Column Information
9. Concentrated Nodal Loads
10. Bearing Location Loads
11. Wind Load Generation
12. Spring Properties
13. Pile Cap Properties
14. Removed Pier Cap Element
15. Bearing Connection
16. Point Mass
17. Point Dampers
18. Dynamic Load Function Application
19. Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model
17.3.1 Pile Information

The following input lines define the pile properties such as type of cross section, pile dimensions, quantity and
location of reinforcement and prestressing strands, and linear or non-linear material properties. There are many
parameters and input variations.
There are three allowable pile section types, circular, square/rectangular and H-pile. The H-pile section can be
embedded within the circular or square section. If the H-pile is embedded it is considered a square/rectangular
or circular pile. Also note that a pile can have varying cross sections along its length.
The pile shape (KTYPE) sets the cross sectional shape of the pile. For square linear piles, the effective diameter
(for lateral soil interaction) is calculated automatically by FB-MULTIPIER. For nonlinear piles, KTYPE determines
the cross section for steel layout and behavior.
PILE line 1
NSET= NPSET N=NPLNOD S= SLUMP M=c NSEG= NPSEG1, NPSEG2, NPSEG3... line 2
Where
N1specifies how many pile cross sections will be given along the length of the pile.
NSETis the number of pile sets
NPLNODis the number of nodes in the pile
NPSEGiis the number of segments in pile set i (must specify for each pile set)
PARFIXis the reduction factor for the capacity for the TOP sub-segment of the pile (attached to the pile cap). This
feature is not available in FB-MultiPier, but was used with the previous Florida Pier program.
c is the concrete unit weight (used only for axial soil model type 4)
SLUMPis the concrete slump (used only for axial soil model type 4)
Cross Sections: The piles may be modeled as varying cross sections along the length. For example we could
have a drilled shaft where the casing only goes partially through the depth.
Figure: 17.3.a Varying Pile Cross sections

For each cross section, the pile properties must be specified. If any cross section is nonlinear, you must specify:
1) The material by default (one line) or user defined stress strain curves (one control line and two additional
lines for each stress strain curve used.)
2) The pile shape - by default (one line) or multiple lines to define the shape and steel placement.
C DESC (comment line, not read by engine)
C T=STYPE D=DSEG U=SUNIT SHAPE LNR (comment line, not read by engine)
Where
C indicates the following info is for commenting purposes only, and is (not read by the engine)
DESC is a decription of the cross section, for example 24" Square FDOT Presstressed
STYPE is the segment type code, where HPILE = 0, PRECAST = 1, DRILLED SECTION = 2, and PIPE= 3.
DSEG is the segment data type, where UNKNOWN = 0, LINEAR = 1, and NONLINEAR= 2.
SUNIT is the units code, where ENGLISH = 0, and METRIC = 1.
SHAPE is the shape description. These include H-Pile, PreCast, Drilled Shaft, Pipe Pile, and Generic.
LNR is the linear / non linear decription. These include nonlinear and linear.
Finally, for both linear and nonlinear piles, six additional lines are needed to define the pile geometry.
Linear Pile Properties

For Circular Linear Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=1)
L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J A=AREA D=DIA S=SW K=KTYPEline 3
For Square / Rectangular Linear Piles and/or Linear H-Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=2 or 3)
L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J W=WIDTHD=DEPTH
A=AREA S=SW K=KTYPE line 3
Where
XPLis the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
Eis Youngs Modulus of the pile (REAL)
Gis the shear modulus of pile, default = E/2.4
RINER2is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 2-axis (REAL)
RINER3is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 3-axis (REAL)
Jis the torsional moment of inertia (REAL)
AREAis the cross-sectional area of the pile (REAL)
DIA is the diameter for round piles (REAL)
WIDTHis the width for square piles (REAL)
DEPTHis the depth for rectangular piles (REAL) (if depth is not given the section is assumed square)
SWis the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations.
If SW>0, self-weight is included in the analysis.
KTYPEspecifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile.
Nonlinear Property Lines
For Nonlinear Piles or Linear Piles with Interaction Diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)
The following lines are required for nonlinear piles, or when interaction diagrams are requested by the user
(NLOPT=2 or 3). For the non-linear pile properties, the user can specify the defaulted stress strain curves or can
generate the desired stress strain curves for the steel and the concrete.
For the Default Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=1)
K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES(2), ES(3), ES(4)
or
For user specified Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=2) plus up to 5 sets of stress strain points for user defined
curve
K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4)
Where
XPLis the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
MATOPT is the material input option (INTEGER)
MATOPT=1 means input FPC, FY or FSU,ES,EC and KSTEEL on this line and default stress strain curves
will be generated.
MATOPT=2 means describe stress strain curves for steel and concrete in INPUT #6B and #6C
No FPC, (FY or FSU), ES and EC values to be entered for MATOPT=2.
FPC is the compression stress, f'c, for concrete (REAL)
FPC = 0 for tubular steel sections
ECis the modulus of elasticity of concrete (REAL)
FY(1) is the yield stress, Fy , for mild steel (REAL)
FSU(2)is the ultimate stress for prestressed strands (REAL)
FY(3)is the yield stress for H-pile section (REAL)
FY(4)is the yield stress for tubular steel section (REAL)
(only for circular pile)
ES(1)is the modulus of elasticity of mild steel (REAL)
ES(2)is the modulus of elasticity of prestressing strand (REAL)
ES(3)is the modulus of elasticity of H-pile section (REAL)
ES(4)is the modulus of elasticity of tubular steel section (REAL)
KSTEEL(I)is the steel type option (INTEGER)
KSTEEL(I) = 1 includes steel type
KSTEEL(I) = 0 does not include steel type
KSTEEL(1) for mild steel reinforcement
KSTEEL(2) for prestressing steel strands
KSTEEL(3) for H-pile section
KSTEEL(4) for tubular steel section (only for circular piles)
KTYPEspecifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile
Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above or in the non-linear user
defined stress strain curves and inputting the section properties described in the sections for the input of circular
piles and H-piles.
Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2
NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,, line 1
EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,,line 2
Where
NPCCis the number of points on concrete curve (INTEGER)
NPCC=0 for round tubular section or H-pile section (no concrete)

No SIGC or EPSC values to be entered for NPCC=0
SIGC(1) is the first stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
SIGC(2) is the second stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(1) is the first strain point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(2)is the second strain point on concrete curve (REAL)
Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above and inputting the
section properties described in the sections for the input of circular piles and H-piles.
Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(1) = 1
S1=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,
line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= y line 2

Where
NPSCis the number of points on the mild steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1)is the first strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
yis the steel yield strain
Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(2) = 1
S2=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,,line 2
where
NPSCis the number of points on the prestressed steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2)is the second strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(3) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= y line 2
Where
NPSCis the number of points on the H-pile steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(4) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= y
line 2
where
NPSCis the number of points on the tubular steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and KTYPE=2
W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV P=PREST N=ISTNOPT S=SW
Where
WIDTH is the width of square pile parallel to the local Z axis (REAL)
DEPTHis the depth of rectangular pile parallel to the local Y axis (REAL)
DVis the diameter of the void (DV=0 for no void) (REAL) (It can also be the width of a rectangular void IF BV>0)
BVis the depth of a rectangular void. If BV>0, then the void is rectangular and the DV value is used for the width
of the void.
PRESTis the prestressing stresses after release & all losses for standard sections only(AASHTO 9.15.1, 9.16.2)
(REAL)
PREST=0 for non-prestressed (i.e. reinforced concrete)
ISTNOPT is the standard section option (INTEGER)
ISTNOPT=1 means use FDOT standard reinforcement for input width as shown below (INTEGER)
Note: WIDTH MUST BE one of the values from a) through f) from Figure: 17.3.b or Figure: 17.3.c
STNOPT=2 means describe the reinforcement in the section for the nonlinear analysis of nonstandard
rectangular piles. (Use next lines)
SWis the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-weight is included in the
analysis.
Figure: 17.3.b Standard FDOT Prestressed Concrete Pile Sections (English)
Figure: 17.3.c Standard FDOT Prestressed Concrete Pile Sections (meters, kN)
Figure: 17.3.d Standard FDOT Prestressed Concrete Pile Sections (millimeters, kN)
For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2, KTYPE=2, and ISTNOPT=
2
NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times
Where
NGRPSis the # of groups of bars/strands(INTEGER)
IHPILEis the H-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for H-pile embedded in the concrete,
else IHPILE = 0
BMETH0=Custom; 1=Percentage
MINSPACEMinumum spacing between two bars
TYPEBar Type Number
ASis the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Yis the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Zis the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PRESTis the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
First bar is at coordinates Y,Z
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands
N=N1 D=3 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Z direction as follows:

if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strand
Figure F7: Permissible Nonstandard Rectangular Piles

EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.e Example Rectangular Pile for Input

Rectangular Pile (WIDTH=20" and DEPTH = 15") with 12 strands As=0.08 each spaced as shown
and prestressed to 175 ksi.
W=20 D=15 V=0 N=2
NG=4 HPI=0
0.08, 4.5, 6.0, 175 N=4 D=2
0.08, 4.5, -6.0, 175 N=4 D=2

0.08, -4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3
0.08, 4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3
For Piles the orientation of the local Y-Z axis to that of the global XS, YS axes are shown in figure above.
For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piles, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1
NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICONF T=TR HPI=IHPILE \ BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE
Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI] repeat NLAY times
FY= CYIELD HS= CSPG D= CDIA,
Where
NLAYis the number of circumferential steel layers
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
DPis the outer diameter of pile (REAL)
DSis the thickness of the outer steel shell (REAL)
DVis the diameter of the void (REAL)
DV = 0 for no void and tubular steel sections
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE Bar Type Number
IHPILEis the h-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for h-pile embedded in the concrete, else IHPILE = 0
TR=1 for spiral reinforcement with a factor of 0.75 (REAL)
=2 for tied reinforcement with a factor of 0.70 (REAL)
ICONFis the confined concrete option.
ICONF=0 for none.
ICONF=1 for spiral only.
ICONF=2 for shell and spiral conferment.
SWis the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-weight is included in the analysis.
PRESTis the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer (REAL)
PREST=0 for no prestressing
NBS is the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (INTEGER)
DSIis the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASIis the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)
CYIELD is the confined yield
HS is the confined spacing
CDIA is the confined diameter
Figure: 17.3.f Permissible Circular Piles

If the pile is prestressed, then neither tubular steel nor H-pile sections are allowed. If mild steel is present along
with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on the concrete is reduced due to the area of mild steel, and
the strain in the concrete due to the prestressing is assumed to be shared with the mild steel.
EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.g Sample Circular Pile for Input

22" diameter circular pile. 1" thick outer steel shell, 2 layers of reinforcing steel with 8 #7 bars in each layer.
NL=2 D=22.0 V=0.0 TH=1.0 HPI=0
8 N=7 C=3
8 N=7 C=5.875
For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:
OR=ORIENTline 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT]line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections
Where
ORIENTis the orientation of the H-pile.
ORIENT=2 for web parallel to the Local Y axis, or 3 for web parallel to thelocal Z-axis. (INTEGER)
DEPTH is the depth of the H-pile in inches (REAL). (Use the nominal depth for standard sections)
WEIGHT is the standard unit weight of the H-pile in lb/ft3 (REAL)
WEB is the web thickness in inches (REAL)
WIDTH is the flange width in inches (REAL)
FLANGEis the flange thickness in inches (REAL)
Note: For metric examples H-pile dimensions will be soft converted to metric units.
After the cross section data is input, SIX additional lines defining the pile system are required
Figure: 17.3.h Allowable H-Pile Orientations

EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.i Sample Mild Steel and H-pile Layout

Square Pile with 14 mild steel bars As=1
each spaced as shown with an embedded
14 x 117 H-pile.
W=30 V=0 N=2
NG=2 HPI=1
1.0 12 12 0 N=7 D=2
1.0 12 -12 0 N=7 D=2
OR=2
D=14 U=117
For Nonlinear Analysis of Oblong Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=4 NOTE: This type is ONLY
available for pier elements NOT for piles.
R= OR RW=RWIDTH D=DIAM T=VT V=DV B=WV S=WDEN
Where
ORis 2 or 3 and defines orientation, see Figure: 17.3.k (INTEGER)
RWIDTH is the width of rectangular portion (REAL)
DIAMis the diameter of semi-circular ends (REAL)
VTis void type, see Figure: 17.3.k VT may be 1 or 2 for OR = 2 or 3 (INTEGER)
DVis the diameter of the void for VT=1 (DV=0 for no void)
DVis the depth of the void parallel to DIAM for VT=2 (DV=0 for no void) (REAL)
WVis the width of the void parallel to RWIDTH for VT=2
(WV= 0 for no void) (REAL)
WDENis the self weight of the concrete
Reinforcement specification (Rectangular middle is similar to steel generation for rectangular sections)
NG=NGRPS >M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times
Where
NGRPSis the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE Bar Type Number
ASis the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Yis the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Zis the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PRESTis the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands
Reinforcement specification: (Semi-circular ends are similar to steel generation for circular sections.)
NL=NLAY
PREST, NBS, D=DSL, A=ASIrepeat NLAY times
Where
NLAYis the number of circumferential steel layers (INTEGER)
NBSis the number of bars in the layer (INTEGER)
PRESTis the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer
PREST=0 for no prestressing (REAL)

NBSis the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (total for both semicircular ends.
DSLis the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASIis the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)
Note: If mild steel is present along with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on the concrete is reduced
due to the area of mild steel, and the strain in the concrete due to the prestressing is assumed to be shared with
the mild steel.
Figure: 17.3.j Allowable Horizontal Oblong Orientation
Figure: 17.3.k Allowable Vertical Oblong Orientation
Required for all types: Input for free length, number of sub-elements, axial efficiency and pile head fixity
F=FLNG H=KFIX S=NSUB A=AXEFF G=GAP C=KBCAPpile configuration line 1
or
E=ECAP H=KFIX S=NSUB A=AXEFF G=GAP C=KBCAP
Where
FLNGis the length of pile between the pile cap and the ground surface, the free length. It can be zero. If < 0, the
cap is analyzed as a buried cap.(not currently written to GUI)
ECAPis the elevation of the pile cap. This is assumed at the top of the pile heads, which is the same as the
centroid of the pile cap. Since the pile cap is modeled using a shell element, the pier column base, the pile
heads and the neutral axis of the pile cap all meet in the same location. This modeling does NOT account for the
thickness of he pile cap in the geometry of the system (it is included in the behavior).
KFIXis for the pile head fixity into the cap (INTEGER)
KFIX=0 for pinned pile head

KFIX=1 for fixed pile head
NSUBis the number of sub-elements the length of pile between the pile cap and the ground surface, Z, is to be
divided into for the non-linear analysis only. (INTEGER). Typical values for NSUB vary between 10 to 15 (NSUB
ensures adequate cracking and failure analysis over the large Z [free length] distances)
KBCAPis the option for soil-springs on the pile cap
KBCAP=0 for no springs
KBCAP=1 for 4 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on the sides in contact
with the soil
KBCAP=2 for 9 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on the sides in contact
with the soil
AXEFFis the axial efficiency. This is a reduction or increase of the axial force that the soil can support. (MUST be
> 0)(not currently written to GUI)
GAPis the gap between the bottom of the pile cap and the ground surface. Must be positive, a zero or negative
gap is ignored. Used in conjunction with the KBCAP parameter.
Input for the number of piles in the X and Y directions
NPX, NPY,NCX,NCYpile configuration line 2
Where
NPXis the # of piles in X direction (INTEGER)
NPYis the # of piles in Y direction (INTEGER)
NCX is the spacing X combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to GUI)
NCY is the spacing Y combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to GUI)
The piles are generated in the order given in the figure below:
Figure: 17.3.l Pile Numbering and Spacing
For Pile Spacing in the X-direction

The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the X direction. If only ONE value is given (DX1), then the
spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each distance between every row of piles. There must
be NPX-1 values given for uneven spacing.
DX1, DX2,...pile configuration line 3
Where
DX1is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)
DX2is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)
Pile Spacing in the Y-direction
The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the Y direction. If only one value is given (DY1), then the
spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each spacing value between every row of piles. There
must be NPY-1 values given for uneven spacing.
DY1, DY2,...pile configuration line 4
Where
DY1is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)
DY2is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)
Input for P-multipliers in the X-direction
P-multipliers used for the X direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles ( Figure: 17.3.m ). Multipliers
have to be specified for existing rows only. The program assigns the values in the correct order depending upon
the resultant loads in the X direction.
PYMX1, PYMX2, ...pile configuration line 5
Where
PYMX1is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMX2is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
Figure: 17.3.m P-multiplier definition

Input for P-multiplies in the Y-direction
P-multipliers used for the Y direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles. Multipliers have to be specified
for existing rows only. The program assigns the values in the correct order depending upon the resultant loads in
the Y direction.
PYMY1, PYMY2,...pile configuration line 6
Where
PYMY1is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMY2is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
17.3.2 Multiple Pile Sets

This section allows for the definition of multiple pile cross sections to be defined. This allows for different pile
cross sections in a group. Each cross section is referred to as type. A type of cross sections can be assigned to
any pile in the group. The following data tells which pile cross section type to use for each pile. Only types
greater than 1 (the default set to use) need to be specified.
PILESET
The next line can be repeated for as many pile types as need to be specified.
PILEx PSETx (repeat for each pile type greater than 1)
Where
PILEis the pile number to which the cross section type is applied.
PSETis the pile cross section set number to apply to this pile.
Example:
PILESET
12(pile # 1 of pile type #2)
17.3.3 Pile Batter Information

This input specifies the batter of the piles. There can be as many lines as required. Each line can use the Ni or Pi
method of applying the batter for multiple piles but not both. This section can be skipped if there are no battered
piles. NOTE: the self-weight of the pile is corrected for a battered pile.
BATTER
N1, N2, N3, X=XB, Y=YB
or
P=P1, P2, P3,...PN X=XB Y=YB
Where
N1is the battered pile number (zero for no more battered piles) for generation, it is the first pile number in
series (INTEGER)
N2is the last pile number in series. (defaults to N1) (INTEGER)(not written by GUI)
N3is the pile number increment in the series (defaults to 1) (INTEGER)(not written by GUI)
Piis a list of the piles to which the current batter is specified.(INTEGER)
XBis the battering in x-direction specified as a slope (Figure 8, example 0.33 in./in.) (REAL)
YB is the battering in the y-direction. (REAL)
Battered piles can be defined in one of several ways. The simplest approach is to list each pile that is battered
with its corresponding batter angle. This is of the form "N1 X=XB Y=YB". To decrease the number of input lines,
the pile numbers can be generated as in a FORTRAN do loop. The format "N1,N2,N3 X=XB" applies the given
batter to the piles starting at N1 and going to N2 with the increment of N3. Thus "5,14,3 X=0.25" applies an X
batter of H=3/L=12 (Figure 8) to the piles 5,8,11,14. Another method of applying batter to multiple piles is to list
all the pile numbers at which the batter is applied in the form "P=P1,P2,P3,... X=0.25". To apply the same batter
as before we could write "P=5,8,11,14 X=0.25".
Figure: 17.3.n Battered Pile with Slope Defined
17.3.4 Missing Pile Data
This data is used to specify any removed piles. If none are removed, skip this section.
MISSING
NMPIL
Where
NMPILis the number of missing piles from the pile group (INTEGER). This value may be zero.
Specify missing piles by x-row, y-row pile coordinate system. The coordinate system of the pile rows is shown in
Figure 6. One line is used for each missing pile. Repeat the following lines NMPIL times.
IXORD, IYORD
repeat NMPIL times
Where
IXORDis the x row location of missing pile (INTEGER)
IYORDis the y row location of missing pile (INTEGER)
Figure: 17.3.o Missing Pile Coordinate System Definition
17.3.5 Soil Information

This section is used to specify the soil properties.
SOIL
NSET=SOILSETS, L=NLAYERS, R=NLAYER1, NLAYER2, C=KCYC, S=NNSPT1, NNSPT2, W=WT,
O=OBURDEN, W=WFREQ, P=NDYFLG, B=TB, X=LS1, LS2, (all on one line)
Where
SOILSETSis the number of soilsets.
NLAYERSis the total number of soil layers to be given (INTEGER).
NLAYER1, ...is the number of layers in each soilset.
KCYCis for the cyclic response of soil (INTEGER).
=0 for a static soil response.
=N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number of events.
NNSPT1, ...is the number of points in the SPT sounding for each soil set (an integer value is to be provided per
soil set).
WTis the water table elevation used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table (in graphical interface).
OBURDENis the overburden option used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table (in graphical interface).
=0 Dont include overburden.
=1 Include overburden.
WFREQis the frequency of loading (rad/sec) (Used to create pseudo dynamic p-y curves from static curves for
static loads only)
NDYFLG = 0 nonreversible P-multipliers
= 1 reversible P-multipliers
= 2 sets P-multipliers to 1.0 after first peak
TBis the flag for user input at top and bottom soil layers
= 0 uniform properties specified for layer
= 1 properties specified for top and bottom of layer
LS1is the flag to indicate the lateral model Limestone (McVay) is present in the soil set and has at least one soil
layer, of any type, beneath it. This is written once per soil set. The 1 in LS1 indicates this flag belongs to soil set
1, and so on.
= 0 no layers exist beneath Limestone (McVay), or no layer of Limestone (McVay) exists.
= 1 at least one layer, of any soil type, exists beneath a layer of Limestone (McVay)
Soil property input lines (repeat NLAYER times)

This input specifies the soil properties. When using the default curves, soil layers are defined with a pair of lines.
The first line of the pair provides the soil properties at the top of the layer, the soil type, and depth of the layer. The
second line of each pair provides the soil properties at the bottom of the layer. Properties inside the layer are
found by linear interpolation between the top and bottom of the layer. A total of 2*NLAYER lines are required.
When using user defined curves, six lines are required per layer. Zero values must be given if that property is not
used by the soil model chosen.
, RK, , Cu or JS(Limestone) or K, 50 or qu(Limestone), 100 or Cavg, or K, G, , f, or Fsmax,
THICKNESS, LSM, ASM, TSM, SURFACE TYPE, qu (IGM) or fsmax, CORE RECOVERY, Em, Em/Ei, qt, C=JZ,;
D=FM, G=FS, E=ETOP, EBOT, B=PBOT, S=STYPE, A=TANDB, T=PTOP N=N50 L=SLR V=SWVS F=SFDF
M=NSMOD; J=RSDAMP line one
, RK, , Cu, 50 or qu (Limestone), 100 or Cavg, or K, G, ,f S=Stype, A=TANDB or Fsmax line two
Where
is the angle of internal friction (REAL)
RKis the soil modulus k (REAL)
is the total unit weight of the soil (REAL)
Cuis the undrained shear strength (REAL)
JS is the joint spacing
50 is the major principal strain @ 50% maximum deviator stress in a UU triaxial compression test (REAL)
or
qu(Limestone)is the unconfined compressive strength of limestone
100 is the major principal strain @ failure in a UU triaxial compression test (SOIL=3) (REAL)
or
Cavg is the average undrained shear strength for the soil layer (REAL) (SOIL=5 & 6)
or
K is the Dimensionless Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure (REAL) (SOIL=10)
Gis the shear Modulus of the soil (REAL)
is Poisson's ratio of the soil (REAL)
f is the vertical failure shear stress on pile-soil interface (REAL)
or
Fsmax is the Ultimate Side Friction (REAL) (SOIL=10)
THICKNESSis the thickness of the soil layer (REAL)
LSMis the Lateral Soil Model. It selects one of seven different lateral P-Y curves (INTEGER)
1 =Sand (O'Neill, 1984) requires , RK,
2 =Sand (Reese,Cox,Koop, 1974) requires , RK,
3 =Clay (O'Neill) requires Cu, 50, 100,
4 =Clay - Soft clay below water table; (Matlock, 1970) requires , Cu, 50
5 =Clay - Stiff clay below water table; (Reese, 1975) requires RK, , Cu, 50, Cavg
6 =Clay - Stiff clay above water table; (Reese, 1975) requires , Cu, 50, Cavg
7 =user defined P-Y curve for lateral soil response. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for
bottom of layer).
8 =Limestone (McVay)
9 =Limestone (McVay) No 2-3 Rotation
10 =Sand (API)
11 =Clay (API)
ASMis the axial soil model. There are 5 allowable axial soil models.
1 =Driven Pile (McVay et al, 1989) requires G, , f
2 =Drilled Shaft on Sand (ONeill et al, 1996) requires
3 =Drilled Shaft on Clay (ONeill et al, 1996) requires Cu
4 =Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material IGM (O'Neil) requires Surface Type, qu,Core Recovery, Em,
Em/Ei
5 =user defined T-Z curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for bottom of layer)
6 =Driven Pile Sand (API)

7 =Driven Pile Clay (API)
TSMis the torsional soil model.
1 =Hyperbolic Model requires Gi, f
2 =user defined T- curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for bottom of layer)
SURFACE TYPE is the bore hole surface type
ASM type 4
1 =Rough surface
2 =Smooth surface
qu(IGM)is the unconfined compressive strength for intermediate geomaterialASM type 4
or
fsmaxis the ultimate unit skin friction
Core Recoveryis the IGM core recovery in percentageASM type 4
Em is the IGM mass modulusASM type 4
Em/Ei is the ratio of IGM mass modulus to intact material modulusASM type 4
qtis the split tensile strength (used only rough surface and Florida Limestone) ASM type 4
JZ is the joint spacing (REAL)
FM is the fracture constant M
FS is the fracture constant S
ETOPis the elevation at the top of this soil layer
EBOTis the elevation at the bottom of this soil layer
PTOPis the elevation of the piezometric head at the top of the layer
PBOTis the elevation of the piezometric head at the bottom of the layer
STYPEis the soil layer type (used for graphical interface only)
0 =Cohesionless
1 =Cohesive
2 =Rock
N50is the number of cycles necessary to degrade the soil by 50%.
SLRis the rate of loading for slow cyclic loading.
SWVSis the shear wave velocity for each soil layer.
SFDFis the fully degraded soil factor.
NSMOD0 = (default) - no soil gap, soil loads and unloads on the same curve.
1 =gap model, soil forms a gap when unloading parallel to initial stiffness in either tension or compression.
RSDAMPis the force proportional soil damping factor (lateral only)
(e.g. 0.01 applies 1% of the lateral soil force as a damping force)
TANDBspecify both Top and Bottom soil layer properties for the select layer.
0 =Use one set of properties per layer
1 =Specify top and bottom properties
SPT Sounding values (values are provided per soil set)
This input lines consists of two input lines per soil set. Contained in the first input line are the elevations for which
SPT data are available, and the SPT values are supplied in the second input line. In the event that no SPT values
are supplied for a given soil set, then two lines with 0 values will be supplied.
SPTELEV1 SPTELEV2
SPTVALUE1 SPTVALUE2
:
Where
SPTELEV1 is the highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is available.
SPTELEV2 is the second highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is available.
SPTVALUE1 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV1.
SPTVALUE2 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV2.
User defined P-Y data - ONLY FOR LSM=7
User defined soils require TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the P-Y curve for the soil layer.)
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9, Y10
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10
Where
Yiis the ith Y value on the user specified P-Y curve.
Piis the ith P value on the user specified P-Y curve.
The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.
User defined T-Z data - ONLY FOR ASM=5
User defined axial soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the T-Z curve for the soil layer.)
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10
Where
Ziis the ith Z value on the user specified T-Z curve.
Tiis the ith T (axial stress) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
User defined T- data - ONLY FOR TSM=2
User defined torsional soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the T- curve for the soil layer)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
T1,T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10
Where
iis the ith value on the user specified T- curve.
Tiis the ith T (torque) value on the user specified T- curve.

Pile Tip Soil Data
After all layer data is supplied, the soil tip data is input
Gi , , Qult, 1
or
NSPT, 0, 0, 2
or
Cub, 0, 0, 3
or
Emtip, 0, 0, 4
or
phi, EndCond, Eb, 6
or
Cub, EndCond, 0, 7
Where
Gi is the shear modulus of the soil (TipSM =1)
NSPT is the uncorrected SPT value at the tip elevation (TipSM=2)
Cubis the undrained shear strength at the tip elevation (TipSM=3)
Emtip is the IGM mass modulus at the tip elevation (TipSM=4)
is the Poissons Ratio at tip elevation (TipSM=1)
Qult is the axial bearing failure load (force) acting on the pile tip (T.S.M.=1)
phiis the angle of internal friction (REAL)
EndCondis the pile end condition (pipe piles only)
0 = not plugged (pipe piles only)
1 = plugged (pipe piles only)
Ebis the ultimate unit end bearing
Tip Soil Model:1 = Driven Pile (Mcvay et al, 1989) requires Gi, , Qult
2 = Drilled Shaft on Sand (O'Neil et al, 1996) requiresNSPT
3 =Drilled Shaft on Clay (O'Neil et al, 1996) requires Cub
4 =Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material(O'Neil) requires Emtip
5 =user defined Q-Z curve. Requires two additional lines of input
6 = Driven Pile Sand (API), requires phi, EndCond (for pipe piles), and Eb
7 = Driven Pile Clay (API), requires Cub, EndCond (for pipe piles)
User defined Q-Z data - ONLY FOR TIP SOIL MODEL=5
The user defined tip soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8, Q9, Q10
Where
Ziis the ith Z value on the user specified Q-Z curve.

Qi is the ith Q value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
SPT data is defined as follows:
Two lines of data are provided for each soil set. The first line of data contains a number of elevations, where the
number of values provided is equal to to the previously defined value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set. The
second line of data contains a number of SPT blow counts, where the number of values provided is equal to the
previously defined value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set.
ELEV1, ...
NSPT,...
(the two lines of data above are repeated per soil set)
Where
ELEV1, ...is the line of data containing elevation values for soil set 1
NSPT1, ...is the line of data containing SPT blow counts for soil set 1
17.3.6 Multiple Soil Sets

Multiple soil sets are used to define unique soil profiles for a particular pile (or piles) in a pile group. In the input
file after the SOIL header,
SOIL
NSET= NSSET L= NLAYER C= KCYC S= NNSPT R= NSSEG1, NSSEG2, NSSEG3...
Where
NSSETis the number of soil sets
NLAYERis the total number of soil layers
KCYCis for cyclic response of soil
KCYC=0 for a static soil response
KCYC=N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number of events
NNSPTis the number of points in the SPT sounding
NSSEGxis the number of layers in soil set x (must specify for each soil set)
(Soil properties for each soil layer)
SOILSET
PILEx SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)
Where
PILExis the pile number to apply soil set x
SSETxis the soil set number (x)
Example:
SOILSET
12(pile # 1 of soil set # 2)
The following assumptions are made concerning the use of multiple soil sets:
Buoyancy calculations for the pile cap are based on the water table elevation for the first soil set.
Bearing capacity calculations for buried pile caps or pile caps in contact with the top soil layer are based on the
soil properties for the first soil set.
SOILGRID
PILEX PILEY SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)
Where
PILEX is the row number that the pile is located within.
PILEY is the column number that the pile is located within.
SSETx is the soil set number (x)

Example:
SOILGRID
1 1 2 (pile in row 1, column 1 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
17.3.7 Structural Information

INPUT FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF STRUCTURES
The following lines are for the differing types of structures available for analysis. This section can be skipped if no
structure is used. There are four different allowable types of structures. These are indicated by the following
headers: STRUCTURE, MAST, SOUND, RETAIN. The user can only select one type of structure.
The STRUCTURE header is for the standard pier structure
STRUCTURE
N=N1 S=S1, S2, S3... H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV D=CONT
A=NUMLM, [V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)... PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2
(R)... PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \
T=TC, CANT, TBEAMR=RH1, RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE (all one line)
Figure: 17.3.p Structure Geometry
Figure: 17.3.q Pier Cap Superelevation

When using the STRUCTURE header, a minimum of three material property lines are required. The first is for the
column, the second is the pier cap and the third is for the center section of the pier cap. After the three material
lines, any additional properties (NUMPR) and then additional members (NUMLM) should be given.
Superelevation is modeled by specifying a slope for the pier cap. When applying superelevation, the leftmost
column height remains the same while all other column heights are automatically adjusted by the program.
The BENT header is for the pile bent structure
BENT
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR
[V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)... PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2(R)...
PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \ T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=RH1,
RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE(all one line)
Figure: 17.3.r Pile Bent Geometry
When using the BENT header, a minimum of two material property lines are required. The first is for the pier cap
and the second is for the center section of the pier cap.
The MAST heading is used for high mast lighting/sign type structures.
MAST
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, TCANT, TBEAM R=RH1, RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT
(all one line)
Figure: 17.3.s Mast Geometry
When using the MAST header, a minimum of two material property lines are required. The first is for the column,
the second is for the mast/sign portion. Next comes any additional properties (NUMPR). Next comes two lines for
high mast line loading, as follows:
LC= MLL
LA= ALL
Where
MLL is the line loading applied to the mast in the positive Y direction. One value is written on this line per load
case.
ALL is the line loading applied to the arm in the positive Y direction. One value is written on this line per load
case.
Next, the data for the additional members (NUMLM) is written.
The SOUND header is for use when sound walls are required.
SOUND
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT
Figure: 17.3.t Sound Wall Geometry

The sound wall is modeled as a single cantilever in the center of the pile cap. The properties represent a given
width (S1) of the wall. One material property line is required when using the SOUND header. The properties
represent the single column. Following this line should be any additional properties (NUMPR) and then any
additional members (NUMLM).
This header is needed if retaining walls are used. The retaining wall is modeled by a cantilever representing a
section of the wall. The soil layers behind the wall must also be defined. The soil layers are used to apply load to
the structure.
RETAIN
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT
Figure: 17.3.u Retaining Wall Geometry
The following line defines the soil layers behind the wall
O=IOPTI S=ISURG L=NLAYE
line 1
Where
IOPTIis equal to 1 for pressure at rest
is equal to 2 for active case computed with Coulomb expression
ISURG is 0 for no surcharge
is 1 for uniform surcharge
is 2 for line load
is 3 for strip load
NLAYEis the number of layers
This line defines the basic soil geometry
A=THETA S=BETA H= HWATE G=GWATE Q=Q1, Q2, Q3 line 2
Where
THETAis the inclination of the back of wall measured clockwise from horizontal plane (degrees)
BETAis the inclination of ground slope behind wall measured counterclockwise from the horizontal plane
(degrees)
HWATE is the Zcoordinate of ground water level (reference iscenter of pile cap)
GWATEis the unit weight of water
Q1, Q2, Q3are parameters for surcharge definition
If ISURG = 0Q1, Q2, Q3 are not used
If ISURG = 1Q1 = uniform surcharge
If ISURG = 2Q1 = line load intensity
Q2 = Horizontal distance of line load from back of wall
If ISURG = 3Q1 = Intensity of load
Q2 = Horizontal distance of load from back of wall
Q3 = Width of strip load
Soil Layer Property Lines (one line for each layer, NLAY)
T=THICK S=NSLAY P=COHES, PHI, DELTA G=GAMMA, GASAT
(one line per layer, the bottom layer being layer #1)
Where
THICKis the layer thickness
NSLAYis the number of sub-layers in which the layer will be divided
COHES is the cohesion of the soil
PHIis the friction angle of soil (degrees)
DELTAis the angle of friction soil/wall (degrees)
GAMMAis the unit weight of the soil
GASATis the saturated unit weight of the soil
One material property line is required when using the RETAIN header. Then any additional properties and extra
members.
The definition of the parameters for all structures are given below.
Where
N1is # of columns of the bridge bent supported on the pile group (INTEGER)
S1, S2, S3is spacing of the pier columns. For retaining walls and sound walls, S1 is the wall width. (REAL)
H1is height of the pier columns (REAL,)
O1is offset of the pile cap from the column (REAL)
C1is # of column nodes (INTEGER)
B1is # of pier cap nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
B2is # of pier cap cantilever nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NPAD(L)is the number of bearing locations (left row of bearings)
POFF(L)is the offset from the first bearing location (left row of bearings)
PSPCx(L)is the bearing location spacing value (left row of bearings)
NPAD(R)is the number of bearing locations (right row of bearings)
POFF(R)is the offset from the first bearing location (right row of bearings)
PSPCx(R)is the bearing location spacing value (right row of bearings)
PUNF(L)is the uniform bearing location spacing (left row of bearings)
PUNF(R)is the uniform bearing location spacing (right row of bearings)
PUNFis uniform spacing between bearing locations, same for all locations (REAL)
For a single row of bearing locations, the left and right row parameters should be the same.
W1is cantilever length of top of bent (REAL)
CC is the cantilever flag, where a value of 1 means the model has cantilevers, and a value of 0 means the model
does not have cantilevers.
NUMLMis number of extra beam elements (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NUMPRis number of extra beam properties (INTEGER)
TCis # of segments for tapered column (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered columns. This overrides C1
TCANTis # of segments for tapered cantilevers (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered cantilevers. This
overrides B2
TBEAM is the number of segments for tapered beams (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered beams
NLOPTselects the non-linear option for the pier structure analysis
NLOPT=1 for linear material
NLOPT=2 for nonlinear material
NLOPT=3 for linear material where interaction diagram are generated
RH1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
RH2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
RH3is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
KFLOODis the flag to tell if the column (if under the water table) is flooded or not. If flooded, the buoyancy will
use the net area. If not flooded, it will use the gross area (net=area-void).
SPELEVis the pier cap superelevation slope (+ or -) beginning at leftmost pier column. Expressed as a decimal
(not a percent).
CONTis the bridge span continuity option (over the pier)
0 for discontinous spans (does not transfer moment)(default)
1 for continous spans (transfers moment)
NROWis the number of bearing rows on the pier cap

1 for a single bearing row
2 for two rows of bearings (default)
Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the RH1, RH2, and RH3 properties are missing (zero by
default) then a linear taper will be used.
The bearing locations are specified based on the following figure.
Figure: 17.3.v Positioning Two Rows of Bearings

MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES
The next lines specify the cross-sectional properties of the pier column and pier cap. A total of 1,2 or 3 + NUMPR
properties (extra beam members) are required. The material properties are input beginning with material # 2 (
Figure: 17.3.v ) onward: pier columns, pier cap, center pier cap ( Figure: 17.3.v ), and extra beams, respectively
for a general pier structure. The extra beam ( Figure: 17.3.v ) properties have the same format and may be given
individually or lumped together. To simulate no connection between piers, use very small values for I, E, G, J,
and A for the center pier cap material ( Figure: 17.3.v ). For linear properties, use the following single lines for
each property.
Linear Property Line
L=LEN E=E1 I=I3,I2 J=J1 G=G1 A=A1 W=WIDTH D=DIA S=SW K=SHAPE
Where
I3is the Moment of Inertia for axis 3 of the frame element (REAL)
I2is the Moment of Inertia for axis 2 of the frame element (REAL)
J1is Torsional Moment of Inertia of the frame element (REAL)
A1is Area of c/s of the frame element (REAL)
G1is Shear Modulus of the frame element (REAL)

LENis the component length. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future program expansion.
WIDTHis the section width. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future program expansion.
SHAPEis the cross-section shape.
1: Circular
2: Rectangular
3: H-Pile
4: Oblong
Nonlinear property lines (Same as for Piles)
For nonlinear structures with interaction diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)
These lines are almost identical to the input for the piles. See pile input for definitions of terms.
For the default stress strain curves (MATOPT=1)
M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES(2), ES(3), ES(4) K=KTYPE
or
For user specified stress strain curves (MATOPT=2)
M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4) K=KTYPE
Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2

NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,,
line 1
EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,,line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(1) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= yline 2
Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(2) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,,line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(3) = 1
S3=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=y
line 1
line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(4) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=y
line 2
For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and KTYPE=2
W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV N=ISTNOPT P=PREST S=SW
For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piers used with NLOPT=2, KTYPE=2, and
ISTNOPT= 2
NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1
repeat NGRPS times
For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1
NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICON, T=TR HPI=IHPILE \
BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI]
repeat NLAY times
One of the next four lines is necessary for ICON ? 1(hoop or spiral steel is present)
FYH=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS N=NHOOP
or
FYH=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS D=DHOOP
or
FYS=FYSPI SP=SPIRS N=NSPI
or
FYS=FYSPI SP=SPIRS D=DSPI
For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:
OR=ORIENTline 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT] line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections
For Nonlinear Analysis of Bullet Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and KTYPE=2
R=ORIENT W=WIDTH D=DEPTH T=VTYPE V=DV B=BV S=SW N=ISTNOPT P=PREST (line 1)
NG=NGRPS BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE (line 2)
Figure: 17.3.w Material Property Identification
Figure: 17.3.x Tapered column only - material numbers
Figure: 17.3.y Tapered cantilever only - material numbers
Figure: 17.3.z Tapered column and cantilever material numbers
EXTRA MEMBER LINES ( Only Required if NUMLM 0 )

The next set of lines define any extra beams used in the superstructure. NUMLM lines are required to define
node numbers and material numbers for each extra beam. The nodes connecting the extra beams must be in the
pile cap or in the Pier. The material number must correspond to one defined in material properties. The user has
the option of using any previously defined material property (ex. # 3, Pier Cap properties) for the extra beams or
defining new ones (material # 5, 6, etc.) in increasing sequential order.
INODE, JNODE M=MATNUM L=LOC T=TYPE
Where
INODEis the first node of the extra beam
JNODEis the end node of the extra beam
MATNUMis the material number to use for the element
LOC is the location of the extra member in the model. A value of 1 means
the extra member connects column nodes, a value of 2
means the extra member connects pier cap nodes, and a value of 3 means the
extra member connects pile nodes.
TYPE is the cross section type code. A value of 0 means a pier type, and a
value of 1 means a pile type.
TAPERED COLUMN AND CANTILEVER SECTIONS
Columns and Cantilever Pier Cap sections can be set to tapered (non-prismatic) by setting TC and/or TCANT to
values greater than 0. When material properties, linear or non-linear, are set for tapered sections, 2 sets of
properties [base and top (tip)] are required instead of the one set required for prismatic sections. Figure: 17.3.y
and Figure: 17.3.z and sample inputs, below, illustrate the addition of tapered column and cantilever properties
to the input file.
Figure: 17.3.aa Addition of tapered Column properties

When tapered column properties are set, the Column Base properties are set on Material Property Line #1, and
the Column Top properties are set on Material Property Line #2. All subsequent structure properties are set on
one line # higher than as specified in MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES.
A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered columns is given below. The structure also has
two extra members, with one extra member property. For reference purposes, the material property lines are
numbered and labeled in italics.
STRUCTURE
N= 1 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A= 2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0

1I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. a)
2I= 900.0,900.0 J= 4000.0 A= 400.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. b)
3I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
5I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
Material Property Lines (MPLs) 1 and 2 list properties for the Column base and top, respectively. MPL 3 lists
properties for the Pier Cap, and MPL 4 lists properties for the Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same values as
Pier Cap properties). MPL 5 lists the extra members properties.
Figure: 17.3.ab Addition of tapered Cantilever properties

If the Cantilevers are prismatic [TCANT = 0], Cantilever properties default to the Pier Cap Material properties. For
a tapered Cantilever Pier Cap, the Cantilever Base properties are set on Material Property Line #4, and the
Cantilever Tip properties are set on Material Property Line #5, unless tapered column sections have also been
set (see example below), in which case the properties are set on Material Property Lines #s 5 and 6,
respectively. Any extra member properties are set on two line #s higher (or three line #s higher, if columns are
tapered as well) than as specified in MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES.
A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered cantilevers is given below. The structure also
has two extra members, with one extra member property. For reference purposes, the material property lines are
numbered and labeled in italics.
STRUCTURE
N= 2 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A= 2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0
1I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0

2I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
3I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4I= 400.0,400.0 J= 1200.0 A= 100.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. c)
5I= 300.0,300.0 J= 1000.0 A= 90.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. d)
6I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
Material Property Line (MPL) 1 lists properties for the Column. MPL 2 lists properties for the Pier Cap, and MPL 3
lists properties for the Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same values as Pier Cap properties). MPLs 4 and 5 list
the Cantilever Pier Cap base and tip properties, respectively. MPL 6 lists the extra members properties.
For the output, the material properties are listed starting with property #2. Property #2 is for the column. If the
column is tapered, the base is property #2 plus as many of the next ones required to get one property for each
section in the column (TC). Next comes the beam property, then the center beam. If the cantilever is tapered,
then TCANT properties will be next. Finally only additional (extra members) properties will be last.
Hammerhead Piers with Parabolic Tapered Pier Caps
Under the STRUCTURE header.
STRUCTURE
"N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM,
NUMPR [V=NPAD, POFF, PSPC1, PSPC2, .... or P= NPAD, PUNF, POFF]
T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=H1, H2, H3 J=NLOPT KSHAPE (all one line)
Where
H1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
H2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
H3 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the H1, H2, and H3 properties are missing (zero by default)
then a linear taper will be used.
Figure: 17.3.ac Parabolic Cantilever Taper
17.3.8 Column Information

This section allows the user to perform a biaxial bending analysis for a single column. This is done internally by
taking a single pile and treating it as a single column. The single column has the ability to put springs at the top
and bottom of the column. It also allows loads at the top and bottom. The column properties are input as normal
pile properties. No load or structure inputs are used.
A total of five lines are required in addition to the pile property data.
COLUMN
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6
top of column
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 bottom of column

L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZtop of column
L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZbottom of column
Where
S1is the tip spring resistance in the global X direction
S2is the tip spring resistance in the global Y direction
S3is the tip spring resistance in the global Z direction
S4is the rotational spring resistance about the global X-axis
S5is the rotational spring resistance about the global Y-axis
S6is the rotational spring resistance about the global Z-axis
LFis the first load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied in.
LLis the last load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied in.
LIis the increment for the generation sequence between load cases LI and LL.
FXis the magnitude of the load in X direction
FYis the magnitude of the load in Y direction
FZis the magnitude of the load in Z direction
MXis the magnitude of the moment about X axis
MYis the magnitude of the moment about Y axis
MZis the magnitude of the moment about Z axis
The first S= line is for the top of the column. The second S= line is for the bottom of the column. The first F= line is
for the top of the column. The second F= is for the bottom of the column.
17.3.9 Concentrated Nodal Loads
These are load input lines. As many lines as needed can be used. One line must be supplied for each loaded
joint and each load condition. This can be skipped if no concentrated nodal loads are applied. This can happen
in the case of mast or sound walls where wind load is applied or in retaining walls where soil pressure is
applied.
Note, torsion in the pile cap can only be applied where piles are located.
In the input file after the LOAD header,
LOAD
NF, NL, NI, L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, D=DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ, T=TYPE (one line per nodal load)
Where
NFis the starting node number
NLis the ending node number(not available in GUI)
NIis the node numbering increment(not available in GUI)
DX is the force in the global X-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DY is the force in the global Y-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DZ is the force in the global Z-direction (only written for applied displacement)
RX is the moment about the global X-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RY is the moment about the global Y-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RZ is the moment about the global Z-axis (only written for applied displacement)
LRFD Loads:
TYPE =
DCDead load of components
DDDowndrag
DWDead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EHHorizontal earth pressure load
EVVertical earth pressure load
ESEarth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
CR Creep
SHShrinkage
LLLive load
IMImpact
CEVehicular centrifugal force
BRVehicular braking force
PLPedestrian live load
LSLive load surcharge
WAWater Load
WSWind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
VP Vertical Wind Pressure
VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FRFriction
TUUniform temperature
TGTemperature gradient
SESettlement
EQEarthquake
ICIce load
CTVehicular collision force
CVVessel collision force
LFD Loads:
TYPE =
DDead load
LLLive load (AASHTO Type "L")
IMImpact (AASHTO Type "I")
EEarth pressure
BBuoyancy
WSWind load on structure (ASSHTO Type "W")
LFLongitudinal force from live load
CFCentrifugal force
RRib shortening
SShrinkage
TTemperature
EQEarthquake
SFStream flow pressure
ICEIce pressure
17.3.10 Bearing Location Loads
The following information is used by piers with bearings locations. The information under the LOADBP header
describes the concentrated loads applied to the bearing locations.
LOADBP
PADNUM L= LC F= FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ T=TYPE B=DIR (one line per nodal load)
Where
PADNUM is the bearing number
DIRis the bearing row ("L" for left or "R" for right)
:
17.3.11 Wind Load Generation

The following information is used by the wind load generator in the graphical interface:
WIND
N=NMWIND A=ANGLE1, ANGLE2, ANGLE3, ANGLE4, ANGLE5
S=SSAREA, SSWIND, SSWARM C= CPARET, CPAREL, CPWIND
P=CLARET, CLAREL, CLWIND, CLWARM(Wind load on structure--All on one line)
And
V=LTLENG, LTWIND, LTFARM (Wind load on live load)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 0 degrees)
Where
NMWINDis the number of wind load cases (WSx and WLx count together as one case)
A maximum of 5 wind load cases can be generated automatically.
ANGLExis the skew angle of the wind in degrees measured from the transverse axis.
(angles can vary between 0 and 75, in increments of 15 degrees)
SSAREAis the transverse area of superstructure
SSWIND is the transverse wind intensity on superstructure (not currently used)
SSWARMis the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to the
center of gravity of the superstructure
CPARETis the transverse area of the pier cap
CPARELis the longitudinal area of the pier cap
CPWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the pier cap (not currently used)
CLARETis the transverse area of the columns
CLARELis the longitudinal area of the columns
CLWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the columns (not currently used)
CLWARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the base of the columns to the
center of gravity of the columns. This parameter is computed by the program for
Pile Bent models (using the water table or ground surface elevation).
LTLENGis the transverse length of the live load
LTWIND is the transverse wind intensity on the live load (not currently used)
LTFARMis the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to the
center of gravity of the live load
SSWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle)
SSWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle)
PIERWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the pier (at each angle)
PIERWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the pier (at each angle)
LTWIND is the transverse wind line load on the live load (at each angle)
LLWIND is the longitudinal wind line load on the live load (at each angle)
Parameters with a strikethrough font are not currently used. These parameters were used by the previous wind
load generator (based on the AASHTO-LRFD 1997 Interim Revisions).
Note: This section must end with a blank line.
The wind load generator calculations are as follows:
Wind Load on Structure (WS)
l
Transverse load (per bearing location), Ftrans
Longitudinal load (per bearing location), Flong
Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring model
Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), Mx
Note: Since the wind load on the column is applied at the centroid (and not the pier cap), ratio of
clwarm/colheight is used to reduce the wind load in order to apply it at the level of the pier cap.
Wind Load on Live Load (WL)

l
Transverse load (per bearing location), Ftrans
Longitudinal load (per bearing location), Flong
Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring model
Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), Mx
17.3.12 Spring Properties

This set of lines specifies discrete stiffness springs, which may be placed on the pier columns, pier cap, pile cap,
and/or piles/shafts. These lines may be skipped if there are no springs.
SPRING
NS
Where
NSis the number of spring elements (INTEGER) (zero identifies no springs)
A total of NS lines, one for each spring is required to define the spring stiffness.
If NS=0, no stiffness lines necessary.
NNS =KX, KY, KZ, KXX, KYY, KZZ

Where
NNis the node the spring element is connected to(INTEGER)
KXis the stiffness of the spring in X direction (REAL)
KYis the stiffness of the spring in Y direction (REAL)
KZis the stiffness of the spring in Z direction (REAL)
KXXis the stiffness of the spring for rotation about X axis (REAL)
KYYis the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Y axis (REAL)
KZZis the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Z axis (REAL)
LC, SFlag1 line is used for each load case
Where
LCis the specified Load Case
SFlagis the flag to include Spring values with specified Load Case
0 = do not include springs
1 = include springs
17.3.13 Pile Cap Properties

These two lines specify the properties for the pile cap which is identified as material # 1 in Figure F26-a.
CAP
E=E1 U=U1 T=T1 S=WGT O=SWGT
Where
E1is Young's modulus of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
U1is Poisson's ratio of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
T1is Thickness of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
WGT is the unit weight of the pile cap (REAL).
SWGT is the unit weight of the soil on the pile cap (REAL).
Specify thickened cap elements:
Additional lines can be input directly after the cap property line to specify that a particular element have a
different thickness than the one specified above. This can be done using the following line (repeated as many
times as necessary):
ROW, COL T=THICK, SELTHK D=DTHCK
Where
ROWis the row number of the pile cap element
COLis the column number of the pile cap element.
THICKis the thickness to use for the stiffness calculations for this element
SELTHKis the thickness to use for the self-weight calculations.
DTHCK is the drawing thickness used to draw the pile cap thickness in the 3D Edit window and 3D Bridge
Window. This thickness does not affect the analysis.
17.3.14 Removed Pier Cap Element

Pier cap elements can be removed (similar to pile cap elements). The elements can be removed to create
separate pier structures. The following data is required:
RMBEAM
NSPAN, NELEM
Where
NSPANis the span number in which the element is to be removed
NELEMis the element number in the span to remove
17.3.15 Bearing Connection
The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information under the PADBC header
describes the bearing location to superstructure connectivity. This information is provided per pier.
PADBC
L=LEFTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET
Or
R=RIGHTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET
Where
LEFTPADis the bearing location index number in left row of bearing locations
RIGHTPADis the bearing location index number in right row of bearing locations
FXis the fixity for the local x-direction
FYis the fixity for the local y-direction
FZis the fixity for the local z-direction
FRXis the fixity for rotation about the local x-axis
FRYis the fixity for rotation about the local y-axis
FRZis the fixity for rotation about the local z-axis
For all six directions: 0 for released (free), 1 for constrained
Values greater than 1 indicate the custom connection material property number. This custom connection is
described by a load-displacement relationship. See PADPROP header.
OFFSETis the bearing offset (measured from the centerline of the pier cap to the center of the bearing). This
value must be greater than zero when two rows of bearings are used.
For a single row, the left and right bearing parameters should be the same.
Figure: 17.3.ad Bearing Connection Layout for One and Two Rows
17.3.16 Point Mass

This section allows the addition of point masses to a structure.
MASS
The next line specifies the mass to be added to a node for each of the six global directions. There is one header
per pier.
NS,NF,NI M=MX,MY,MZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ
Where
NSis the starting node to add the mass to.
NFis the final node to add the mass to.(not written by GUI)
NIis the increment to generate additional node numbers at between NS and NF at which to add mass. (not
written by GUI)
MX\
MY
MZ
} are the mass values for the translational and rotational X,Y,Z directions
MRX |
MRY |
MRZ/
17.3.17 Point Dampers

This section allows the addition of point dampers to a structure. Point dampers are not allowed for modal
analysis.
DAMP
The next line specifies the dampers to be added to a node for each of the six global directions. There is one
header per pier.
NS,NF,NI C=MX,MY,MZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ
Where
NSis the starting node to add the dampers to.
NFis the final node to add the dampers to.
NIis the increment to generate additional node numbers at between NS and NF at which to add dampers.
MX\
MY
MZ
} are the dampers values for the translational and rotational X,Y,Z directions
MRX |
MRY |
MRZ/
17.3.18 Dynamic Load Function Application

LOADYN
The next lines specify the load function and its point of application. There is one header per pier.
There can be as many of these lines as required to specify all loaded nodes and DOF for this load function. If the
F= portion is NOT specified, ALL active DOF will be loaded.
NF,NL,NI L=LCN F=L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6 M= MODEXF D=FUNC
Where
NFis the first node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NLis the last node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NIis the increment for generating node numbers between NF and NL for which the DOF specification is used. NL
and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
LCNis the load case number
Liis the state at which the ith DOF can have, either loaded or NO load. Therefore Li can have ONLY the two
following values;
Fi = L is for loaded.
Fi = N is for NO load.
MODEXTis the flag for modifying the external force (0-no, 1-yes). The flag works in conjunction with a userdefined subroutine in the program that modifies the external forcing function at each time step in
response to an external excitation.
FUNCis the load function number to apply (default is 1)
17.3.19 Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model

This header RETAIN_SUR would only be written for retaining walls that have some form of surcharge (line, strip,
uniform) applied.
RETAIN_SUR
L= 1 R= 0
L= 2 R= 0
:
where
The line is repeated for each load case.
L is load case
R = 0 corresponds to off
R = 1 corresponds to on
18 Post Processing Formats

1. Post Processing File Formats
2. Multiple Pier Generation
3. Pier to Superstructure Connectivity
4. Geometry and Control Information
5. Pile Data
6. Axial Forces for Beam Elements
7. Maximum Moments in Beam Elements
8. Stresses of Pile Cap
9. Capacity Information
10. Shear and Moment Results
11. Analysis Convergence Information
12. Mode Shape and Frequency Information (Response Spectrum Analysis)
13. AASHTO Load Combination Results
18.1 POST PROCESSING FILE FORMATS

FB-MULTIPIER writes many results files that are used by the post processing plotting program to display the
results. The following is a list of the files and their contents. NOTE: Each list constitutes a sequential record in the
file. Unless otherwise noted, the FORTRAN convention of variables I-N are four byte integers, (A-H,O-Z) are four
byte reals. Numbers appended to the file extensions indicate the pier numbers (i.e. PLF2 is the Geometry and
Control Information for Pier #2).
*.MPRMultiple Pier Generation
*.PLSPier to Superstructure Connectivity
*.PLFGeometry and Control Information
*.PILPile Data
*.AXLAxial Forces for Beam Element
*.MOMMaximum Moments in Beam Element
*.STRStresses of Pile Cap
*.SLICapacity Information
*.VMD Shear and Moment Results
*.NCVAnalysis Convergence Information
*.ASH AASHTO Load Combination Results
*.EIGMode Shape and Frequency Information
18.2 Multiple Pier Generation

File: name.MPR
This file contains information for generating multiple piers and bridge spans.
numPiers
Where
numPiersis the number of bridge piers
pierCoordX, pierCoordY, pierRot
Where
pierCoordXis the nodal x-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierCoordYis the nodal y-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierRotis the rotation angle about global z-axis (for that pier)
18.3 Pier to Superstructure Connectivity
File: name.PLS
This file contains information for the bearing row to bridge span connectivity (per pier).
nodesLeft, nodesRight, spanNodeLeft, spanNodeRight, spanNodeLeftHeight, spanNodeRightHeight
Where
nodesLeftis the number of connection nodes for the left bearing row
nodesRightis the number of connection nodes for the right bearing row
spanNodeLeftis the connector node number for the begin of bridge span
spanNodeRightis the connector node number for the end of bridge span
spanNodeLeftHeightis the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the begin of bridge span
spanNodeRightHeightis the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the end of bridge span
(If there is a left row of bearings i.e. nodesLeft > 0)
(nodesLeft number of lines)
padLeftCoordX, padLeftCoordY, padLeftCoordZ
Where
padLeftCoordXis the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordYis the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordZis the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node
(If there is a right row of bearings i.e. nodesRight > 0)
(nodesRight number of lines)
padRightCoordX, padRightCoordY, padRightCoordZ
Where
padRightCoordXis the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordYis the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordZis the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node

(one line per connector element)
nElem, padLeftConnI, padLeftConnJ
Where
nElemis the connector element number
padLeftConnIis node number at the I-end of the connector element
padLeftConnJis node number at the J-end of the connector element
(one line per connector element)
nElem, padRightConnI, padRightConnJ
Where
nElemis the connector element number
padRightConnIis node number at the I-end of the connector element
padRightConnJis node number at the J-end of the connector element
Nodal displacement information (per load case)

Nodal modeshape information (per eigenvector). Response Spectrum Analysis only.
(nodesLeft number of lines)
PHIX_L, PHIY_L, PHIZ_L, PHIRX_L, PHIRY_L, PHIRZ_L
Where
PHIX_Lis the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_Lis the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_Lis the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_Lis the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_Lis the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_Lis the connector node rotation about the z-axis
(nodesRight number of lines)
PHIX_R, PHIY_R, PHIZ_R, PHIRX_R, PHIRY_R, PHIRZ_R
Where
PHIX_Ris the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_Ris the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_Ris the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_Ris the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_Ris the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_Ris the connector node rotation about the z-axis
18.4 Geometry and Control Information

File: name.PLF
This is the main structure geometry and control information file. The contents are as follows:
Npset
Is the number of pile sets for the piles.
Nseg1, nseg2, nseg3, .. nsegN
Where
nsegiis the number of cross section properties per pile set. There are npset numbers written.
ktype, dia, width, depth
There is one record for each segment. (nseg records)
Ktypeis the shape of the section (1=round, 2=square/rectangular, 3=Hpile)
Diais the effective diameter of the cross section
Widthis the width of the section
Depthis the depth of the section
Name
Is the problem file name (character*256)
NUMNP, nstr, kbent
Numnpis the number of nodes in the structure, including pile cap and the tops of the piles.
Nstris not used.
kbentis the model type
kbent = -1: Pile and Cap Only & Single Pile
kbent = 1: General Pier
kbent = 3: High Mast / Lighting Sign
kbent = 4: Retaining Wall
kbent = 5: Sound Wall
kbent = 6: Stiffness Formulation
kbent = 7: Pile Bent
kbent = 8: Column Analysis
ncol, NCL V, NCANTN, NADMEM, NADPRP, NCLNOD, NBMNOD, NBPAD, kmetr

ncolis the number of columns in the structure
nclvis the
ncantnis the number of cantilever nodes
nadmemis the number of additional members
nadprpis the number of additional properties

nclnodis the number of node in the columns
nbmnodis the number of nodes in the pier cap
nbpad is the number of bearing locations
kmetris the metric flag (0=english,1=meters/KN, 2=mm,KN)
space, height, offset, CANTIL, PADOFF

These are double precision.
Spaceis the spacing between columns
Heightis the height of the columns
Offsetis the distance from x=0 to start the structure.
Cantilis the length of the cantilevers
Padoffis the offset from the left column where the first bearing location starts.
X, Y, Z
There are numnp records. These are the X, Y and Z coordinates of the structure nodes (Not including the piles
below the pile cap).
Idx, idy, idz, idrx, idry, idrz
There are numnp records. There are the structural DOF for the problem. They are for the x, y, z and then rotation
x, y and z.
There are three sets of the following. For the beam type elements (mtype=3), for the shell elements (mtype=6)
and for the spring elements (mtype=8).
Mtype, nume
Mtypeis the element type.
Numeis the number of elements of this type.
NELM, NND, (LT(J), J=1, NND) (this line is repeated nume times)
Nelmis the element number
Nndis the number of nodes saved for this element
Lt()is the list of node numbers for this element.
DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ
There are numnp records. These are the displacements in the X, Y and Z and the rotations in the X, Y and Z
directions for the structure nodes (Not including the piles below the pile cap).
MAXIMUMS
lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp ,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy
lmsh2is the load case with the max pile shear-2
lpsh2is the pile number with the max pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the max pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the max pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the max pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the max pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the max pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the max pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the max axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the max axial force
lmtoris the load case with the max torsion
lptor is the pile number with the max torsion
lmsaxis the load case with the max soil axial force
lpsaxis the pile number with the max soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the max soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the max soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the max soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the max soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the max soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the max soil torsion
lmdizis the load case with the max pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the max pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the max pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the max pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the max pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the max pile y-displacement
MINIMUMS
lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy
lmsh2is the load case with the min pile shear-2
lpsh2is the pile number with the min pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the min pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the min pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the min pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the min pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the min pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the min pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the min axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the min axial force

lmtoris the load case with the min torsion
lptor is the pile number with the min torsion
lmsaxis the load case with the min soil axial force
lpsaxis the pile number with the min soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the min soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the min soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the min soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the min soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the min soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the min soil torsion
lmdizis the load case with the min pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the min pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the min pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the min pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the min pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the min pile y-displacement
18.5 Pile Data

File: name.PIL
This file contains the pile information data.
NUMPN, NUMLC
Numpnis the total number of pile nodes
Numlcis the number of load cases or combinations written to results file.
NPX, NPY, nmpil, npil, kfix, nplnod

Npxis the grid in the X direction
Npyis the grid in the Y direction
Nmpilis the number of missing piles.
Npilis the number of actual piles
Kfixis the flag for pile head fixity (0=pinned, 1=fixed)
Nplnodis the number of nodes in a pile (including the top)
Mpilx, mpily (There are nmpil records)

Mpilxis the x index for the missing pile
Mpilyis the y index for the missing pile.
Dxsp1, dxsp2, dxsp3, (npx-1 values)
These are the pile spacings for the X direction.

Dysp1, dysp2, dysp3, (npy-1 values)
These are the pile spacings for the y direction.
The following line is written ONCE FOR EACH PILE in the system (NPIL times)
(ipp(i), i=1, nplnod-1)
This index tells which cross section to use for each segment of pile.
(numpset(I), I=1, npil)
This index tells which pile set number to use for each pile in the system.
Ndfrln
This is the number of nodes in the free length (above the ground surface). This matches nsub in the input file.
The next line is written for EACH PILE. (npil times).
TPL, GSE
Tplis the total pile length.
Gseis the height above the ground of the pile cap
Batx, baty, batl (There are npil records)
Batxis the slope in the x direction for a battered element.
Batyis the slope in the y direction for a battered element.
Batlis the actual element segment length.
DZ, DX, DY, RZ, RX, RY (There are nplnod*npil records)

There are numpn records. These are the displacements in the X,y and Z and the rotations in the X,Y,and Z
directions for the pile nodes.
18.6 Axial Forces for Beam Elements

File: name.AXL
This file contains the axial forces for each beam type element (structure and pile).
Numtrs, numfrm
Numtrsis the number of truss type members (=0)
Numfrmis the number of bending type members.
The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each load case.
Mtype, nume
Mtypeis the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Numeis the number of elements
Axial
Axialis the axial force for the member for the appropriate load case.
18.7 Maximum Moments in Beam Elements

File: name.MOM
This file contains the maximum moment forces for each beam type element (structure and pile).
numfrm
Numfrmis the number of bending type members.
The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each load case.
Mtype, nume
Mtypeis the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Numeis the number of elements
Rmom
Rmomis the maximum moment in the member for the appropriate load case.
18.8 Stresses of Pile Cap

File: name.STR
This file contains the shell element stresses for the pile cap. There are eight records per load case. Each record
contains eight values per element times the number of cap elements. The eight records represent:
Mxx, Myy, Mxy, Sxz, Syz, Sy, Sx, Sxy
Therefore, the loops are:
Do I=1,numlc
Do j=1,8 (the eight sets of results)
Read() (stress(k), k=1, 8* #elements)
Enddo
Enddo
18.9 Capacity Information

File: name.SLI
This file contains the capacity information for each cross section used in the structure.
Nxpile, nxstruc
Nxpileis the number of cross section in the piles
Nxstrucis the number of cross sections in the structure.
idflgis the flag to tell if cross section capacity information (for interaction diagrams) exists inthe file. One flag is
written for each cross section.
=1, information is not present
=0, information is present
The next set of records is repeated for each cross section for which capacity information exists.
Nlcvis the number of contour slices for this cross section
PTUV, YPC, ZPC, YPT. ZPT
Ptuvis the ultimate axial tension strength
Ypcis the y shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Zpcis the z shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Ypt is the y shift for the plastic centroid (tension)
Zpt is the z shift for the plastic centroid (tension)
(PNC(J)J=1, 13) (repeated nlcv times)
pncis the table of capacity results. Where the values are:
pnc(1) = * Compression capacity
pnc(2) = * moment capacity about local 3 axis (M1)
pnc(3) = * moment capacity about negative local 2 axis (M2)
pnc(4) = * moment capacity about negative local 3 axis (M3)
pnc(5) = * moment capacity about local 2 axis (M4)
pnc(6) = 1
pnc(7) = 1
pnc(8) = 2
pnc(9) = 2
pnc(10)=3
pnc(11)=3
pnc(12)=4
pnc(13)=4
The and s are used as a pair for the following capacity equation:
If the compression is in the 1st quadrant (+2,+3) then use M1, M2, 1, 1
If the compression is in the 2nd quadrant (-2,+3) then use M3, M2, 2, 2
If the compression is in the 3rd quadrant (-2,-3) then use M3, M4, 3, 3
If the compression is in the 4th quadrant (+2,-3) then use M1, M4, 4, 4
18.10 Shear and Moment Results

File: name.VMD
This file contains the bending element shears, moments and capacities for the pile and structure elements. This
is a direct access file (A fixed record size) of 56 bytes. There is one set of records for all elements in the piles and
structure. The number of elements (records per set) is:
number of records per load case = NPEL + NUMFRM
where NPEL=NPIL*(nplnod-1).
Note that the numbers NPIL and NPLNOD can be found in the name.PIL file and NUMFRM can be found in the
name.AXL file. The set of results is repeated for each load case. Each record contains fourteen values per
element. The fifteen values represent:
W, V2I, V3I, V2J, V3J, XMI2, XMI3, XMJ2, XMJ3, XMMAX, XML, FRATI, FRATJ, AXLI, AXLJ
Where
Wis the uniform load on the element.
V2Iis the shear on the I end in the local 2 direction.
V3Iis the shear on the I end in the local 3 direction.
V2Jis the shear on the J end in the local 2 direction.
V3Jis the shear on the J end in the local 3 direction.
XMI2is the moment on the I end about the local 2 axis.
XMI3is the moment on the I end about the local 3 axis.
XMJ2is the moment on the J end about the local 2 axis.
XMJ3is the moment on the J end about the local 3 axis.
XMMAXis the maximum midspan moment if uniform loads exist.
XMLis the distance from the I end where the maximum midspan moment exists.
FRATIis the capacity ratio at the I end.
FRATJis the capacity ratio at the J end.
AXLIis the axial force at the I end of the member.
AXLJis the axial force at the J end of the member.
NOTE: All values are single precision real numbers (4 bytes). Also, the pile elements come first, then the
structure elements.
18.11 Analysis Convergence Information

File: name.NCV
This file contains analysis parameters and convergence information.
Nconv
Where
Nconv is the number of converged load cases (for static analyses)
is the number of converged load combinations (for AASHTO load combination problems)
is the number of converged time steps (for dynamic analyses)
Phiovr
Where
Phiovris the user-defined strength reduction "phi" factor to use when factoring the interaction diagrams.
NPlt
Where
NPltis the results version number (currently version 1)
Ndynam
Where
Ndynamis the type of analysis (0 for static, 1 for dynamic, 2 for response spectrum analysis)
NTimeStep
Where
NTimeStepis the time step used (for time domain dynamic analysis, otherwise 0)
NVEC
Where
NVECis the number of eigenvectors (for response spectrum analysis, otherwise 0)
18.12 Mode Shape and Frequency Information (Response Spectrum Analysis)
File: name.EIG
This file contains eigenvalues (frequencies) and eigenvectors (mode shapes) used in the response spectrum
analysis.
NVEC
Where
NVECis the number of number of eigenvectors
NNODE
Where
NNODEis the number of nodes in the model
FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, .. FREQN
Where
FREQxis the vibration frequency for mode x.
Loop over the number of eigenvectors and over each node in the model
NODE, PHIXX, PHIYY, PHIZZ, PHIRX, PHIRY, PHIRZ
Where
NODEis the model node number (integer)
PHIXXis the eigenvector in the x-direction (double)
PHIYYis the eigenvector in the y-direction (double)
PHIZZis the eigenvector in the z-direction (double)
PHIRXis the eigenvector about the x-axis (double)
PHIRYis the eigenvector about the y-axis (double)
PHIRZis the eigenvector about the z-axis (double)
Eigenvector data read example:

Do I=1,NVEC
Do j=1,NNODE
Read() NODE, (PHI(k), k=1, 6)
Enddo
Enddo
18.13 AASHTO Load Combination Results
File: name.ASH
This file contains design code and limit state information.
nCodeType
Where
nCodeTypeis the AASHTO design code used for load combinations
(0 for LRFD, 1 for LFD)
nGroup1, nGroup2, , nGroup11
Where
nGroup1are the limit states that were analyzed
(0 for analyzed, 1 for not analyzed)
(CritPl(J),J=1,11)
Where
CritPlis load combination number with the maximum pile demand/capacity ratio for each analyzed limit state (0
if not analyzed)
(CritCol(J),J=1,11)
Where
CritPlis load combination number with the maximum pier column demand/capacity ratio for each analyzed limit
state (0 if not analyzed)
(CritPierCap (J),J=1,11)
Where
CritPlis load combination number with the maximum pier cap demand/capacity ratio for each analyzed limit
state (0 if not analyzed)
References
Andrade, P., "Materially and Geometrically Non-Linear Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles Using a Discrete
Element Technique," Masters Report, Universtiy of Florida, Gainesville, 1994.
Bamford, W. E. (1969). Anisotropy, and the natural variability of rock properties, Proc. Symp. Rock Mech.,
Sydney, 1-10.
Bowles, J. E. (1987). Elastic Foundation Settlement on Sand Deposits, Journal of Geotechnical Engineering,
ASCE, Vol. 113, No. 8, pp. 846-860.
Bowles, J. E., "Foundation Analysis and Design", McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977.
Brown, D., Morrison, C., and Reese, L. (1988), "Lateral Load Behavior of a Pile Group in Sand," ASCE Journal of
Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 114, No. 11, pp. 1261-1276.
Brown, E. T. (1970). Strength of models of rocks with intermittent joints, J. Soil Mech. Fdn. Eng., ASCE, 96,
1935-9.
California Department of Transportation (CALTRANS), Bridge Design Practice Manual, Sacrament, CA, 1981.
Chai, Y., H., Preistly, M., J., N., and Seible, F. (1991), "Flexural Retrofit of Circular Reinforced Bridge Columns by
Steel Jacketing,", University of California, San Diego, La Jolla.
Consolazio et. al. (2006), "Barge Impact Testing of the St. George Island Causeway Bridge, Phase III", University
of Florida, Final report, FDOT Contract No. BC-354 RPWO 76.
Das, B. M. (1980). A Procedure for estimation of Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations in Clay, Soils and
Foundations, Vol . 20, No. 1 pp. 77-82.
Das, B. M., and Jones, A. D. (1982). Uplift Capacity of Rectangular Foundations in Sand, Transportation
Research Record 884, National Research Council, Washington, D. C., pp. 54-58.
De Beer, E. E. (1970). Experimental Determination of the Shape Factors and Bearing Capacity Factors of Sand,
Geotechnique, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp. 387-411.
FHWA, PCSTABLS-Users Manual, Federal Highway Administration, Springfield, VA 1988.
Filippou, F. C., Popov, E. P., Bertero, V. V. (1983). "Effects of Bond Deterioration on Hysteretic Behavior of
Reinforced Concrete Joints". Report EERC 83-19, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of
California, Berkeley.
Gazioglu, S. M., and ONeill, M. W. "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohesive Soils," from Analysis and
Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a symposium sponsored by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering
Division, ASCE National Convention, San Francisco, CA, pp. 192-213.
Georgiadis, M. "Development of P-Y curves for Layered Soils," Proceedings, Geotechnical Practice in Offshore
Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, pp. 536-545.
Getter, D. J., and Consolazio, G. R., (2011). Relationships of barge bow force-deformation for bridge design:
Probabilistic consideration of oblique impact scenarios. Transportation Research Record 2251, Transportation
Research Board, Washington, DC, 3-15, 2011.
Hanna, A. M., and Meyerhof, G. G. (1981). Experimental Evaluation of Bearing Capacity of Footings Subjected
to Inclined Loads, Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 18, No. 4, pp. 599-603.
Hannigan, P. J., Goble, G. G., Likins, G. E., and Rausche, F., (2006). "Design and Construction of Driven Pile
Foundations Volume I and II," FHWA Publication No. FHWA-NHI-05-042. U.S. Department of Transportation,
Federal Highway Administration, Washington D.C.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1980). Empirical strength criterion for rock masses, J. Geotech. Engng. Div., ASCE,
106 (GT 9), p. 1013-1035.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1988). The Hoek-Brown failure criterion a 1988 update , Rock Engineering for
Underground Excavations, Proc. 15th Canadian Rock Mech. Symp. J. C. Curran, Ed. Toronto: Dept. Civil
Engineering, University of Toronto, p. 31-38.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1997). Practical estimates or rock mass strength , Int. J. Rock Mech. & Mining Sci. &
Geomechanics Abstracts. 34(8), p. 1165-1186.
Itani, A. M. "Future Use of Composite Steel-Concrete Columns in Highway Bridges." AISC Engineering
Journal.33, No.3 pp. 110-115 1996.
Janbu, N., Bjerrum, L., and Kjaernsli, B. (1956). Veiledning vedlosning av fundamenteringsoppgaver,
Publication No. 18, Norwegian Geotechnical Institute, pp. 30-32.
Kim, Myoung-Ho, "Analysis of Osterburg and Stanamic Axial Load Testing and Conventional Lateral Load
Testing", Masters Thesis, University of Florida, Gainsvelli, Florida, 2001.
Kulhawy, F. and Mayne, P. "Manual for Estimating Soil Properties for Foundation Design." Electric Power
Research Institute (EPRI) Report. EPRI EL-6800. Project 1493-6. Aug. 1990, pp. 5-17.
Kumbhojkar, A. S. (1993). Numerical Evaluation of Terzaghis Ny, Journal of Geotechnical Engineering,
American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 119, No. 3, pp. 598-607.
Mandel, J., and Salencon, J. (1972). Force protante dun sol sur une assise rigide (tude thorique),
Geotechnique, Vol. 22, No. 1, pp. 79-93.
Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R., "Theoretical Stress Strain Model for Confined Concrete" ASCE Journal
of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1804-1826, 1988.
Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R., "Observed Stress-Strain Behavior of Confined Concrete" ASCE Journal
of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1827-1849, 1988.
Matlock, H. "Correlations for Design of Laterally Loaded Piles in Soft Clay," Paper No. OTC 1204, Proceedings,
Second Annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, Texas, Vol. 1, 1970, pp. 577-594.
McVay,M. C., O'Brien, M., Townsend, F. C., Bloomquist, D. G., and Caliendo, J. A. "Numerical Analysis of
Vertically Loaded Pile Groups," ASCE, Foundation Engineering Congress, Northwestern University, Illinois, July,
1989, pp. 675-690.
McVay,M. C., M., Niraula, L. "Development of Modified T-Z Curves for Large Diameter Piles/Drilled Shafts in
Limestone for FB-Pier," Report Number 4910-4504-878-12, National Technical Information Service, Springfield,
VA June 2004.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1953). The Bearing Capacity of Foundations Under Eccentric and Inclined Loads,
Proceedings, Third International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Zrich, Vol. 1, pp.
440-445.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1963). Some Recent Research on the Bearing Capacity of Foundations, Canadian
Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 16-26.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1974). Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Footings on Sand Layer Overlying Clay, Canadian
Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 224-229.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Adams, J. I. (1968). The Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations, Canadian Geotechnical
Journal, Vol. 5, No. 4, pp. 225-244.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Chaplin, T. K. (1953). The Compression and Bearing Capacity of Cohesive Soils, British
Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 4, pp. 20-26.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Hanna, A. M. (1978). Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Foundations on Layered Soil under
Inclined Load, Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, pp. 565-572.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1965). Shallow Foundations, Journal of Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 91, No. SM2, pp. 21-31
Mitchell, J. S., "A Nonlinear Analysis of Bi-Axially Loaded Beam-Columns Using a Discrete Element Model," Ph.
D. Dissertation, The University of Texas at Austin, August, 1973.
Mirza, S., A., and MacGregor, J., G., "Variability of mechanical properties of reinforcing bars,", ASCE Journal of
Structural Engineering, 105(ST5):921-937, May 1979.
Murchison, J. M. and ONeill, M. W. "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohesionless Soils," from Analysis and
Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a symposium sponsored by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering
Division, ASCE National Convention, San Francisco, CA, pp. 174-191.
ONeill, M. W. and Dunnavant, T. W., "A Study of Effect of Scale, Velocity, and Cyclic Degradability on Laterally
Loaded Single Piles in Overconsolidated Clay.", Rep. No. UHCE 84-7, Dept. of Civil Engineering, Univ. of
Houston, Houston, TX, 1984.
ONeill, M.W., Townsend, F. C., Hassan, K. M., Buller, A., and Chan, P. S., "Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in
Intermediate Geomaterials," Report No. FHWA-RD-95-172, November 1996.
Peck, R. B., W. E. Hanson, and T. H. Thornburn (1953). Foundation Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, New
York.
Peck, R.B., Hanson, W. E. and Thornburn, T. H., "Foundation Engineering", John Wiley & Sons, 1974.
Pinder, Terrence, "A Model for Concrete Under The Effect of Transverse Confinement", Report presented to the
graduate committee of the Department of Civil Engineering, University of Florida, Summer 1997.
Precast Conrete Institute, PCI Design Handbook, 4th Ed., Chicago IL, 1992.
Randolph, M.F., "Piles Subjected to Torsion," Journal of the Geotechnical Division, ASCE, Vol. 107, No. GT8,
August, 1981, pp. 1095-1111.
Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R. and Koop, F. D "Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in Sand," Paper No. OTC 2080,
Proceedings, Fifth Annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, Texas, 1974 (GESA Report No. D-75-9).
Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R. and Koop, F. D. "Field Testing and Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in Stiff Clay,"
Paper No. OTC 2312, Proceedings, Seventh Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, Texas, 1975.
Reese, L. C. and Welch, R. C. "Lateral Loading of Deep Foundations in Stiff Clay," Journal of the Geotechnical
Engineering Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 101, No. GT7, Proceedings Paper 11456, 1975,
pp. 633-649 (GESA Report No. D-74-10).
Sayed, S. M. and Bakeer, R. M. "Efficiency Formula For Pile Groups," Journal of the Geotechnical Engineering,
American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 118, No. 2, Paper No. 26553, 1992, pp. 278-299.
Scott, B., D., Park R., and Priestly, M., J., N., "Stress-strain Behavior of concrete confined by overlapping hoops at
low and high strain rates,", ACI Journal , 79(1): 13-27, Jan./Feb 1982.
Stoll, U.W., "Torque Shear Test of Cylindrical Friction Piles," Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 42, No. 4, April., 1972,
pp.63-64.
Stone, W., C. and Cheok, G., S., "Inelastic Behavior of Full-Scale Bridge Columns Subjected to Cyclic Loading".
Report No. NIST/BSS-166, National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce,
Gaithersberg, MD 20899, Jan. 1989.
Sudip Basack, (2007) "Experimental Investigation of Pile Group under Lateral Cyclic Load in Layered Soil", Dept.
of Applied Mechanics, Bengal Engineering and Science University
Terzaghi, K. (1943). Theoretical Soil Mechanics, Wiley, New York.
University of Florida, "Development of Modified T-Z Curves for Large Diameter Piles/Drilled Shafts in Limestone
for FB-Pier", UF Project #4910-4504-878-12.
Vesic, A. S. (1963) Bearing Capacity of Deep Foundation in Sand. Highway Research Record Mo. 39, National
Academy of Sciences, pp. 112-153.
Vesic, A. S. (1973) Analysis of Ultimate Loads of Shallow Foundations. Journal of Soil Mechanics and
Foundations Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 99, No. SM1, pp. 45-73.
Wang, S. T., and Reese, L. C., "COM624P Laterally loaded pile analysis for the microcomputer, ver. 2.0"
FHWA-SA-91-048, Springfield, VA, 1993.
Welch, R. C., and Reese, L.C., "Lateral Load Behavior of Drilled Shafts", Research Rep. No. 3-5-65-99,
conducted for Texas Highway Department and U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration, Bureau of Public Roads, Center for Highway Research, Univ. of Texas at Austin, TX, 1972.
Yassin, M., "Nonlinear analysis of prestressed concrete structures under monotonic and cyclic loads", PhD.
dissertation, University of California, Berkeley, 1994.
Tutorials
The tutorials below require an Internet connection and are located on the BSI server. (Click Link to download)
Element Forces
Covers the Element Forces Dialog.
Help About
The Help About displays important program information.
License Update
Explains how to update a license in FB-MultiPier.
Max Min
Covers the Max Min Dialog.
Percentage Steel
Explains how to use the Percentage Steel method to enter reinforcing steel.
Pile Sets
Explains how to create Pile Sets.
Printable Forces
Covers the Printable Forces Dialog.
Soil Plot
Covers the Soil Plot Dialog.
Soil Table
Demonstrates how to enter data in the Soil Table.
Zoom Feature
Covers the Zoom features in FB-MultiPier.

FB-MultiPier Help Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FB-MultiPier Help Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FB-MultiPier Version 5.

Multiple Pier Modeling

1.1 File Menu

Figure: 1.1.a File Menu Options

1.2 View Menu

Figure: 1.2.a View Menu Options

1.3 Control Menu

Figure: 1.3.a Control Menu Options

1.4 Wizard Menu

Figure: 1.4.a Wizard Menu Options

1.5 Help Menu

Figure: 1.5.a Help Menu Options

1.6 About FB-MultiPier

Figure: 1.6.a About FB-MultiPier

2.1 New Project/Problem Page

Figure: 2.1.a New Problem Page

2.1.1 General Pier Option

Figure: 2.1.b General Pier Model

2.1.2 Pile and Cap Option

Figure: 2.1.c Pile and Cap Model

2.1.3 Single Pile Option

Figure: 2.1.d Single Pile Model

2.1.4 High Mast Light/Sign Option

Figure: 2.1.e High Mast, Light/Sign Model

2.1.5 Retaining Wall Option

Figure: 2.1.f Retaining Wall Model

2.1.6 Sound Wall Option

Figure: 2.1.g Sound Wall Model

2.1.7 Stiffness Option

Figure: 2.1.h Stiffness Model

2.1.8 Pile Bent Option

Figure: 2.1.i Pile Bent Model

2.1.9 Column Analysis Option

Figure: 2.1.j Column Model

2.1.10 Bridge (Multiple Piers) Option

Figure: 2.1.k Bridge Model

2.1.11 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Option

Figure: 2.1.l One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model

2.2 Analysis Page

Figure: 2.2.a Analysis Page

Interaction Diagram Phi Factor

2.2.1 Pile/Pier Behavior

Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.

2.2.2 Section Properties

2.2.3 Iteration Control

2.2.4 Analysis Type

Return to the Analysis Page.

2.2.5 Soil Behavior

Check "Include Soil in Analysis" to include soil in the problem.

2.2.6 Interaction Diagram Phi Factor

2.2.7 Design Options

Return to the Analysis Page.

2.2.8 Stiffness Options

2.2.9 Print Control

Pile Element Forces

Pier Element Forces

Soil Response Forces

Soil Data per Layer

Soil Data per Pile Node

Soil Graph per Pile Node

Bridge Span Element Displacement

Bridge Span Element Forces

Bridge Span Properties